蕴的详细解释的注释巴利
14. Khandhaniddesavaṇṇanā
421 “以一切行相”是指:近行定的行相、安止定的行相、自在运用的行相、超越寻等诸支的行相、对色等离染的行相、以十四种方式调伏心的行相、证得五种功德的行相——就是以这样等等的一切修习行相。巴利
421.Sabbākārenāti upacārākāro, appanākāro, vasībhāvākāro, vitakkādisamatikkamākāro, rūpādīhi virajjanākāro, cuddasadhā cittassa paridamanākāro, pañcavidhaānisaṃsādhigamākāroti evamādinā sabbena bhāvanākārena.
“紧接着它之后”是指:按照“心、慧”这样的说法顺序和修行顺序,紧接在那个定之后。连接关系是:具足定修习的比丘应当修习慧。因为这里以“应当修习慧”这样极为简略的方式宣说,或者在偈颂注释中以“在定石上善加磨利的观慧之剑”这样极其简略地讲述,所以这个慧,单从自性上来了知,尚且不容易;又因为没有显示修习的方法,要修习就更不容易了——这是连接关系。以提问为含义的就是问,业、作用、造作,问本身就是业,所以叫问业,意思是提问的努力。巴利
Tadanantarāti ‘‘cittaṃ pañña’’nti evaṃ desanākkamena, paṭipattikkamena ca tassa samādhissa anantarā. Paññā bhāvetabbā samādhibhāvanāya samannāgatena bhikkhunāti sambandho. ‘‘Paññañca bhāvaya’’nti evaṃ atisaṅkhepadesitattā, gāthāvaṇṇanāyaṃ vā ‘‘samādhisilāyaṃ sunisitaṃ vipassanāpaññāsattha’’nti evaṃ ativiya saṅkhepena bhāsitattā ayaṃ sā paññāti sabhāvato viññātumpi tāva na sukarā. Bhāvanāvidhānassa pana adassitattā pageva bhāvetuṃ na sukarāti sambandho. Pucchanaṭṭhena pañhā, kammaṃ kiriyā karaṇaṃ, pañhāva kammaṃ pañhākammaṃ, pucchanapayogoti attho.
“什么是慧?”这是问它的自性。“以什么意义称为慧?”意思是:称为慧,是以什么意义、什么道理而说的?也就是,“慧”这个词是依据什么所表达的含义而成立的。那么,这个慧,应当如何从自性、作用、现起方式、直接原因来了知呢?所以说:“它的相、作用、现起、近因是什么?”
“有几种?”这是问分类。那为什么这里没有提出杂染和清净的问题呢?回答说:出世间慧根本没有杂染。既然没有杂染,哪里还谈得上问清净呢?所以这两方面都没有提。至于世间慧,它们已经包含在修习方法里了,所以没有单独提出来;或者因为已经包含在道非道智见清净中;或者按照定修习中所说的方式可以了解,所以没有单独提。所谓修行,只有在见到功德时才会发生,所以说:“修习慧有什么功德?”巴利
Kā paññāti sarūpapucchā. Kenaṭṭhena paññāti kena atthena paññāti vuccati, ‘‘paññā’’ti padaṃ kaṃ abhidheyyatthaṃ nissāya pavattanti attho. Sā panāyaṃ paññā sabhāvato, kiccato, upaṭṭhānākārato, āsannakāraṇato ca kathaṃ jānitabbāti āha ‘‘kānassā lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānī’’ti. Katividhāti pabhedapucchā. Kasmā panettha saṃkilesavodānapucchā na gahitāti? Vuccate – lokuttarāya tāva paññāya nattheva saṃkileso. Asati ca tasmiṃ kuto vodānapucchāti tadubhayaṃ na gahitaṃ. Lokiyāya pana tāni bhāvanāvidhāne eva antogadhānīti katvā visuṃ na gahitāni maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhiantogadhattā , samādhibhāvanāyaṃ vā vuttanayānusārena veditabbānīti na gahitāni. Paṭipatti nāma diṭṭhānisaṃse eva hotīti āha ‘‘paññābhāvanāya ko ānisaṃso’’ti.
422 “其中”是指那个地方,或者指那个提问的事情。“解答”就是开显。因为被问的义理还没有显明,就像被攥在拳头里一样隐覆着;把它打开阐明,就是解答,因为它使那义理变得明显。“什么是慧?”这虽然是直接问自性,但对于具有分类的人来说,自性的阐明恰恰只有通过展示分类才能达成,所以应当先毫无遗漏地显示分类。为了显示那个分类以及其中的过患,才说了“慧有多种”等话。其中,“多种”是依善等来分的众多类别。“种种不同”是依义释等差别、闻所成智等差别而成为各种不同。“那一切”就是那毫无遗漏的慧的分类。“不能成就”是说:这里指的是与观修习一起的道修习,因为靠它才能解开渴爱的缠结;而那个则不能成就。如果毫无遗漏地解答慧的分类,那么像“一种智事”等《分别论》751里的一切智事分别,以及诸经中各处所说的慧的分类,甚至把整个阿毗达摩的理趣都引来解答,这样一来,这里所说的慧修习方法就没有了解答的余地。而且,慧在处非处、业异熟差别等对境中转起的差别,也应当随宜连同果非果的差别一起分别解答。但那样解答的话,反而会变成散乱,就像落在不相应的境上一样。所以说“而且更会变成散乱”。“与善心相应的观智”——这里,用“善”这个字遮止了两种无记,也遮破了“有杂染慧”这种邪说;用“观智”这个词遮止了其余的善慧。巴利
422.Tatrāti tasmiṃ, tassa vā pañhākammassa. Vissajjananti vivaraṇaṃ. Pucchito hi attho avibhāvitattā nigūḷho muṭṭhiyaṃ kato viya tiṭṭhati, tassa vivaraṇaṃ vissajjanaṃ vibhūtabhāvakaraṇato. Kā paññāti kāmañcāyaṃ sarūpapucchā, vibhāgavantānaṃ pana sabhāvavibhāvanaṃ vibhāgadassanamukheneva hotīti vibhāgo tāva anavasesato dassetabbo. Taṃdassanena ca ayamādīnavoti dassetuṃ ‘‘paññā bahuvidhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bahuvidhāti kusalādivasena anekavidhā. Nānappakārāti atthajāpikādibhedena, sutamayañāṇādibhedena ca nānāvidhā. Taṃ sabbanti taṃ anavasesaṃ paññāvibhāgaṃ. Na sādheyyāti vipassanābhāvanāya saddhiṃ maggabhāvanā idha adhippetattho. Tāya hi taṇhājaṭāvijaṭanaṃ, tañca na sādheyya. Anavasesato hi paññāpabhede vissajjiyamāne ‘‘ekavidhena ñāṇavatthū’’tiādiko (vibha. 751) sabbo ñāṇavatthu vibhaṅge, suttantesu ca tattha tattha āgato paññāpabhedo. Sakalopi vā abhidhammanayo āharitvā vissajjetabbo bhaveyya, tathā ca sati yvāyaṃ idha paññābhāvanāvidhi adhippeto, tassa vissajjanāya okāsova na bhaveyya. Kiñca yvāyaṃ ṭhānāṭhānakammantaravipākantarādivisaye paññāya pavattibhedo, sopi yathārahaṃ saddhiṃ phalāphalabhedena vibhajitvā vissajjetabbo siyā. So ca pana vissajjiyamāno aññadatthu vikkhepāya saṃvatteyya, yathā taṃ avisaye. Tenāha ‘‘uttari ca vikkhepāya saṃvatteyyā’’ti. Kusalacittasampayuttaṃ vipassanāñāṇanti ettha kusala-ggahaṇena duvidhampi abyākataṃ nivatteti, tathā ‘‘atthi saṃkiliṭṭhapaññā’’ti evaṃ pavattaṃ micchāvādaṃ paṭisedheti. Vipassanāñāṇa-ggahaṇena sesakusalapaññā.
423 “以想知和识知的相为殊胜”,意思是凭借想知的相和识知的相而更为超胜。因为,以种种方式了知,就是知的状态,也就是取境的方式。这个状态对它们来说是共同的,而不是想知等的相。“黄”等——这里的“iti”一词是“等等”的意思,用它来涵盖“红、白、长、短”等想所应执取的相。“仅仅是想知而已”——这里所说的想知,是指把“青、黄”等作为所缘中存在的或不存在的想的标记来了知。同样,它又以再次想知的因相为作用。用“仅仅”一词,以遮止差别的含义,排除了识知和慧知的方式;用“而已”一词,断定在某些时候这些差别对它来说根本不存在。因此说“无常、苦”等。其中,连识的作用都做不到的想,怎么能做慧的作用呢?所以说“不能使通达诸相”,而没有说“道的显现”。在所缘中现起的识,并不像想那样仅仅以青黄等的想知方式现起,而是在那里了知其他差别而现起,所以说“识”等。那么识怎样使通达诸相呢?通过慧所指示的道路。因为以相为所缘的观,多次通达诸相而现起,由于熟练,依靠串习的力量,即使与智不相应的心,观也能生起,就像熟练地诵读典籍时,已经熟知的段落也察觉不到一样。“通达诸相”是就仅仅以诸相为所缘来说的,不是指通达。奋力而上,是依生灭智的次第而精勤。不能使道显现,因为没有觉悟的自性。依照所说的方式,依照在识中所说的方式,既了知所缘,也使通达诸相。而依靠自己不与他人共有的威力,奋力而上,也使道显现。巴利
423.Sañjānanavijānanākāravisiṭṭhanti sañjānanākāravijānanākārehi sātisayaṃ. Yato nānappakārato jānanaṃ jānanabhāvo visayaggahaṇākāro. So hi nesaṃ samāno, na sañjānanādiākāro. Pītakantīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, tena ‘‘lohitakaṃ odātaṃ dīghaṃ rassa’’ntiādike saññāya gahetabbākāre saṅgaṇhāti. Sañjānanamattamevāti ettha sañjānanaṃ nāma ‘‘nīlaṃ pīta’’ntiādikaṃ ārammaṇe vijjamānaṃ vā avijjamānaṃ vā saññānimittaṃ katvā jānanaṃ. Tathā hesā puna sañjānanapaccayanimittakaraṇarasā. Matta-saddena visesanivattiatthena vijānanapajānanākāre nivatteti, eva-saddena kadācipi imissā te visesā natthevāti avadhāreti. Tenāha ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi . Tattha viññāṇakiccampi kātuṃ asakkontī saññā kuto paññākiccaṃ kareyyāti ‘‘lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti’’cceva vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘maggapātubhāva’’nti. Ārammaṇe pavattamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ na tattha saññā viya nīlapītādikassa sañjānanavaseneva pavattati, atha kho tattha aññañca visesaṃ jānantameva pavattatīti āha ‘‘viññāṇa’’ntiādi. Kathaṃ pana viññāṇaṃ lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetīti? Paññāya dassitamaggena. Lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya hi anekavāraṃ lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhitvā paṭivijjhitvā pavattamānāya paguṇabhāvato paricayavasena ñāṇavippayuttacittenapi vipassanā sambhavati, yathā taṃ paguṇassa ganthassa sajjhāyane ñāyāgatāpi vārā na viññāyanti. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhanti ca lakkhaṇānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na paṭivijjhanaṃ. Ussakkitvāti udayabbayañāṇapaṭipāṭiyā āyūhitvā. Maggapātubhāvaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti asambodhasabhāvattā. Vuttanayavasenāti viññāṇe vuttanayavasena ārammaṇañca jānāti, lakkhaṇapaṭivedhañca pāpeti. Attano pana anaññasādhāraṇena ānubhāvena ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvañca pāpeti.
现在,为了用譬喻来确立前面所说的义理,说出了“譬如”等话。其中,“未生慧”是指还没有生起世俗言说的智慧。“受用与享用”是指值得受用与享用,意思是能够获得受用与享用之物。“精明者”是指大商人。“伪币”是指用铜、黄铜等做成的仿冒钱币。“半价者”是指价值只有一半的。“iti”这个词是“等”的意思,用它来涵盖四分之一价、等值、超四分价等。“那些种类”是指因陀罗网、ājāti花等种类,以及精明者等种类。巴利
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāya patiṭṭhāpetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ajātabuddhīti asañjātabyavahārabuddhi. Upabhogaparibhoganti upabhogaparibhogārahaṃ, upabhogaparibhogavatthūnaṃ paṭilābhayogyanti attho. Chekoti mahāsāro. Kūṭoti kahāpaṇapatirūpako tambakaṃsādimayo. Addhasāroti upaḍḍhagghanako. Iti-saddo ādiattho, tena pādasāra samasāraparopādasārādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Te pakāreti indajālājātipupphādippakāre ceva chekādippakāre ca.
关于“想”等的比喻,是把譬喻和法义对应起来。想因为不区分差别,只是以整体的方式抓取所缘,所以说它像小孩看见钱币。正如说它“以当下呈现的境作为近因”。识因为能够抓取所缘中某一部分的特征,所以说它像村里人看见钱币。慧因为能毫无遗漏地通达所缘的一切差别,所以应当知道,说它像金匠看见钱币。“以种种方式了知”——这句话指出,所应了知的诸法各自有种种不同的方式,而如实通达它们就是慧。正如所说:“一切法以一切相状,出现在佛陀世尊的智门前。”(《大义释》156;《小义释·莫伽罗阇童子问释》85)巴利
Saññā hītiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Saññā vibhāgaṃ akatvā piṇḍavaseneva ārammaṇassa gahaṇato dārakassa kahāpaṇadassanasadisī vuttā. Tathā hi sā ‘‘yathāupaṭṭhitavisayapadaṭṭhānā’’ vuccati. Viññāṇaṃ ārammaṇe ekaccavisesagahaṇasamatthatāya gāmikapurisassa kahāpaṇadassanasadisaṃ vuttaṃ. Paññā ārammaṇe anavasesavisesāvabodhato heraññikassa kahāpaṇadassanasadisī vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Nānappakāratojānana’’nti iminā ñeyyadhammā paccekaṃ nānappakārāti tesaṃ yāthāvato avabodho paññāti dasseti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthamāgacchantī’’ti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85).
“于彼处”指的是在那个心生起时。“在那里并非决定有”意思是:在那个心生起时,慧并非一定存在。因为在二因心和无因心里,慧不会生起。“未分离”就是不分离。“从他们”指从想和识。就像乐不一定与喜不相离,同样,想和识也不一定与慧不相离。但就像喜必定与乐不相离,慧也必定与想和识不相离。因此,这三种法虽然不相分离,要把它们分开却很困难,所以用三个人看钱币来作比喻。为了用另一种说法说明它们难以了知的差别,便说了“因此他说”等话。其中,即使在色法方面,把不同河流的水或不同的油倒进同一个容器里搅混之后,要辨认出“这是某条河的水,这是某种油”并如实显示出来,就已经很困难了,更何况在非色法方面呢——为了说明这一点,便说了“对于无色之心、心所”等话。巴利
Yatthāti yasmiṃ cittuppāde. Na tattha ekaṃsena hotīti tasmiṃ cittuppāde paññā ekantena na hoti. Na hi duhetukaahetukacittuppādesu paññā uppajjati. Avinibbhuttāti aviyuttā. Tehīti saññāviññāṇehi. Yathā hi sukhaṃ pītiyā na niyamato aviyuttaṃ, evaṃ saññāviññāṇāni paññāya na niyamato aviyuttāti. Yathā pana pīti sukhena niyamato aviyuttā, evaṃ paññā saññāviññāṇehi niyamato aviyuttā. Tasmā evaṃ avinibbhuttesu imesu tīsu dhammesu tesaṃ vinibbhogo dukkaroti tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ kahāpaṇadassanaṃ nidassitanti. Tesaṃ duviññeyyanānattataṃyeva vacanantarenapi dassetuṃ ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha rūpadhammesupi tāva nānānadīnaṃ udakassa, nānātelassa vā ekasmiṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā mathitassa ‘‘idaṃ asukāya nadiyā udakaṃ, idaṃ asukatela’’nti niddhāretvā sarūpato dassanaṃ dukkaraṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana arūpadhammesūti dassento ‘‘yaṃ arūpīnaṃ cittacetasikāna’’ntiādimāha.
424 诸法的自性,以及它们的共性,就是法性。其中,第一句(自性)取的是坚硬、触等各自特有的相;第二句(共性)取的是无常、苦等共同的相。慧以如实通达这两者为特相,所以说“慧以通达法性为特相”。就像灯光能驱散遮住瓶子、布等物的外在黑暗一样,慧能破除遮住上述法性的无明黑暗。慧光一生起,就驱散内心的黑暗,正因如此,它以在法性中不迷惑的方式呈现,所以说是“不迷乱现起”。或者说,它作为因,使作为果的不迷乱呈现出来,这样也可以说是“不迷乱现起”。因为这里指的是观慧,所以说“定是它的近因”。正如经句所说:“心入定者如实了知。”巴利
424. Dhammānaṃ sako bhāvo, samāno ca bhāvo dhammasabhāvo. Tattha paṭhamena kakkhaḷaphusanādisalakkhaṇaṃ gahitaṃ, dutiyena aniccadukkhatādisāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ. Tadubhayassa ca yāthāvato paṭivijjhanalakkhaṇā paññāti āha ‘‘dhammasabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā paññā’’ti. Ghaṭapaṭādipaṭicchādakassa bāhirandhakārassa dīpālokādi viya yathāvuttadhammasabhāvapaṭicchādakassa mohandhakārassa viddhaṃsanarasā. Uppajjamāno eva hi paññāloko hadayandhakāraṃ vidhamento evaṃ uppajjati, tato eva dhammasabhāvesu asammuyhanākārena paccupatiṭṭhatīti asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā. Kāraṇabhūtā vā sayaṃ phalabhūtaṃ asammohaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetīti evampi asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā. Vipassanāpaññāya idha adhippetattā ‘‘samādhi tassā padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti suttapadaṃ nibandhanabhāvena āgataṃ (saṃ. ni. 3.5, 99; saṃ. ni. 5.1071; netti. 40; mi. pa. 2.1.14).
慧分别论的注释巴利
Paññāpabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
425 “通达法性”是慧独有的自性,不能据此对它作出任何分类,所以说“先以通达法性为相,唯是一类”。以坏灭、彻底坏灭之义,轮回被称为世间;因为被轮回所包含而系属于世间,或者因为是在那里被了知,所以称为世间。因为不被轮回所包含,所以超越世间、从世间出离,称为出世间。出世间法也是与道相应、应当修习的。观慧也可以获得出世间这个名称,所以用“出世间”来指称它,并不矛盾。与以自己为所缘而生起的诸漏俱行,所以是有漏;即使以作所缘的方式来看,此中也没有它的诸漏,所以是无漏。通过“等”这个字,应当知道它含摄了漏不相应有漏等双论。依名色分别,就是依名分别和依色分别。因为初次现见涅槃,所以是“见”;又因为作为所依,相应法在这里存在,或者它自身在这里存在、生起,不像涅槃那样不显现,所以是“地”——见地,就是初道。其余三道,因为在初道已见之法上依修习而生起,不见任何前所未见之法,所以是“修习”,又依前面所说的含义称为“地”——修地。其中,慧依见地和修地而说为两种。不依赖闻等,只由思惟所生,是思所成。同样,闻所成、修所成也是如此。“所成”这个词应当分别与每一项连接。在增长中善巧,是增长善巧;在损减中善巧,是损减善巧;在方便——即产生每一种利益的因——中善巧,是方便善巧。应当分别把“善巧”这个词与每一项连接。向内执著、朝向内在,是内执著。同样,应当知道有外执著和内外执著。巴利
425. Dhammasabhāvapaṭivedho nāma paññāya āveṇiko sabhāvo, na tenassā koci vibhāgo labbhatīti āha ‘‘dhammasabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇena tāva ekavidhā’’ti. Lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko vuccati vaṭṭaṃ, tappariyāpannatāya loke niyuttā, tattha vā viditāti lokiyā. Tattha apariyāpannatāya lokato uttarā uttiṇṇāti lokuttarā. Lokuttarāpi hi maggasampayuttā bhāvetabbā. Vipassanāpariyāyopi tassā labbhatevāti lokuttara-ggahaṇaṃ na virujjhati. Attānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattehi saha āsavehīti sāsavā, ārammaṇakaraṇavasenapi natthi etissā āsavāti anāsavā. Ādi-saddena āsavavippayuttasāsavadukādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nāmarūpavavatthānavasenāti nāmavavatthānavasena, rūpavavatthānavasena ca. Paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato dassanañca, nissayabhāvato sampayuttā dhammā bhavanti ettha, sayampi vā bhavati uppajjati na nibbānaṃ viya apātubhāvanti bhūmi cāti dassanabhūmi, paṭhamamaggo. Sesamaggattayaṃ pana yasmā paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhasmiṃyeva dhamme bhāvanāvasena uppajjati, na adiṭṭhapubbaṃ kiñci passati, tasmā bhāvanā ca yathāvuttenatthena bhūmi cāti bhāvanābhūmi. Tattha paññā dassanabhūmibhāvanābhūmivasena duvidhāti vuttā. Sutādinirapekkhāya cintāya nibbattā cintāmayā. Evaṃ sutamayā, bhāvanāmayā ca. Mayasaddo paccekaṃ sambandhitabbo. Āye vaḍḍhiyaṃ kosallaṃ āyakosallaṃ, apāye avaḍḍhiyaṃ kosallaṃ apāyakosallaṃ, upāye tassa tassa atthassa nibbattikāraṇe kosallaṃ upāyakosallanti visuṃ visuṃ kosallapadaṃ sambandhitabbaṃ. Ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso paṭipajjanaṃ etissāti ajjhattābhinivesā. Evaṃ bahiddhābhinivesā, ubhayābhinivesā ca veditabbā.
426 “与世间道相应”的意思是:在世间善心生起的时候,与道相应,特别是与见清净等四种清净所包含的道相应。名称是安立在整体上的,但也可以用在整体的一部分上,所以说“与道相应”。或者也可以说,正见等每一个单独拿出来,也可以称为道,因此这样说。巴利
426.Lokiyamaggasampayuttāti lokiyakusalacittuppādesu maggasampayuttā, visesato diṭṭhivisuddhiādivisuddhicatukkasaṅgahitamaggasampayuttā. Samudāyesu pavattā samaññā tadekadesesupi vattatīti āha ‘‘maggasampayuttā’’ti, paccekampi vā sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ maggasamaññāti katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ.
即使法的差别不存在,仅仅因为词义上的不同,也会造成难以解说的言辞,所以说“但从含义上说,这仍然是世间与出世间”。在“与漏不相应、有漏”等双论中,也只是取“不相应”等说法的不同而已,从含义上说,慧仍然是世间与出世间,因此说“这个道理也一样”。通过“等”这个字,应当知道它涵盖了暴流所缘、暴流不相应、暴流所缘等双论。初禅的四道心,以及第二禅等的道心,这样在十六道心中也是如此。因为这里指的是观智,所以不取广大智。巴利
Dhammanānattābhāvepi padatthanānattamattena dukkaravacanaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘atthato panesā lokiyalokuttarāvā’’ti. Āsavavippayuttasāsavadukādīsupi vippayuttatādiggahaṇameva viseso, atthato lokiyalokuttarāva paññāti āha ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti. Ādi-saddena oghanīyaoghavippayuttaoghanīyādidukānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Paṭhamajjhānikāni cattāri maggacittāni, tathā dutiyādijjhānikāni cāti evaṃ soḷasasu maggacittesu. Vipassanāpaññāya idha adhippetattā mahaggatapaññā na gahitā.
427 依靠自己思考的力量:对于成就各种没有过失的利益,不靠别人的教导,只凭自己想办法思考的力量。依靠听闻的力量:依靠所听闻的别人教导的力量。或者以各种方式:指无论听过别人的教导,还是没听过,都自己独自致力于修习的人。“达到安止”:这是为了说明已达到顶峰的修所成慧,并不是说“只有达到安止的才是修所成慧”。巴利
427.Attano cintāvasenāti tassa tassa anavajjassa atthassa sādhane paropadesena vinā attano upāyacintāvaseneva. Sutavasenāti yathāsutassa paropadesassa vasena. Yathā tathā vāti parato upadesaṃ sutvā vā asutvā vā sayameva bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjantassa. ‘‘Appanāppattā’’ti idaṃ sikhāppattabhāvanāmayaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ, na pana ‘‘appanāppattāva bhāvanāmayā’’ti.
在智慧所安排、智慧所转化、方法所成就的业处中:这里,业本身就是业处;或者说,业与处合起来就是活命之处,所以叫业处。这个道理在工巧处上也一样。其中,业有两种:低劣的,比如木匠活之类;高尚的,比如农耕、经商之类。工巧也有两种:低劣的,比如编竹器之类;高尚的,比如印算、算术之类。明就是明处。应当知道,这里的明只限于如法的,不像龙咒、护身咒、驱鬼咒那一类。然而这些技艺,有些像菩萨那样的智者,为了让人间生活安乐,既不去看别人怎么做,也不去学已经做成的,也不去听别人讲解。他们只是凭自己的天性去思考、去做;而他们凭天性思考所做出来的,跟别人通过学习之后做出来的,是一样的。巴利
Yogavihitesūti paññāvihitesu paññāpariṇāmitesu upāyasampāditesu. Kammāyatanesūti ettha kammameva kammāyatanaṃ, kammañca taṃ āyatanañca ājīvānanti vā kammāyatanaṃ. Esa nayo sippāyatanesupi. Tattha duvidhaṃ kammaṃ hīnañca vaḍḍhakīkammādi, ukkaṭṭhañca kasivāṇijādi. Sippampi duvidhaṃ hīnañca naḷakārasippādi, ukkaṭṭhañca muddāgaṇanādi. Vijjāva vijjāṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃ dhammikameva nāgamaṇḍalaparittaphudhamanakamantasadisaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tāni panetāni ekacce paṇḍitā bodhisattasadisā manussānaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ ākaṅkhantā neva aññehi kariyamānāni passanti, na vā katāni uggaṇhanti, na kathentānaṃ suṇanti. Atha kho attano dhammatāya cintāya karonti, paññavantehi attano dhammatāya cintāya katānipi aññehi uggaṇhitvā karontehi katasadisāneva honti.
业自属智,就是“这个业是众生自己的,这个不是自己的”这样了知的智慧。随顺谛智,就是观智。因为它随顺于通达谛理,所以称为“随顺谛智”。现在为了说明它生起的方式,说了“色是无常的”等等。在这里,用“或”这个词表示不确定的意思,应当知道苦和无我的特相也已经被包括进去了,因为它们是紧接着生起的。凡是无常的,就是苦;凡是苦的,就是无我。“凡是这样的”,就是指前面已经说过的那些性质。随顺忍等等,都是智慧的别名。这个智慧因为不违背前面所说的业处等法而随顺,又因为对利益众生的修行、道谛、胜义谛和涅槃都不违背而随顺,所以叫随顺。这一切因为能够忍可、能够观察,所以叫忍;能够看见,所以叫见;能够欢喜,所以叫喜;能够了知,所以叫解;能够观照,所以叫观。而那些业处等法,通过这个智慧来审察而得到忍可,所以叫法审察忍。不从别人那里听闻而获得,就是没有听到别人的教导言说,只是自己思维而获得。这称为思所成慧。不过这种慧只在著名的菩萨们中生起。其中,随顺谛智只在最后有两位菩萨中生起,其余的慧则在一切圆满巴拉密的大智慧者中生起。从别人那里听闻而获得,应当知道,或者看见别人在做或已经做过的业处等,或者听到别人讲述的话,或者在老师面前学习而获得,这一切都称为从别人那里听闻而获得。已入定的人,就是具备等至的人,这里只是举例说明。观和道的智慧,在这里指的是修所成慧。巴利
Kammassakatanti ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ sattānaṃ sakaṃ, idaṃ no saka’’nti evaṃ jānanañāṇaṃ. Saccānulomikanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Taṃ hi saccapaṭivedhassa anulomanato ‘‘saccānulomika’’nti vuccati. Idānissa pavattanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ aniccanti vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vā-saddena aniyamatthena dukkhānattalakkhaṇānipi gahitānevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ nānantariyakabhāvato. Yaṃ hi aniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, tadanattāti. Yaṃ evarūpinti yaṃ evaṃ heṭṭhā niddiṭṭhasabhāvaṃ. Anulomikaṃ khantintiādīni paññāvevacanāni. Sā hi heṭṭhā vuttānaṃ kammāyatanādīnaṃ apaccanīkadassanena anulomanato, tathā sattānaṃ hitacariyāya maggasaccassa, paramatthasaccassa, nibbānassa ca avilomanato anulometīti anulomikā. Sabbānipi etāni kāraṇāni khamati daṭṭhuṃ sakkotīti khanti. Passatīti diṭṭhi. Rocetīti ruci. Munātīti muti. Pekkhatīti pekkhā. Te ca kammāyatanādayo dhammā etāya nijjhāyamānā nijjhānaṃ khamantīti dhammanijjhānakhanti. Parato asutvā paṭilabhatīti aññassa upadesavacanaṃ asutvā sayameva cintento paṭilabhati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ cintāmayā paññā nāma vuccati. Sā panesā abhiññātānaṃ bodhisattānameva uppajjati. Tatthāpi saccānulomikañāṇaṃ dvinnaṃyeva bodhisattānaṃ antimabhavikānaṃ, sesapaññā sabbesampi pūritapāramīnaṃ mahāpaññānaṃ uppajjati. Parato sutvā paṭilabhatīti kammāyatanādīni parena kariyamānāni vā katāni vā disvāpi parassa kathayamānassa vacanaṃ sutvāpi ācariyasantike uggahetvāpi paṭiladdhā sabbā parato sutvāva paṭiladdhā nāmāti veditabbā. Samāpannassāti samāpattisamaṅgissa, nidassanamattañcetaṃ. Vipassanāmaggapaññā idha ‘‘bhāvanāmayā paññā’’ti adhippetā.
“小所缘、大所缘”这种说法,是《分别论》里讲的慧。世间观,就是世间观的慧。出世间观,是指以涅槃为所缘而生起的无量所缘的慧,这里说的就是道智,所以叫出世间观。这种慧虽然不执取诸行的无常等相,但因为圆满完成了观照的作用,或者特别地照见了涅槃的真实相,所以称为观。至于种姓智,虽然也是无量所缘,但它处在转向道的位置上,所以不被称为观。巴利
Sāti ‘‘parittārammaṇā mahaggatārammaṇā’’ti (vibha. 753) vuttapaññā. Lokiyavipassanāti lokiyavipassanāpaññā. Sā lokuttaravipassanāti yā nibbānaṃ ārabbha pavattā appamāṇārammaṇā paññā vuttā, sā lokuttaravipassanāti maggapaññaṃ sandhāyāha. Sā hi saṅkhārānaṃ aniccatādiṃ agaṇhantīpi vipassanākiccapāripūriyā, nibbānassa vā tathalakkhaṇaṃ visesato passatīti vipassanāti vuccati. Gotrabhuñāṇaṃ pana kiñcāpi appamāṇārammaṇaṃ, maggassa pana āvajjanaṭṭhāniyattā na vipassanāvohāraṃ labhati.
依靠这个而达成,所以叫“益”,也就是增长。在这里,“善巧”指的是:对于那种以不利的减损与利益的生起为特征的“益”,所具备的善巧、熟练和精通。巴利
Ayanti etāya sampattiyoti āyo, vuddhi. Tattha kosallanti tasmiṃ anatthahāniatthuppattilakkhaṇe āye kosallaṃ kusalatā nipuṇatā.
不过,为了完全依照巴利圣典本身来显示那纯粹的益善巧,才说了“这些法”等话。其中,所谓“此即所说”,是指:对于这些不善法的不生起与断除,以及对于善法的生起与安住,那份慧就叫做益善巧。巴利
Taṃ pana ekantikaṃ āyakosallaṃ pāḷivaseneva dassetuṃ ‘‘ime dhamme’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idaṃ vuccatīti yā imesaṃ akusaladhammānaṃ anuppattipahānesu, kusaladhammānañca uppattiṭṭhitīsu paññā, idaṃ āyakosallaṃ nāmāti vuccati.
增长的特相属于增长,由于远离增长,所以是无增长。其中,善巧是指在那以利益丧失、无益生起为特征的无增长中,具有善巧、熟练,这就是无增长善巧。为了同样依照圣典来显示这一点,而说了“这些法”等。其中,所谓“此即是说”,是指对于这些善法的不生起与灭尽,或者对于不善法的生起与持续,所具有的慧,这就称为无增长善巧。增长善巧暂且可以说是慧,无增长善巧怎么就成了慧呢?有人这样认为:“能产生无增长的能力,也许可以叫无增长善巧”,但那只是他个人的想法。为什么?因为只有具慧的人才能这样了知:“当我这样作意时,未生的善法不生起,已生的善法灭尽;未生的不善法生起,已生的不善法增长。”他了知之后,就不让未生的不善法生起,舍弃已生的不善法;让未生的善法生起,使已生的善法达到修习圆满。因此,无增长善巧也是慧。巴利
Vuddhilakkhaṇā āyato apetattā apāyo, avuddhi. Tattha kosallanti tasmiṃ atthahānianatthuppattilakkhaṇe apāye kosallaṃ kusalatā apāyakosallaṃ. Tampi pāḷivaseneva dassetuṃ ‘‘ime dhamme’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idaṃ vuccatīti yā imesaṃ kusaladhammānaṃ anuppajjananirujjhanesu, akusaladhammānaṃ vā uppattiṭṭhitīsu paññā, idaṃ apāyakosallaṃ nāmāti vuccati. Āyakosallaṃ tāva paññā hotu, apāyakosallaṃ kathaṃ paññā nāma jātāti? Evaṃ maññati ‘‘apāyuppādanasamatthatā apāyakosallaṃ nāma siyā’’ti, taṃ pana tassa matimattaṃ. Kasmā? Paññavā eva hi ‘‘mayhaṃ evaṃ manasi karoto anuppannā kusalā dhammā nuppajjanti, uppannā nirujjhanti. Anuppannā akusalā dhammā uppajjanti, uppannā pavaḍḍhantī’’ti pajānāti, so evaṃ ñatvā anuppanne akusale na uppādeti, uppanne pajahati. Anuppanne kusale uppādeti, uppanne bhāvanāpāripūriṃ pāpeti. Evaṃ apāyakosallampi paññā evāti.
“于一切处”就是在一切之中。“那些各自的法”是指众生各自利益和安乐的法。“于彼刹那转起”是指在紧急的事务或怖畏发生时,为了对治它,就在那一个刹那生起。“有因由而生起”是说它的生起是有因由的,也就是纯粹依因由而生起。“于彼处的方便”是指在种种应作之事中成为方法。巴利
Sabbatthāti sabbesu. Tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānanti sattānaṃ taṃtaṃhitasukhadhammānaṃ. Taṅkhaṇappavattanti accāyike kicce vā bhaye vā uppanne tassa tikicchanatthaṃ tasmiṃyeva khaṇe pavattaṃ. Ṭhānena uppatti etassa atthīti ṭhānuppattikaṃ, ṭhānaso eva uppajjanakaṃ. Tatrupāyāti tatra tatra karaṇīye upāyabhūtā.
“执取”是指以“这是色,这是这么多的色”等方式,通过确定来执取。“执取两者”是指以“内、外”的次第,确定地执取两者。或者,以“凡是集起之法,那一切都是灭尽之法”的方式,一次性、不加区分地执取全部五蕴。而这是利根观者、大福德比丘的观修方式。巴利
Gahetvāti ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā pariggaṇhanavasena gahetvā. Ubhayaṃ gahetvāti ‘‘ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā’’ti ubhayaṃ anupubbato pariggahetvā. Atha vā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti ekappahāreneva sabbepi pañcakkhandhe avibhāgena pariggahetvā. Ayaṃ pana tikkhavipassakassa mahāpuññassa bhikkhuno vipassanābhiniveso.
428 “缘于苦谛”是指以苦谛为所缘,并且以破除覆盖苦谛的愚痴的方式生起的智,这就是苦智。“缘于苦之集”这里也是同样的解释方式。其余两句也是这样。因为,观察智是缘于四谛而生起的智;其中,第三个是道智,其余诸谛则是观智,这是很明显的。巴利
428.Dukkhasaccaṃ ārabbhāti dukkhasaccaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā, tappaṭicchādakasammohavidhaṃsanavasena ca pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ dukkhe ñāṇaṃ. Dukkhasamudayaṃārabbhāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tathā sesapadadvayepi. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ hi catusaccaṃ ārabbha pavattañāṇaṃ nāma, tatiyaṃ pana maggañāṇaṃ, itarasaccāni vipassanāñāṇanti pākaṭameva.
“于义等中区分而转起的诸智”这句话,是先把简要说的含义依照圣典本身来阐明,所以才说了“已说此”等话。其中,于义中的智就是义无碍解,也就是能够识别、阐明、确定义之种种差别的、于义中区分而转起的智,这称为义无碍解。其余几句也是同样的解说方式。能识别、阐明、确定法之种种差别的、于法中区分而转起的智,就是法无碍解。能识别、阐明、确定词句表达之种种差别的、于词句中区分而转起的智,就是词无碍解。能识别、阐明、确定辩才之种种差别的、于辩才中区分而转起的智,就是辩无碍解。辞与辩才的种种差别,应当依其所缘境——如义等的因果所生等差别,加以区分而了知。巴利
‘‘Atthādīsu pabhedagatāni ñāṇānī’’ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ pāḷivaseneva vivarituṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha atthe ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidāti yaṃ atthappabhedassa sallakkhaṇavibhāvanavavatthānakaraṇasamatthaṃ atthe pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ, ayaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā nāma. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Dhammappabhedassa hi sallakkhaṇavibhāvanavavatthānakaraṇasamatthaṃ dhamme pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā. Niruttippabhedassa sallakkhaṇavibhāvanavavatthānakaraṇasamatthaṃ niruttābhilāpe pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā. Paṭibhānappabhedassa sallakkhaṇavibhāvanavavatthānakaraṇasamatthaṃ paṭibhāne pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā. Niruttipaṭibhānappabhedā tabbisayānaṃ atthādīnaṃ paccayuppannatādibhedehi bhinditvā veditabbā.
涅槃也要依照能使人证得它的因由而被了知、被证得,这就是这里的含义。“凡任何由缘所生”这一句,涵盖了在谛、因、法、缘、行相各品中出现的苦等。在谛、缘、行相各品中说的是涅槃,在教法品中说的是所说义,在阿毗达摩分别中说的是异熟和唯作——应当只依据巴利圣典中所说的这些,来了知这五种义。“安置”就是令生起,这是对能生起的因等共同适用的词源解释。为了阐明这个含义,所以说“令转起,或令达到”。其中,前一种含义应当见于除道以外的诸法。因为所说(的教法)是通过令了知而使义转起的,而道则使人证得涅槃,所以在道上是后一种含义。因为,涅槃是应当证得的义,所说义是应当了知的义,其余的是应当令生起的义,这样义就有三种。巴利
Nibbānampi sampāpakahetuanusārena arīyati, adhigammatīti attho. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci paccayasambhūta’’nti etena saccahetudhammapaccayākāravāresu āgatāni dukkhādīni gahitāni. Saccapaccayākāravāresu nibbānaṃ, pariyattivāre bhāsitattho, abhidhammabhājanīye vipāko, kiriyā cāti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttānaṃ eva vasena pañca atthā veditabbā. Dahatīti vidahati, nibbattakahetuādīnaṃ sādhāraṇametaṃ nibbacanaṃ. Tadatthaṃ pana vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘pavatteti vā sampāpuṇituṃ vā detī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tesu purimo attho maggavajjesu daṭṭhabbo. Bhāsitampi hi avabodhanavasena atthaṃ pavatteti, maggo pana nibbānaṃ pāpetīti tasmiṃ pacchimo attho. Nibbānaṃ hi pattabbo attho, bhāsitattho ñāpetabbo attho, itaro nibbattetabbo atthoti evaṃ tividho hoti.
“凡任何能生果的因”这一句,在谛、因、法、缘、行相各段中,摄取了那里所说的集等;在谛、缘、行相各段中是道,在教法段中是所说,在阿毗达摩分别中是善与不善。这五种法,应当只依照巴利圣典中所述的这些来了知。其中,道是令证得的因,所说是令了知的因,其余的是令生起的因,应当这样了知三种因。在这里,由于唯作没有异熟,所以没有说它们是法。如果这样的话,它们不是异熟,难道也不应当说它们是义吗?不是的,因为它们是缘所生的。既然这样,善与不善也应当成为义吗?这没有过失,因为没有被否定。然而,由于善与不善是产生异熟的主要因,其相明显,所以说它们就是法。如果说唯作因为是缘,所以应当成为法呢?这也没有过失,因为没有被否定。然而,在业与果的关联中,由于唯作不具有因性,所以没有说它们是法。再者,如果不区分“这是此的缘,这是缘所生”,而只是观察善与不善、异熟与唯作等法,便能生起法与义的无碍解,因此应当看到,并没有说它们的义与法性。巴利
‘‘Yo koci phalanibbattako hetū’’ti etena saccahetudhammapaccayākāravāresu āgatāni samudayādīni gahitāni, saccapaccayākāravāresu maggo, pariyattivāre bhāsitaṃ, abhidhammabhājanīye kusalākusalanti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttānaṃ eva vasena pañca dhammā veditabbā. Tattha maggo sampāpako, bhāsitaṃ ñāpako, itaraṃ nibbattakoti evaṃ tividho hetu veditabbo. Ettha ca kiriyānaṃ avipākatāya dhammabhāvo na vutto. Yadi evaṃ vipākā na hontīti atthabhāvopi na vattabbo? Na, paccayuppannabhāvato. Evaṃ sati kusalākusalānampi atthabhāvo āpajjatīti ce? Nāyaṃ doso appaṭisiddhattā. Vipākassa pana padhānahetutāya pākaṭabhāvato dhammabhāvo eva tesaṃ vutto. Kiriyānaṃ paccayabhāvato dhammabhāvo āpajjatīti ce? Nāyaṃ doso appaṭisiddhattā. Kammaphalasambandhassa pana hetubhāvassābhāvato dhammabhāvo na vutto. Apica ‘‘ayaṃ imassa paccayo, ayaṃ paccayuppanno’’ti etaṃ bhedamakatvā kevalaṃ kusalākusale, vipākakiriyādhamme ca paccavekkhantassa dhammatthapaṭisambhidā hontīti tesaṃ atthadhammatā na vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里所说的“义”正是:把义和法分成五种来说明时所说的那个义;也正是这个义,在阿毗达摩中经过分别而被显示出来——这就是它们之间的关联。巴利
Ayameva hi atthoti yvāyaṃ atthadhammānaṃ pañcadhā vibhajanavasena attho vutto, ayameva abhidhamme vibhajitvā dassitoti sambandho.
在“法的语言表述”这一说法里,这里的“法”字是指自性,所以说“自性的语言”,意思是不颠倒的语言。因此又说“不偏离的惯用语”,意思是在让人理解各个含义时,声音惯用语有固定的对应关系。所谓“对其表述”,即表述那被称为自性语言的不偏离惯用语。而这种自性语言就是摩揭陀语。老师们从含义上说,它就是名称的施设。但另一些老师认为:如果自性语言以施设为自性,那么该被表述的就是施设,而不是言说,这就成了过失。而且,除了言说之外,并没有别的可表述、可发出的东西。如果认为可以通过触等言说来让人理解而加以表述,那么由于义和法也应该被理解,它们也就成了语言。而说“触”是自性语言,说“触、触”就不是,这个道理已经显示过了。而且,根本不存在这种非言说的情况。所以应当这样理解:正是作为言说的那种自性语言,在表述的时候,发出的就是声音。巴利
‘‘Dhammaniruttābhilāpe’’ti ettha dhamma-saddo sabhāvavācakoti katvā āha ‘‘sabhāvaniruttī’’ti, aviparītaniruttīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘abyabhicārī vohāro’’ti, tassa tassa atthassa bodhane paṭiniyatasambandho saddavohāroti attho. Tadabhilāpeti tassa sabhāvaniruttisaññitassa abyabhicārivohārassa abhilāpane. Sā panāyaṃ sabhāvanirutti māgadhabhāsā. Atthato nāmapaññattīti ācariyā. Apare pana yadi sabhāvanirutti paññattisabhāvā, evaṃ sati paññatti abhilapitabbā, na vacananti āpajjati. Na ca vacanato aññaṃ abhilapitabbaṃ uccāretabbaṃ atthi. Atha phassādivacanehi bodhetabbaṃ abhilapitabbaṃ, evañca sati atthadhammānampi bodhetabbattā tesampi niruttibhāvo āpajjati. Phassoti ca sabhāvanirutti, phassaṃ phassāti na sabhāvaniruttīti dassitovāyamattho. Na ca avacanaṃ evaṃpakāraṃ atthi. Tasmā vacanabhūtāya eva tassā sabhāvaniruttiyā abhilāpe uccāraṇeti attho daṭṭhabbo.
把那个自性词的声音作为所缘来观察时,能分辨那个自性词表述中各种分类的智,就是词无碍解。注释书里说:“这样,这个词无碍解是以声音为所缘生起的,不是以施设为所缘。”因此有人说:在以词的声音为所缘的耳识过程之后,词无碍解在意门中生起。而“词无碍解以现在法为所缘”这句话,是就执取言语的声音之后才了知而言的。但如果这样解释,就会犯一个毛病:就某一个现在所缘而说的,却变成了另一个现在所缘。然而,就像天耳智是确定人、非人等声音差别之因,能辨明各种声音一样,如果以现在的自性词声音为所缘,能辨明它,又说成为确定自性词和非自性词之因的智就是词无碍解,那就和圣典毫无冲突。而且,“把那个自性词的声音作为所缘来观察”这句话,并非不能说成“生起以现在声音为所缘的观察”。因为那个智正是在辨明自性词时,以观察各种声音之后为确定各种分类之因,在分析词、通达词时生起,所以它也是能分辨分类的。巴利
Taṃ sabhāvaniruttisaddaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā paccavekkhantassa tasmiṃ sabhāvaniruttābhilāpe pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā, ‘‘evamayaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā saddārammaṇā nāma jātā, na paññattiārammaṇā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 718) ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā niruttisaddārammaṇāya sotaviññāṇavīthiyā parato manodvāre niruttipaṭisambhidā pavattatīti vadanti. ‘‘Niruttipaṭisambhidā paccuppannārammaṇā’’ti (vibha. 749) ca vacanasaddaṃ gahetvā pacchā jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttanti. Evaṃ pana aññasmiṃ paccuppannārammaṇe aññaṃ paccuppannārammaṇaṃ vuttanti āpajjati. Yathā pana dibbasotañāṇaṃ manussādisaddabhedanicchayassa paccayabhūtaṃ taṃtaṃsaddavibhāvakaṃ, evaṃ sabhāvāsabhāvaniruttinicchayassa paccayabhūtaṃ paccuppannasabhāvaniruttisaddārammaṇaṃ taṃvibhāvakaṃ ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidāti vuccamāne na koci pāḷivirodho. ‘‘Taṃ sabhāvaniruttisaddaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā paccavekkhantassā’’ti ca ‘‘paccuppannasaddārammaṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇaṃ pavattentassā’’ti na nasakkā vattuṃ. Tañhi ñāṇaṃ sabhāvaniruttiṃ vibhāventameva taṃtaṃsaddapaccavekkhaṇānantaraṃ taṃtaṃpabhedanicchayahetubhāvato niruttiṃ bhindantaṃ paṭivijjhantameva uppajjatīti pabhedagatampi hotīti.
“于一切处有智”:意思是在一切所缘境中都有智,也就是一切智。因此说“以智为所缘的智”。或者说,“于一切处”是指在所有义等当中——因为它在三种或四种无碍解中都能生起;又因为作为善和唯作的无碍解具有法、义的性质,只在三种无碍解中生起,所以说“于一切处有智”。因此说“或如前所述”等。其中,“依各自所缘境、作用等”是指:依各自所缘境和作用等,了知“此智是以这些为所缘而生起,以此作用而行”。用“等”字涵盖了相、现起、近因、地等。因此说“这些诸智是阐明此义”等。巴利
Sabbattha ñāṇanti sabbasmiṃ visaye ñāṇaṃ, sabbampi ñāṇanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘ñāṇārammaṇaṃ ñāṇa’’nti. Sabbatthāti vā sabbesu atthādīsu, tīsu, catūsupi vā pavattattā, kusalakiriyābhūtāya paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāya dhammatthabhāvato tīsu eva vā pavattattā ‘‘sabbattha ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathāvuttesu vā’’tiādi. Tattha sagocarakiccādivasenāti sagocarassa, kiccādikassa ca vasena ‘‘idaṃ ñāṇaṃ idaṃ nāma ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattaṃ iminā nāma kiccenā’’ti jānanaṃ. Ādi-saddena lakkhaṇapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānabhūmiādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Tenevāha ‘‘imāni ñāṇāni idamatthajotakānī’’tiādi.
429 他们趋向分类:在面对种种不同分类的所缘时,他们能够如实了知那一个又一个分类。巴利
429.Pabhedaṃ gacchantīti anekabhedabhinnesu ārammaṇesu tesaṃ yāthāvato taṃtaṃpabhedāvabodhanasamatthataṃ upagacchanti.
大弟子们在无学地达到差别,为了以例外方式排除总说所显示的含义,所以举出阿难长老。巴利
Mahāsāvakānañca asekkhabhūmiyaṃ pabhedaṃ gatāti sāmaññavidhinā dassitamatthaṃ apavādena nivattetuṃ ānandatthera-ggahaṇaṃ kataṃ.
这些就是无碍解。在有学地,通达差别是狭小的范围;在无学地,则范围广大。所以说“所谓证得,就是证得阿拉汉果”,这是就殊胜的证得而说的。因为有学所证得的这些无碍解,在证得阿拉汉果时才变得清晰,所以叫证得。不过,就像先前的修行一样,证得阿拉汉果对于阿拉汉的无碍解清晰性来说,也不是不起作用。因此,对五种因,应当按各自对应的情况,将有学和无学的无碍解清晰性配作它们的因。由于毫无遗漏地统摄了义、法等,所以只显示了以佛语为对象的教法等。讽诵巴利圣典是“遍学”,听闻其义是“听闻”,想从各方面彻底了知是“遍问”,所以说“在巴利圣典及注释书等中,对难词、义理词、词义决断的论说”,意思是从词义和意图两方面,对难以了知之处作详细决断的论说。凡是某个词的含义难以了知,那就是“难词”;凡是意图难以了知,那就是“义理词”。“等”字统摄了与蕴等相关的论说方式。有修习相伴的去与回,他具有这个,所以叫“去而复返者”,其状态就是“去而复返性”,以这个去而复返性,意思是从住处到托钵的村落,再从那里回到住处,都专注于业处。所谓“直至随顺与种姓的邻近”,指的是行舍智,因为它是在这些智的近旁生起的。巴利
Etā paṭisambhidā. Sekkhabhūmiyaṃ pabhedagamanaṃ appavisayaṃ, asekkhabhūmiyaṃ bahuvisayanti āha ‘‘adhigamo nāma arahattappattī’’ti, sātisayaṃ vā adhigamaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sekkhena pattānampi hi imāsaṃ arahattappattiyā visadabhāvādhigamoti . Pubbayogo viya pana arahattappatti arahatopi paṭisambhidāvisadatāya paccayo na na hotīti pañcannampi yathāyogaṃ sekkhāsekkhapaṭisambhidāvisadatāya kāraṇatā yojetabbā. Atthadhammādīnaṃ anavasesasaṅgaṇhanato buddhavacanavisayā eva pariyattiādayo dassitā. Pāḷiyā sajjhāyo pariyāpuṇanaṃ, tadatthasavanaṃ savanaṃ, parito sabbaso ñātuṃ icchā paripucchāti āha ‘‘pāḷiaṭṭhakathādīsu gaṇṭhipadaatthapadavinicchayakathā’’ti, padatthato, adhippāyato ca duviññeyyaṭṭhānaṃ vitthārato sanniṭṭhānakathāti attho. Yassa hi padassa attho duviññeyyo, taṃ gaṇṭhipadaṃ, yassa adhippāyo duviññeyyo, taṃ atthapadaṃ. Ādi-saddena khandhādipaṭisaṃyutte kathāmagge saṅgaṇhāti. Bhāvanānuyogasahitaṃ gataṃ, paccāgatañca etassa atthīti gatapaccāgatiko, tassa bhāvo, tena gatapaccāgatikabhāvena. Vasanaṭṭhānato yāva gocaragāmo, tato ca yāva vasanaṭṭhānaṃ kammaṭṭhānānuyuttoti attho. Yāva anulomagotrabhusamīpanti saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇamāha. Tañhi tesaṃ samīpappavattaṃ.
在无过失、能给众生带来利益和安乐的著作中,就是“于诸教典”的意思。“于诸技艺处”也应同样理解。从前有一百位国王,就有一百种地方语言、一百种用语习惯。关于《法句》,有人说有双品、譬喻品;另一些人说,在《根本五十经》中也有双品、譬喻品。“多闻具辩才者”:就是多闻且具足辩才的人。巴利
Satthesūti anavajjesu sattānaṃ hitasukhāvahesu ganthesu. Tathā sippāyatanesūti etthāpi. Pubbakāle ekasatarājūnaṃ desabhāsā ekasatavohārā. Dhammapade (dha. pa. 1 ādayo) yamakavaggo opammavaggoti vadanti, mūlapaṇṇāse (ma. ni. 1.325 ādayo; 439 ādayo) yamakavaggo opammavaggo evāti apare. Sutapaṭibhānabahulānanti bahussutānaṃ paṭibhānavantānaṃ.
所谓“一切”,是指前面说过的五种,或后面说过的八种。以有学果和解脱为终点的诸有,就是“以有学果、解脱为终点者”。在一切佛陀功德中,处非处智力等因为各自的作用而更加明显,所以说“如同十力”;而其他或一切知智等,即世尊一切殊胜功德,都是以无学果、解脱为终点的。巴利
Sabbānīti pubbe vuttāni pañca, pacchā vuttāni aṭṭhapi vā. Sekkhaphalavimokkhapariyosāne bhavā sekkhaphalavimokkhantikā. Ṭhānāṭhānañāṇabalādīni sabbabuddhaguṇesu sakiccato pākaṭatarānīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dasa balāni viyā’’ti, aññe vā sabbaññutaññāṇādayopi sabbe bhagavato guṇavisesā asekkhaphalavimokkhantikā eva.
慧地根本之身的确定注释巴利
Paññābhūmi-mūla-sarīravavatthānavaṇṇanā
430 “以这个慧”指的是观慧。之所以称为“地”,是因为它是观慧以把握特相等方式生起时的处所。“等”字表明,应当知道其中还包含了食等法。为什么偏偏把这些众多法当作“地”来把握呢?只靠蕴等中的一项,不也能达成目的吗?不能。为了摄受三种众生,必须把握蕴、处、界三者;否则就做不到普遍摄受一切众生。三种众生是:迷于色的众生、迷于无色的众生、迷于两者的众生。其中,为了迷于无色的众生,要把握蕴,因为无色法分为四种。为了迷于色的众生,要把握处,因为色法分为十又二分之一。为了迷于两者的众生,要把握界,因为两者都被分别说明了。同样,众生按根器差别有利根、中根、钝根,又有所喜简略、所喜中等、所喜详细三种,为了他们,也应当依次把握蕴等。至于把握根:这些法虽像主宰者一样,对俱生法行使自在与支配,但那只是它们法性的自然成就,其中并无任何主宰者;这样说是为了让人容易把握“这些是空、无主宰”的无我相。蕴、处、界、根这四种,依转起、还灭以及两者的因来看,确实能带来利益,并非以其他方式,因此把握了谛等两者。“等”字也表明,对所把握的诸法应类推此理。根是依止处:戒清净和心清净存在时,这个慧就从根生起;若不存在,就不会生起。身应当修习。因为这个慧相续生起时,见清净等这五种清净以支分表征总体之理,相当于足、手、头,应当知道这就是“身”。巴利
430.Imāya paññāyāti vipassanāpaññāya. Bhūmi sallakkhaṇādiggahaṇavasena pavattiṭṭhānabhāvato. Ādi-saddena āhārādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā panete evaṃ bahudhammā bhūmibhāvena gayhanti, nanu khandhādīsu ekenāpi atthasiddhi hotīti? Na, tividhasattānuggahatthaṃ khandhādittayaggahaṇaṃ kattabbaṃ, aññathā sabbasādhāraṇo anuggaho na kato siyā. Tividhā hi sattā rūpasammūḷhā arūpasammūḷhā ubhayasammūḷhāti. Tesu ye arūpasammūḷhā, tadatthaṃ khandhānaṃ gahaṇaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ catudhā vibhattattā. Ye rūpasammūḷhā, tadatthaṃ āyatanānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ addhekādasadhā vibhattattā. Ye pana ubhayasammūḷhā, tadatthaṃ dhātūnaṃ ubhayesampi vibhattattā. Tathā indriyabhedena tikkhindriyā majjhimindriyā mudindriyā, saṃkhittarucī majjhimarucī vitthārarucīti ca tividhā sattā, tesampi atthāya yathākkamaṃ khandhādiggahaṇaṃ katanti yojetabbaṃ. Indriyaggahaṇaṃ pana kāmaṃ ete dhammā issarā viya sahajātadhammesu issariyaṃ ādhipaccaṃ pavattenti, taṃ pana nesaṃ dhammasabhāvasiddhaṃ, na ettha kassaci vasībhāvo ‘‘suññā ete avasavattino’’ti anattalakkhaṇassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ catubbidhampi pavattinivattitadubhayahetuvasena diṭṭhameva upakārāvahaṃ, na aññathāti saccādidvayaṃ gahitaṃ. Ādi-saddena gahitadhammesupi ayaṃ nayo netabbo. Mūlaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvato. Sati hi sīlavisuddhiyaṃ, cittavisuddhiyañca ayaṃ paññā mūlajātā hoti, nāsatīti. Sarīraṃ paribrūhetabbato. Imissā hi paññāya santānavasena pavattamānāya pādapāṇisīsaṭṭhāniyā diṭṭhivisuddhiādikā imā pañca visuddhiyo avayavena samudāyūpalakkhaṇanayena ‘‘sarīra’’nti veditabbā.
431 “五蕴”这里,“五”是数量限定,用它说明既不少于那个数目,也不多于那个数目。“蕴”是指出被限定的法。因为这里“蕴”这个词有“聚集”的意思,就像“大水流”“大聚”等用法那样,所以应当把过去等分类所区分的全部色,按聚集的方式,以智慧整体把握为一,然后看作同格限定复合词,即“色本身就是蕴,就是色蕴”。如果在“用三蕴还债”这类用法里,“蕴”是“部分”的意思,那么涅槃岂不是也成了另一种蕴吗?不会,因为涅槃没有过去等的区分。单一、恒常的涅槃,并没有过去、未来、现在这样的分别。按第一种含义,是“色的聚集”;按第二种含义,是“色的部分”。受蕴等也是这样理解。那么,为什么这些蕴只说五种,而且偏偏按这个顺序说呢?应当知道,这是为了显示容器、食物、菜肴、厨师、吃的人这几种差别,也是为了从粗显和杂染的角度来教导。再考虑到受和想是争论的根本原因、是轮回的原因、是业的原因,所以把它们从行蕴中拿出来,单独作为蕴来宣说。巴利
431.Pañca khandhāti ettha pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo, tena na tato heṭṭhā, na uddhanti dasseti. Khandhāti paricchinnadhammanidassanaṃ. Yasmā cettha khandha-saddo rāsaṭṭho ‘‘mahāudakakkhandho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.51; 6.37) viya, tasmā atītādivibhāgabhinnaṃ sabbaṃ rūpaṃ rāsivasena buddhiyā ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘rūpameva khandho rūpakkhandho’’ti samānādhikaraṇasamāso daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Tīhi khandhehi iṇaṃ dassāmā’’tiādīsu viya koṭṭhāsaṭṭhe pana khandha-sadde nibbānassāpi khandhantarabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati atītādivibhāgābhāvato. Na hi ekassa niccassa sato nibbānassa atītādivibhāgo atthīti. Paṭhamenatthena rūparāsīti attho, dutiyena rūpakoṭṭhāsoti. Vedanākkhandhotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Kasmā panete khandhā pañceva vuttā iminā eva ca kamenāti? Bhājanabhojanabyañjanabhattakārakabhuñjakavikappadassanato , yathoḷārikayathāsaṃkilesūpadesato cāti veditabbaṃ. Vivādamūlahetubhāvaṃ saṃsārahetutaṃ, kammahetutañca cintetvā vedanāsaññā saṅkhārakkhandhato nīharitvā visuṃ khandhabhāvena desitā.
色蕴论的注释巴利
Rūpakkhandhakathāvaṇṇanā
432 “其中”是指在五蕴当中。“无论什么”是指毫无遗漏地全部涵盖。“以变坏为相”是为了防止范围过于宽泛而作的限定。因为“yaṃ”这个词和“kiṃ”这个词连在一起用时,含义不确定,会导致范围过宽,而“变坏”这个词则把它收回来,这样就完成了对色的毫无遗漏的涵盖。“由冷等”是指由冷、热、饥、渴等。这里的具格表示原因。变坏是它的相,所以叫“以变坏为相”。法本身就是法类。这里所说的变坏,是指当冷等相违的缘聚集时,产生异常的变化。那么,无色法在相违的缘会合时,不也会产生异常变化吗?确实会,但不会那么明显。这里举冷等为例,就是要指出明显的变坏。既然这样,为什么梵天界还有“色”这个名称呢?因为在那里也没有超出那种自性,所以仍然可以叫色;或者是因为有辅助的缘。另有一种说法:当相违的缘聚集时,在自身相续正在坏灭、已经坏灭的情况下,成为产生异常变化的因,这就是变坏。按这种观点,色是“使变化”的意思;而按前一种观点,则是“被变坏”。也有人说,“变坏”这个词在因碰撞而产生变化的意义上是约定俗成的用法。按这种观点,无色法因为没有碰撞,根本就不会和“色”这个名称扯上关系。还有人认为,抵触就是变坏。把这一切汇总起来说,就是把要点放在心里之后再说。巴利
432.Tatthāti tesu pañcasu khandhesu. Yaṃ kiñcīti anavasesapariyādānaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇanti atippasaṅganiyamanaṃ. Yaṃ-saddena hi sanipātena kiṃ-saddena ca gahitena aniyamatthatāya atippasaṅge āpanne taṃ ruppanasaddo nivatteti, tena rūpassa anavasesapariggaho kato hoti. Sītādīhīti sītuṇhajighacchāpipāsādīhi. Hetuatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Ruppanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Dhammo eva dhammajātaṃ. Ruppanañcettha sītādivirodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti. Nanu ca arūpadhammānampi virodhipaccayasamāgame visadisuppatti labbhatīti? Saccaṃ labbhati, na pana vibhūtataraṃ. Vibhūtataraṃ hettha ruppanaṃ adhippetaṃ sītādiggahaṇato. Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ brahmaloke rūpasamaññā? Tatthāpi taṃsabhāvānativattanato hotiyeva rūpasamaññā, anuggāhakapaccayavasena vā. Virodhipaccayasannipāte yo attano santāne bhinne bhijjamānasseva visadisuppattihetubhāvo, taṃ ruppananti aññe. Imasmiṃ pakkhe rūpayati vikāraṃ āpādetīti rūpaṃ, purimapakkhe pana ruppatīti. Saṅghaṭṭanena vikārāpattiyaṃ ruppanasaddo niruḷhoti keci. Imasmiṃ pakkhe arūpadhammesu rūpasamaññāya pasaṅgo eva natthi saṅghaṭṭanābhāvato. Paṭighāto ruppananti apare. Sabbaṃ taṃ ekato katvāti rāsaṭṭhaṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā vadati.
在这里,由于所造色依它而转起,所以称它为“大种”。所造色只是执取大种,而它自己不被那些大种执取,也不被其他法执取,所以叫“所造色”。巴利
Bhūtopādāyabhedatoti ettha tadadhīnavuttitāya bhavati ettha upādāyarūpanti bhūtaṃ. Bhūtāni upādiyateva, na pana sayaṃ tehi, aññehi vā upādīyatīti upādāyaṃ.
在四界分别的说明里,虽然通过词义等方式已经讲清楚了诸界,但为了说明自性法的特相、作用、现起等,所以又说“特相、作用、现起已经在四界分别中讲过了”。其中,因为没有提到近因,所以接着又说“但从近因来说”等等。这里之所以没有另外说明,应当理解为:那个意思已经通过其他方式表明它就是该义的缘。所谓“一切”,就是指这四界。地界只有在水界摄持、火界维持、风界支撑的时候才能生起,不然就不能生起,所以它以其余三界为近因;其他诸界也是这样,因此说“以其余三界为近因”。巴利
Kāmaṃ catudhātuvavatthāne vacanatthāditopi bhūtāni vibhāvitāneva, sabhāvadhammānaṃ pana lakkhaṇādivibhāvanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānāni catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānī’’ti. Tattha padaṭṭhānassa avuttattā āha ‘‘padaṭṭhānato panā’’tiādi. Avacanañca tassa tassatthassa paccayatoti ettha pakārantarena vibhāvitattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbāpīti catassopi dhātuyo. Āposaṅgahitāya tejonupālitāya vāyovitthambhitāya eva pathavīdhātuyā pavatti, na aññathāti sā sesabhūtattayapadaṭṭhānā, evamitarāpīti āha ‘‘avasesadhātuttayapadaṭṭhānā’’ti.
“二十四种”是对数目的一种界定,目的是排除力、色等法。这里应当说的内容,后面自然会清楚。“见”就是眼,意思是被识所依止的色,好像正在品尝、享受一样。因为“cakkhati”这个词,就像在“品尝蜜、品尝菜肴”等说法里一样,是“享受、品尝”的意思。经中确实这样说:“玛甘迪亚,眼是乐于色、欣喜于色、随色而喜的。”注释书里也说:“在诸色上有把色拉向自己的作用。”虽然耳等根也以声等为所缘,但“眼”这个词已经惯用于“看”这一作用上,就像在莲花等上惯用“paṅkaja”等词一样,应当这样理解。或者,“见”的意思是被识所依止的(色),好像正在报告平整与不平整、好像正在宣说显明之物一样。然而注释书中说“也令明了”。那是考虑到诸界有多种意义,“cakkhati”这个词也有“令明了”之义,所以才这样说。以此而听,或者被识所依止的它自身在听,这就是耳。以此而嗅,或者它自身在嗅,这就是鼻。由于领受味道以摄取营养为根本,维持生命的要素——食物的味道——就是命,由于倾向于它,依语言习惯称它为舌。可厌的有漏诸法的来源、生起之处,就是身;因为在不能达到无上之因的人们当中,由欲贪为因而由业所生的(诸法),以及欲贪的殊胜助缘——鼻、舌、身——之中,身特别是有漏的助缘。因此,享受触乐的有情甚至行淫。或者,以身根为依处的四蕴,因为有强力欲漏等之因,所以特别是有漏的;因此说“可厌的有漏诸法的来源”就是身。使颜色变化、达到入心状态的,就是色;意思是像色一样令明显,像有形体一样显示出来。或者,应知由于诸界有多种意义,“rūpa”这个词就是“令明显”之义。它自己显现,就是声;被说出,或者以自己的语素而被显现,被带到耳识所知的状态,这就是声。它自己散发气味,就是香;显示自己的处所,把不明显的“这是香、这是臭”表明出来,或者对隐藏的花果等作密报,好像说“这里有这个”一样,这就是香。有情品尝它,就是味;意思是他们享受它。巴利
Catuvīsatividhanti gaṇanaparicchedo balarūpādīnaṃ paṭisedhanattho. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Cakkhatīti cakkhu, viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ rūpaṃ assādentaṃ viya hotīti attho. Cakkhatīti hi ayaṃ cakkhati-saddo ‘‘madhuṃ cakkhati, byañjanaṃ cakkhatī’’tiādīsu viya assādanattho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ kho, māgaṇḍiya, rūpārāmaṃ rūparataṃ rūpasamudita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.209). Aṭṭhakathāyampi vuccati ‘‘rūpesu āviñchanarasa’’nti (visuddhi. 2.433; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 600). Satipi sotādīnaṃ saddārammaṇādibhāve niruḷhattā dassane eva cakkhu-saddo pavattati padumādīsu paṅkajādisaddā viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā cakkhatīti viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ samavisamaṃ ācikkhantaṃ viya abhibyattaṃ vadantaṃ viya hotīti attho. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vibhāveti cā’’ti (mahāni. aṭṭha. 13; vibha. aṭṭha. 154) vuttaṃ. Taṃ anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ vibhāvanatthatāpi cakkhati-saddassa sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Suṇāti etena, viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ sayaṃ vā suṇātīti sotaṃ. Ghāyati etena, sayaṃ vā ghāyatīti ghānaṃ. Rasaggahaṇamūlakattā ajjhoharaṇassa jīvitanimittaṃ āhāraraso jīvitaṃ, tasmiṃ ninnatāya taṃ avhāyatīti jivhā niruttinayena. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyo uppattiṭṭhānanti kāyo anuttariyahetubhāvaṃ anāgacchantesu kāmarāganidānakammajanitesu, kāmarāgassa ca visesapaccayesu ghānajivhākāyesu kāyassa visesato sāsavapaccayattā. Tena hi phoṭṭhabbasukhaṃ assādentā sattā methunampi sevanti. Kāyindriyavatthukā vā cattāro khandhā balavakāmāsavādihetubhāvato visesena sāsavāti kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyoti kāyo vutto. Vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ rūpayatīti rūpaṃ, rūpamiva pakāsaṃ karoti saviggahamiva dassetīti attho. Anekatthattā vā dhātūnaṃ pakāsanattho eva rūpasaddo daṭṭhabbo. Sappatīti saddo, udāharīyati, sakehi vā paccayehi sappīyati sotaviññeyyabhāvaṃ upanīyatīti attho. Gandhayatīti gandho, attano vatthuṃ sūcayati apākaṭaṃ ‘‘idaṃ sugandhaṃ, duggandha’’nti pakāseti , paṭicchannaṃ vā pupphaphalādiṃ ‘‘idamettha atthī’’ti pesuññaṃ karontaṃ viya hotīti attho. Rasanti taṃ sattāti raso, asādentīti attho.
女根就是女性特有的根,男根同样如此。俱生的诸法依靠它而存活,所以叫命,这同一个根就是命根。心而且是所依处,或者说,意识所依的处所就是心所依处。因为具有能动的身体表现,又能表达意图,所以叫身表。因为具有能动的言语表现,又能表达意图,所以叫语表。因为没有形相,不能被耕作,也不能被切割,或者说不发光,所以叫虚空;这虚空本身就是空界,以没有众生、没有命者的意义而称为空界。色,是指已生成的色法。轻快性就是轻快。为了标明它自身不是完成色,所以特别用色这个词来限定。其余诸法也是同样的道理。但这里有一个差别:能胜任工作叫适业,这种状态就是适业性。最初以及后来的增长生起叫积集。前后相互关联而持续生起叫相续。无常、坏灭的状态叫无常性。能被团成一块的叫团食。能带来滋养的叫食。以上就是应当从词义上理解的所造色。巴利
Itthiyāva indriyaṃ itthindriyaṃ, tathā purisindriyaṃ. Jīvanti tena sahajātadhammāti jīvitaṃ, tadeva indriyaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ. Hadayañca taṃ vatthu ca, hadayassa vā manoviññāṇassa vatthu hadayavatthu. Copanakāyabhāvato kāyo ca so adhippāyaviññāpanato viññatti cāti kāyaviññatti. Copanavācābhāvato, adhippāyaviññāpanato ca vacī ca sā viññatti cāti vacīviññatti. Viggahābhāvato na kassati, kasituṃ chindituṃ na sakkā, na vā kāsati dibbatīti akāsaṃ, akāsameva ākāsaṃ, tadeva nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena ākāsadhātu. Rūpassāti nipphannarūpassa. Lahubhāvo lahutā. Sayaṃ anipphannatāya ‘‘rūpassā’’ti visesitaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Ayaṃ pana viseso – kammani sādhu kammaññaṃ, tassa bhāvo kammaññatā. Paṭhamaṃ, upari ca cayo pavatti upacayo. Pubbāparavasena sambandhā tati pavatti santati. Aniccassa vināsino bhāvo aniccatā. Kabalaṃ karīyatīti kabaḷīkāro. Āharatīti āhāro. Evaṃ tāva upādāyarūpaṃ saddatthato veditabbaṃ.
从次第来说,因为四大种色是一切色法的依止,是它们的根本,所以最先列出四大种色。在其余诸色中,眼等五根因为是内在的,是有情自体得名的根本,所以从开头就列出。为了表明这些是它们的所缘,接着列出色等四种。至于触,因为它是非所造色,而且已经被大种的列举所包含,所以这里没有单独列出。为了表明这个自体就是依这些而被称作“女人”或“男人”,紧接着列出了女根和男根这两个。为了表明“依这个而活命”这种世俗说法是怎么来的,之后列出了命根。为了表明依这个,在识的转起中能成就自利等事,之后列出了心所依处。为了表明依这两种,才有所有身业和语业,之后列出了两种表。为了表明依这个,才有色身的界限和通道,之后列出了空界。为了表明依这些,才有安乐的转起、生起等,之后列出了轻快性等。最后,为了表明这整个四相续的色相续都靠这个来支持,所以列出了团食。应当这样理解。巴利
Kamato pana sabbesaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ nissayabhāvena mūlabhūtattā paṭhamaṃ bhūtarūpāni uddiṭṭhāni. Itaresu ajjhattikabhāvena attabhāvasamaññāya mūlabhāvato cakkhādīni pañca ādito uddiṭṭhāni. Tesaṃ visayīnaṃ ime visayāti dassetuṃ rūpādīni cattāri uddiṭṭhāni. Phoṭṭhabbaṃ pana anupādārūpattā, bhūtaggahaṇena gahitattā ca idha na gahitaṃ. Svāyaṃ attabhāvo imehi ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘puriso’’ti vā saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti dassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ itthipurisindriyadvayaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. ‘‘Iminā jīvatī’’ti vohāraṃ labbhatīti dassanatthaṃ tato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tassa imaṃ nissāya viññāṇappavattiyaṃ attahitādisiddhīti dassanatthaṃ hadayavatthu. Tassa imāsaṃ vasena sabbe kāyavacīpayogāti dassanatthaṃ viññattidvayaṃ. Imāya rūpakāyassa paricchedo, añjaso cāti dassanatthaṃ ākāsadhātu. Imehissa sukhappavatti, uppattiādayo cāti dassanatthaṃ lahutādayo. Sabbo cāyaṃ catusantatirūpasantāno iminā upatthambhīyatīti dassanatthaṃ ante kabaḷīkāro āhāro uddiṭṭhoti veditabbo.
433 现在,为了按照特相等方式说明前面已经列出的所造色,开始讲解“其中,以色撞击堪受之净色为特相”等内容。这里的“其中”,指的是那些所造色当中。于色中的撞击,或者色之撞击,就是“色撞击”;能够承受这个的,就是“堪受色撞击者”;无论色撞击有没有现前,其本性就是如此的四大的净色,就是“堪受色撞击的净色”。以这样的特相为特征的,就是眼——这是这句话的意思。因为眼净色只有在其他缘配合的情况下,才会以撞击色境的方式运作,并不是单独就能运作。所以,为了说明正是它自身的本性才是判断标准,而不是色撞击本身,才说“堪受色撞击”,就像说“堪受异熟的善与不善”那样。而所谓“撞击”,是指所缘境与能缘者彼此面对面、处在合适位置时,像互相碰撞一样的作用。这种撞击,是眼于色中,或者色于眼中发生。因此说:“那不可见、有对的眼,在可见、有对的色上被撞击”,以及“在那不可见、有对的眼上,可见、有对的色曾撞击或被撞击”等等(《法集论》597)。作为圆满或不圆满处所之身得以生起的业的根源,欲渴爱和色渴爱,因为存在对那处有之希求,所以能够被称为“欲见”等——这是各处都解说的第二种方法。其中,以“欲见”之贪为因的业是它们生起的来源,所以称为“欲见贪所生”。如此这般的诸大种的净色,就是欲见……乃至……净色,以这样的特相为特征的就是眼。因为对于每一种有来说,作为根本原因的渴爱,也会以应当于那种有中生起的诸处为所缘,所以说欲渴爱等能够被称为“欲见”等。巴利
433. Idāni yathāuddiṭṭhāni upādārūpāni lakkhaṇādito niddisituṃ ‘‘tattha rūpābhighātārahabhūtappasādalakkhaṇa’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu upādārūpesu. Rūpe, rūpassa vā abhighāto rūpābhighāto, taṃ arahatīti rūpābhighātāraho, rūpābhighāto hotu vā mā vā evaṃsabhāvo catunnaṃ bhūtānaṃ pasādo rūpābhighātārahabhūtappasādo, evaṃlakkhaṇaṃ cakkhūti attho. Yasmā paccayantarasahito eva cakkhupasādo rūpābhihananavasena pavattati, na kevalo. Tasmā taṃsabhāvatāva pamāṇaṃ, na rūpābhighātoti dassanatthaṃ rūpābhighātārahatā vuttā yathā vipākārahaṃ kusalākusalanti. Abhighāto ca visayavisayīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ abhimukhībhāvo yogyadesāvaṭṭhānaṃ abhighāto viyāti katvā. So rūpe cakkhussa, rūpassa vā cakkhumhi hoti. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ cakkhu anidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ rūpamhi sanidassanamhi sappaṭighamhi paṭihaññi vā’’ti, ‘‘yamhi cakkhumhi anidassanamhi sappaṭighamhi rūpaṃ sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ paṭihaññi vā paṭihaññati vā’’ti (dha. sa. 597) ca ādi. Paripuṇṇāparipuṇṇāyatanattabhāvanibbattakassa kammassa nidānabhūtā kāmataṇhā, rūpataṇhā ca tadāyatanikabhavapatthanābhāvato daṭṭhukāmatādivohāraṃ arahatīti dutiyanayo sabbattha vutto. Tattha daṭṭhukāmatānidānakammaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ etesanti daṭṭhukāmatānidānakammasamuṭṭhānāni. Evaṃvidhānaṃ bhūtānaṃ pasādo daṭṭhukāmatā…pe… pasādo, evaṃlakkhaṇaṃ cakkhu. Tassa tassa hi bhavassa mūlakāraṇabhūtā taṇhā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhave uppajjanārahāyatanavisayāpi nāma hotīti kāmataṇhādīnaṃ daṭṭhukāmatādivohārārahatā vuttā.
所谓“想要看见”,就是想要看的欲望,意思是色贪。在这里,关于“想要看见”以及其余的贪——从它们各自造作能产生相应自体的业的那一刹那来看:如果前世已经生起,那就没有什么可说的;如果前世没有生起,就应当理解为:仅仅以“未被圣道断除”这一点作为它的因。因为那未被圣道断除的因,一旦获得因缘就会生起,并成为自身果报的缘,所以它是存在的。因此,用“已生”“存在”等不同的说法来讲:“正在修习八支圣道、多修八支圣道的人,能使已生起的恶不善法当场就消失”(《相应部》5.156),以及“如果内心有欲贪,就了知‘我内心有欲贪’”(《长部》2.382;《中部》1.115)等等。巴利
Daṭṭhukāmatāti hi daṭṭhumicchā, rūpataṇhāti attho. Ettha ca daṭṭhukāmatāya, sesānañca taṃtaṃattabhāvanibbattakakammāyūhanakkhaṇato sati purimanibbattiyaṃ vattabbaṃ natthi, asati pana maggena asamugghātitabhāvoyeva kāraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yato maggena asamucchinnaṃ kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjitvā attano phalassa paccayabhāvūpagamanato vijjamānamevāti uppannatā atthitā pariyāyehi vuccati ‘‘ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvento ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bahulīkaronto uppannuppanne pāpake akusale dhamme antarāyeva antaradhāpetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.156), ‘‘santaṃ vā ajjhattaṃ kāmacchandaṃ ‘atthi me ajjhattaṃ kāmacchando’ti pajānātī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.382; ma. ni. 1.115) ca evamādīsu.
在诸色中,它的作用是牵引人或识。它表现为所依的状态,因为它是依止缘。那些大种的净色,是以想要看见的欲望为因、由业所生的大种,就是它的近因。这里,第一种眼的特相是就促成各自身体的共业来说的,因为没有提到特别的因。第二种则是就“愿我的眼成为这样”这种各自特有的业来说的,诸师是这样主张的。不过,虽然五种净色在净色这一点上是共同的,第一种是就所谓照亮各自对象的作用来说的;第二种则应当理解为:虽然业有共通性,或者甚至是同一个,但为了依自因之别而显示差别。耳等诸根的特相等,应依照上面所说的方法来理解。巴利
Rūpesu puggalassa, viññāṇassa vā āviñchanarasaṃ. Ādhārabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ nissayapaccayabhāvato. Daṭṭhukāmatānidānakammajabhūtapadaṭṭhānaṃ yesaṃ bhūtānaṃ pasādo, tevassa āsannakāraṇanti katvā. Ettha ca taṃtaṃattabhāvanipphādakasādhāraṇakammavasena purimaṃ cakkhulakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ kāraṇavisesassa anāmaṭṭhattā. ‘‘Evarūpaṃ nāma me cakkhu hotū’’ti evaṃ nibbattitaāveṇikakammavasena dutiyanti vadanti. Satipi pana pañcannaṃ pasādabhāvasāmaññe savisayāvabhāsanasaṅkhātassa pasādabyāpārassa vasena purimaṃ vuttaṃ. Pasādakāraṇassa satipi kammabhāvasāmaññe, ekatte vā attano kāraṇabhedena bhedadassanavasena dutiyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sotādīnaṃ lakkhaṇādīsu vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.
这里有人问:眼等诸根是由同一个业产生的,还是由不同的业产生的?古师们说:两种情况都有。其中,如果是由不同的业产生,那么眼等诸根的差别就不用多说了,因为因本身就不一样。如果是由同一个业产生,那它们的差别又怎么成立呢?正是因为因的差别。因为,作为对种种再生的渴求,渴爱由于对种种再生所摄处的欲求,自身就呈现出种种形态,并以强有力的助缘身份,赋予能产生种种再生的业以种种差别。由此,被赋予了特殊性的业,通过与其相应的种种能力的结合,就好像变成了多种形态一样,产生出许多具有殊胜自性的果报。这里,能力并不是不同于能力状态的其他东西,它仅仅是由因的差别所赋予的、能够产生殊胜果报的适合性而已。而且,即使是一个业,也具有作为多种根的因这种特殊关联,这一点从道理上和经教上,后面都会说到。再说,据说即使是一个善心,也能成为生起十六种等异熟心的因。在世间也能看到,一粒稻种能结出饱满或不饱满、有壳或无壳的果实。何必再作这种道理上的思惟呢?因为眼等诸根是业果,而业异熟完全是诸佛智慧所行的境界。巴利
Etthāha – cakkhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ kiṃ ekakammunā uppatti, udāhu nānākammunāti? Ubhayathāpīti porāṇā. Tattha nānākammunā tāva uppattiyaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ visese vattabbaṃ natthi kāraṇassa bhinnattā. Ekakammunā pana uppattiyaṃ kathaṃ nesaṃ visesoti? Kāraṇassa bhinnattā eva. Taṃtaṃbhavapatthanābhūtā hi taṇhā taṃtaṃbhavapariyāpannāyatanābhilāsatāya sayaṃ vicittarūpā upanissayabhāvena taṃtaṃbhavanibbattakakammassa vicittabhedataṃ vidahati. Yato tadāhitavisesaṃ taṃ tathārūpasamatthatāyogenānekarūpāpannaṃ viya anekaṃ visiṭṭhasabhāvaṃ phalaṃ nibbatteti. Na cettha samatthatā samatthabhāvato aññā veditabbā kāraṇavisesena āhitavisesassa visiṭṭhaphalanipphādanayogyatāmattato. Ayañca ekassapi kammassa anekindriyahetutāvisesayogo yuttito, āgamanato ca parato āgamissati. Apica ekasseva kusalacittassa soḷasādivipākacittanibbattihetutā vuccati. Lokepi ekasseva sālibījassa paripuṇṇāparipuṇṇataṇḍulaātaṇḍulaphalanibbattihetutā dissateva, kiṃ vā etāya yutticintāya. Yato kammaphalaṃ cakkhādīni, kammavipāko ca sabbaso buddhānaṃyeva ñāṇassa visayoti.
434 “有些”是指大众部中的一部分人。在他们当中,有一位名叫 Vasudhamma 的论师这样说:“眼处火界偏胜,耳处风界偏胜,鼻处地界偏胜,舌处水界偏胜,身处则一切界均等。”为了说明所谓眼等诸根中火界等偏胜,是指作为它们所依的诸界中该界偏胜,所以说了“火界偏胜的诸界的净色就是眼”等话。“身处则一切界均等”,这里有什么特别之处呢?难道火界等偏胜的诸界的净色,不也是属于一切界吗?确实如此,不过这里“一切”这个词,是为了显示“均等”这个意思,因为它是为了遮止随顺而来的某一分偏胜的情况才说的。因为,就像火界等各自偏胜的情况那样,如果有二界或三界偏胜,那么由于如前所说的偏胜方式,便只能得到某一界等为主的偏少状态,因此身净色就不能生起,这个道理很明显。所以,身净色是由四界均等而生,这里的“一切”一词应当看作表示均等。“火界等”的意义是:在前一说中,灯焰所喻的火以其光亮的形式,风以其声音的形式,地以其香的形式,唾液所喻的水以其味的形式,由于它们具有各自相应诸界属性所助益的性质,所以能协助对色等的执取,这就是其意义。他们的主张是:眼等诸根只有在具备光明等协助因缘时,才能显现色等境界;而空隙作为耳识的所依,其性质也是一种功德。然而,由于火界等具有界性,而空隙则不具有界性,所以说“随其所应”。或者,在另一派的见解中,色等与空隙一样都是界的属性,即火以光明为形相,空隙以声音为形相,风以香为形相,水以味为形相,地以触为形相,如此则“随其所应”即是以各自相应的诸界属性来配合。巴利
434.Kecīti mahāsaṅghikesu ekacce. Tesu hi vasudhammo evaṃ vadati ‘‘cakkhumhi tejo adhikaṃ, sote vāyu, ghāne pathavī, jivhāya āpo, kāye sabbepi samā’’ti. Cakkhādīsu tejādiadhikatā nāma tannissayabhūtānaṃ tadadhikatāyāti dassento ‘‘tejādhikānaṃ bhūtānaṃpasādo cakkhū’’tiādimāha. Kāyo sabbesanti ko ettha viseso, nanu tejādiadhikānañca bhūtānaṃ pasādā sabbesaṃyevāti? Saccametaṃ, idaṃ pana ‘‘sabbesa’’nti vacanaṃ samānānanti imamatthaṃ dīpeti anuvattamānassa ekadesādhikabhāvassa nivāraṇavasena vuttattā. Tejādīnaṃ hi paccekaṃ adhikabhāve viya dvinnaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ vā adhikabhāvepi yathāvuttādhikabhāveneva ekakādivasena labbhamānāya omattatāyapi kāyappasādo na hotīti pākaṭoyamattho. Tasmā catunnampi bhūtānaṃ samabhāvena kāyappasādo hotīti sabbasaddo idha samabhāvadīpako daṭṭhabbo. Tejādīnanti padīpasaṅkhātassa tejassa obhāsarūpena, vāyussa saddena, pathaviyā gandhena, kheḷasaṅkhātassa udakassa rasenāti purimavāde, pacchimavāde ca yathāyogaṃ taṃtaṃbhūtaguṇehi anuggayhabhāvato, rūpādīnaṃ gahaṇe upakāritabbatoti attho. Ālokādisahakārīkāraṇasahitānaṃyeva cakkhādīnaṃ rūpādiavabhāsanasamatthatā, vivarassa ca sotaviññāṇūpanissayabhāvo guṇoti tesaṃ laddhi. Tejādīnaṃ viya pana vivarassa bhūtabhāvābhāvato yathāyoga-ggahaṇaṃ. Atha vā rūpādayo viya vivarampi bhūtaguṇoti parādhippāye tejassa ālokarūpena, ākāsasaṅkhātassa vivarassa saddena, vāyussa gandhena, udakassa rasena, pathaviyā phoṭṭhabbenāti evaṃ yathāyogaṃ taṃtaṃbhūtaguṇehīti yojanā.
第一位论师为了说明色等(在火等元素中)偏胜的情况,这样说:在火中,色是明亮的;在风中,声以其自性而可闻;在地中,香有芬芳等;在水中,味是甘甜的——因为能看到这些(元素)具有各自的殊胜属性,所以他说“色等是它们的属性”。对此,论师以“若我们希望”等语作了回答。用同样的方法,第二位论师也受到了驳斥。或者也可以这样理解:有人为了驳斥迦那陀的主张——迦那陀认为眼等诸根是由具有色等殊胜属性的火、空、地、水、风所造——先引出他的观点,然后以“若他们又说”等语来驳斥。若有人说:即使在带水的液体中也能闻到香气,但那是与水结合的地界所生,和棉花中的地界不同,因此棉花的香气不一定偏胜。回答:不然,因为棉花中的地界没有被压制。在带水液体中,与水结合的地界被水压制了,而棉花中的地界则不是这样,所以它必定以香气而偏胜。再者,与热水结合的火应当是可被认知的、显著的,因此如同它的触一样,它的颜色也应当是明亮的;这样一来,在热水中,与火无关的冷水的颜色就会消失。因此,由于这两种情况都不存在。正因为这两者不存在,色等作为火界等殊胜属性的说法就被否定了。由于这一否定,“因为色等不被火等诸属性所含摄”这个理由也被否定了。如此辗转,两者都不存在,就成了舍弃殊胜计度的原因。所以说“是故应弃”等语。即使在同一个聚中,色、味等也各不相同,更何况在不同聚中的眼等诸根,即使没有元素的殊胜差别呢?为了说明这一点,才举出色、味等的例子。巴利
Rūpādīnaṃ adhikabhāvadassanatoti aggimhi rūpassa pabhassarassa, vāyumhi saddassa sabhāvena suyyamānassa, pathaviyā surabhiādino gandhassa, āpe ca rasassa madhurassāti imesaṃ visesayuttānaṃ dassanato ‘‘rūpādayo tesaṃ guṇā’’ti paṭhamavādī āhāti. Tasseva ‘‘iccheyyāmā’’tiādinā uttaramāha. Imināva upāyena dutiyavādinopi niggaho hotīti. Atha vā rūpādivisesaguṇehi tejaākāsapathavīāpavāyūhi cakkhādīni katānīti vadantassa kaṇādassa vādaṃ uddharitvā taṃ niggahetuṃ ‘‘athāpi vadeyyu’’ntiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āsave upalabbhamānopi gandho pathaviyā āposaṃyuttāya kappāsato visadisāyāti na kappāsagandhassa adhikabhāvāpattīti ce? Na, anabhibhūtattā. Āsave hi udakasaṃyuttā pathavī udakena abhibhūtā, na kappāsapathavīti tassa eva gandhena adhikena bhavitabbaṃ. Uṇhodakasaṃyutto ca aggi upalabbhanīyo mahantoti katvā tassa phasso viya vaṇṇopi pabhassaro upalabbheyyāti uṇhodake vaṇṇato agginā anabhisambandhassa sītodakassa vaṇṇo parihāyetha. Tasmāti etassa ubhayassa abhāvā. Tadabhāvena hi rūpādīnaṃ tejādivisesaguṇatā nivattitā. Tannivattanena ‘‘tejādīnaṃ guṇehi rūpādīhi anuggayhabhāvato’’ti idaṃ kāraṇaṃ nivattitanti evaṃ paramparāya ubhayābhāvo visesaparikappanapahānassa kāraṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘tasmā pahāyeta’’ntiādi. Ekakalāpepi rūparasādayo visadisā, ko pana vādo nānākalāpe cakkhādayo bhūtavisesābhāvepīti dassetuṃ rūparasādinidassanaṃ vuttaṃ.
如果没有界的差别,那么眼等诸根的差别又是什么造成的呢?为了说明这一点,才说了“彼此不共”等话。应当理解:即使只有一个业,由于它是在追求五处身之生存时所产生的,所以它作为眼等诸根差别的因,对彼此来说是不共的,因此被称为业的差别。因为,作为眼根之缘的那个差别,并不会同样成为耳根之缘,否则就会导致其他根不存在。根据“在结生刹那,广大思对于业生色,以业缘为缘”这一说法,可以知道在结生刹那,一个思对于所有存在的业生色,都是以业缘为缘。因为,如果那时是由不同的思使诸根生起,那么由欲界业和广大业所产生的业生色就会产生矛盾。而且,一个结生并不是由多个业所产生的,所以可以成立:由一个业而生起多个根。巴利
Yadi bhūtaviseso natthi, kiṃ pana cakkhādivisesassa kāraṇanti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ aññamaññassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekampi kammaṃ pañcāyatanikattabhāvabhavappatthanānipphannaṃ cakkhādivisesahetutāya aññamaññassa asādhāraṇanti ca kammavisesoti ca vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi taṃ yena visesena cakkhussa paccayo, teneva sotassa paccayo hoti indriyantarābhāvappattito. ‘‘Paṭisandhikkhaṇe mahaggatā cetanā kaṭattārūpānaṃ kammapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 2.12.78) vacanena paṭisandhikkhaṇe vijjamānānaṃ sabbesaṃ kaṭattārūpānaṃ ekā cetanā kammapaccayo hotīti viññāyati. Nānācetanāya hi tadā indriyuppattiyaṃ sati parittena ca mahaggatena ca kammunā nibbattitaṃ kaṭattārūpaṃ āpajjeyyāti. Na cekā paṭisandhi anekakammanibbattā hotīti siddhamekena kammena anekindriyuppatti hotīti.
435 435. “它的依止是不黏着的,所以叫不黏着依止”,这里说的是被称为色和声的所缘境。香和味黏着在鼻和舌的依止上,所以它们依于依止而成为黏着的。触本身则因为已存在于身依止之中,所以是依于身而黏着的。另一种解释是:眼和耳取的是尚未到达的所缘境,因为它们是在有间隔的、较远的所缘境中成为识生起之因的。有些论师认为耳也取已经到达的所缘境。如果耳取已经到达的境,那么心所生起的声音就不可能成为耳识的所缘,因为在外界并不存在心所生起的东西。而且巴利圣典中不加区分地说,声所缘就是耳识的所缘。再说,如果真是这样,声音就无法辨别方向和处所了,因为它只能像香一样,仅取自己所在位置的所缘境。所以,声音在哪里生起,就停留在那里。如果声音进入耳道而呈现,那远处染工等人的声音难道不是很久才被听到吗?并非如此,因为远近不同的声音在清晰程度上不同,取境也有差别。就像远近不同的说话声,由于取境的清晰程度不同,并不取形态上的差别,而只是取境;同样,对于染工等人的声音,近处的声音从开始到结束逐渐变得清晰,远处的声音则在末尾或中间以整体方式变得清晰而进行确定性的执取。这些执取是在耳识过程之后生起的,由于特别轻快,便产生了“很久才听到”的错觉。然而,那个声音在哪里生起,就依于那里,在它存在的刹那进入耳的感知范围。如果声音不是通过大种的相续向四周传播,那又怎么会有回声呢?应当知道,即使声音在远处,它也能在其他地方产生回声,并且像磁石吸引铁一样,成为容器等移动的原因。巴利
435. Anallīno nissayo etassāti anallīnanissayo, rūpasaddasaṅkhāto visayo. Gandharasānaṃ nissayā ghānajivhānaṃ nissaye allīyantīti te nissayavasena allīnā. Phoṭṭhabbaṃ sayaṃ kāyanissayaallīnaṃ bhūtattā. Aparo nayo – cakkhusotāni appattavisayaggāhakāni sāntare, adhike ca visaye viññāṇuppattihetubhāvato. Sotampi sampattavisayaggāhīti keci. Yadi sotaṃ sampattaggāhi, cittajo saddo sotaviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ na siyā. Na hi bahiddhā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ uppatti atthi. Pāḷiyañca avisesena saddārammaṇassa sotaviññāṇārammaṇabhāvo vutto. Kiñca disādesavavatthānañca saddassa na siyā, attano visayipadesassa eva gahetabbato gandho viya. Tasmā yattha uppanno saddo, tattheva ṭhito. Sace sotapathe āpāthamāgacchati, nanu dūre ṭhitehi rajakādisaddā cirena suyyantīti? Na dūrāsannānaṃ yathāpākaṭe sadde gahaṇavisesato. Yathā hi dūrāsannānaṃ vacanasadde yathāpākaṭe gahaṇavisesato ākāravisesānaṃ aggahaṇaṃ, gahaṇañca hoti, evaṃ rajakādisaddepi āsannassa ādito pabhuti yāva avasānā kamena pākaṭībhūte, dūrassa ca avasāne, majjhe vā piṇḍavasena pavattipākaṭībhūte nicchayaggahaṇānaṃ sotaviññāṇavīthiyā parato pavattānaṃ visesato lahukaṃ suto ‘‘cirena suto’’ti adhimāno hoti. So pana saddo yattha uppanno, tannissitova attano vijjamānakkhaṇe sotassa āpāthamāgacchati . Yadi saddassa bhūtaparamparāya samantato pavatti natthi, kathaṃ paṭighosuppattīti? Dūre ṭhitopi saddo aññattha paṭighosuppattiyā, bhājanādicalanassa ca ayokanto viya ayocalanassa paccayo hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
436 436. 前面虽然已经通过特征等作了说明,但为了从眼所安住的位置等方面来说明眼,所以接着开始说“这里说的眼”等等。其中,“眼在它成就的时候安住”,这是句中的关联。“ca”这个字表示区别,因此它点出的只是正在说的那个特别之处。“这里”是指在前面已逐一说明的五种所造色当中。“在身体形态生起的地方”这句话,排除了其余那部分黑色的瞳孔。眼就像油膏一样,渗透并遍布七层眼膜而安住:它得到作为自身依托的四大种的资助,又得到依附于这些大种的寿命、色泽等的守护和围绕,并且得到能生起三种相续色的时节、心与食物的支撑。通过“遍布七层眼膜”这个说法,就显示出眼是由许多色聚构成的。就大小来说,说“像虱子头那么大”,是因为它活动在像虱子头那么大的区域里。眼识的依处性,是从依止的角度说的;而它作为转向、领受等一直到彼所缘为止的诸心的门,则是从这些心汇聚之处说的。然而这个眼,由于所依的不同,以及在其中每一个又由许多色聚构成,虽然实际上是多个,但用总称的说法,因为转向只有一种,而且在一个刹那中只有一个在起作用,所以说为一个。即使这样,在众多之中,怎么只有一个在起作用呢?应当理解:其中变得清澈、能够承受色法撞击的那个,就成为识的依止,就像触的某种差别对于身识来说成为所缘一样。巴利
436. Pubbe lakkhaṇādinā vibhāvitampi cakkhuṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānādito vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘cakkhu cetthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha cakkhu sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhatīti sambandho. Ca-kāro byatirekattho, tenassa vuccamānameva visesaṃ joteti. Etthāti etesu yathāniddiṭṭhesu pañcasu upādārūpesu. ‘‘Sarīrasaṇṭhānuppattidese’’ti etena avasesaṃ kaṇhamaṇḍalaṃ paṭikkhipati. Snehamiva satta akkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā ṭhitāheva attano nissayabhūtāhi catūhi dhātūhi katūpakāraṃ tannissiteheva āyuvaṇṇādīhi anupālitaṃ parivāritaṃ tisantatirūpasamuṭṭhāpakehi utucittāhārehiupatthambhiyamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Sattaakkhipaṭalabyāpanavacaneneva cakkhussa anekakalāpagatabhāvaṃ dasseti. Pamāṇato ūkāsiramattanti ūkāsiramatte padese pavattanato vuttaṃ. Cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthubhāvaṃ nissayabhāvato āvajjanasampaṭicchanādīnaṃ tadārammaṇāvasānānaṃ dvārabhāvaṃ samavasaraṭṭhānato. Taṃ panetaṃ cakkhu adhiṭṭhānabhedato, tatthāpi paccekaṃ anekakalāpagatabhāvato anekampi samānaṃ sāmaññaniddesena āvajjanāya ekattā, ekasmiṃ khaṇe ekasseva ca kiccakarattā ekaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Evampi bahūsu kathamekasseva kiccakarattaṃ. Yaṃ tattha visadaṃ hutvā rūpābhighātārahaṃ, taṃ viññāṇassa nissayo hotīti gahetabbaṃ. Phoṭṭhabbaviseso viya kāyaviññāṇassa ārammaṇabhāve.
“观人”中的“玛”字是连接词;或者,“玛努”就是人的意思。巴利
Manupassatīti ma-kāro padasandhikaro, atha vā manūti macco.
手指的装饰物,就是戒指。巴利
Aṅgulivedhakaṃ aṅgulīyakaṃ.
为了说明这一点,他说道:“蚁穴……应当视为……”意思是:由于喜好不平坦的地方,眼应当看作像一条喜欢蚁穴洞的蛇;由于喜好洞穴,耳应当看作像一条喜欢水洞的鳄鱼;由于喜好虚空,鼻应当看作像一只喜欢无碍虚空的鸟;由于喜好村落,舌应当看作像一条喜欢村落的狗;由于喜好已执取之物,身应当看作像一只喜欢生肉坟场的豺狼。所谓眼喜好不平坦的地方,是就眼本身好像有不平坦的喜好来说的;或者,是依有眼之人的喜好,说眼有不平坦的喜好。其余诸根也是同样的道理。上面所说的这一切详细分别,对于耳等诸根也应当按各自相应的情况来理解。巴利
Visamajjhāsayatāya cakkhu vammikachiddābhiratasappo viya, bilajjhāsayatāya sotaṃ udakabilābhiratakumbhīlo viya, ākāsajjhāsayatāya ghānaṃ ajaṭākāsābhiratapakkhī viya, gāmajjhāsayatāya jivhā gāmābhiratakukkuro viya, upādinnakajjhāsayatāya kāyo āmakasusānābhiratasiṅgālo viya passitabboti dassento ‘‘vammi…pe… daṭṭhabbā’’ti āha. Visamajjhāsayatā ca cakkhussa visamajjhāsayaṃ viya hotīti katvā vuttā, cakkhumato vā puggalassa ajjhāsayavasena cakkhu visamajjhāsayaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Sabbopi ca yathāvutto papañco sotādīsupi yathārahaṃ veditabbo.
437 于眼中,或者对眼的撞击,叫作眼撞击;以眼撞击为特征,就是眼撞击的特征。这里说的撞击,就是前面讲的那种冲击。境性,就是所缘缘的性质。虽然这本身就是行境性,但境和行境之间有这样的差别:眼识不跑到别处去,以及它主要在那里活动。关于它的境性应当说明的内容,后面会显现出来。但于身表等处。巴利
437. Cakkhumhi, cakkhussa vā paṭihananaṃ cakkhupaṭihananaṃ, taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti cakkhupaṭihananalakkhaṇaṃ. Paṭihananañcettha yathāvutto abhighātova. Visayabhāvo ārammaṇapaccayatā. Kāmaṃ sā eva gocaratā, tathāpi visayagocarānaṃ ayaṃ viseso – anaññatthabhāvo, tabbahulacāritā ca cakkhuviññāṇassa. Visayabhāve cassa yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Yattha pana kāyaviññattiādike.
438 女性性,就是由此而使心与言说成为“女性”,所以叫女性性;以这个为特征,就是女性性的特征。正因如此,它像是在显示带有这个特征的相续,所以说“以显示‘女性’为作用”。身体圆润、手脚不粗硬等,是女性相。乳房肌肉不粗硬、没有胡须、结发、拿取衣物等,因为是认识“女性”的条件,所以是女性表相。小时候就玩箕、杵等,用泥团纺线等,是女性姿态,也就是女性行为的意思。去不净处等行仪,是女性威仪。另一种说法:女性的排泄器官是女性相;声音等意向是女性表相;去、坐、吃不净处的东西等是女性姿态;女性体态是女性威仪。这些女性相等虽然各自依靠业等缘而生起,但大多数是在有女性根的相续中,以各种形态生起,因此女性根是它们的因,所以说“以女性相、表相、姿态、威仪的因的状态为现起”。又,正是在女性相等中,以所谓因的状态——也就是增上的状态,说它是根。因为在有根的相续中,女性相等形态的色缘不会以其他方式生起,而且这些色是执取“女性”的缘。巴利
438. Itthiyā bhāvo, ‘‘itthī’’ti vā bhavati etena cittaṃ, abhidhānañcāti itthibhāvo, taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti itthibhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Tato eva ‘‘itthī’’ti taṃsahitaṃ santānaṃ pakāsentaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘itthīti pakāsanarasa’’nti. Vaṭṭaṃsatā avisadahatthapādāditā ca itthiliṅgaṃ. Thanamaṃsāvisadatā, nimmassudāṭhitā, kesabandhanaṃ, vatthaggahaṇañca ‘‘itthī’’ti sañjānanassa paccayabhāvato itthinimittaṃ. Daharakālepi suppakamusalakādīhi kīḷā, mattikatakkena suttakantanādi ca itthikuttaṃ, itthikiriyāti attho. Avisadaṭṭhānagamanādiko ākāro itthākappo. Aparo nayo – itthīnaṃ muttakaraṇaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ. Sarādhippāyā itthinimittaṃ. Avisadaṭṭhānagamananisajjākhādanabhojanādikā itthikuttaṃ. Itthisaṇṭhānaṃ itthākappo. Imāni ca itthiliṅgādīni yathāsakaṃ kammādinā paccayena uppajjamānānipi yebhuyyena itthindriyasahite eva santāne taṃtadākārāni hutvā uppajjantīti itthindriyaṃ tesaṃ kāraṇanti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘itthiliṅganimittakuttākappānaṃ kāraṇabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāna’’nti. Itthiliṅgādīsu eva ca kāraṇabhāvasaṅkhātena adhipatibhāvena tassa indriyatā vuttā, indriyasahite santāne itthiliṅgādiākārarūpapaccayānaṃ aññathā anuppādanato, itthiggahaṇassa ca tesaṃ rūpānaṃ paccayabhāvato.
不过,在性十法聚当中,女性根对该聚诸色既不是能生者,也不是随护者或支持者;对其他色聚中的色也是如此。因此,它不像命根之于同一色聚中的一切色、或食之于其他色聚中的色那样,在巴利论典里被说成“根、有、不离去缘”。又因为女性相等特征依赖于其他缘,所以在它有增上之处,于与它类似、由死心所造的那些色中,也能见到那种形态。男性根也是同样的道理。其中不同的地方,应按照已说过的理路来理解。这两者,因为在同一相续中不会同时生起,如《根双论》中说“若女性根生起,男性根也会生起吗?不会”等等,所以应当知道,即使是双性人,在一个刹那中也只有一种根。有些人主张“这是存在于身体一部分的性色”,为了说明他们那种看法是错的,先说了“这两者……都是遍满的”,接着为了消除“若是这样,就会与身净色混杂”的疑问,又说了“并非与身净色……”等话。它的意思是:虽然因为遍满全身,不能说它住在身净色没有占据的地方;但由于所依不同,也不能说它住在身净色已经占据的地方。这才是这里毫无保留的确定说法。通过“如色、味等”这一句,说明即使所依相同,因为特征不同也不会有混杂,更何况所依本就不同的自性者呢?巴利
Yasmā pana bhāvadasakepi rūpānaṃ itthindriyaṃ na janakaṃ, nāpi anupālakaṃ, upatthambhakaṃ vā, na ca aññesaṃ kalāparūpānaṃ, tasmā taṃ jīvitindriyaṃ viya sakalāparūpānaṃ, āhāro viya vā kalāpantararūpānañca ‘‘indriyaatthiavigatapaccayo’’ti pāḷiyaṃ na vuttaṃ. Yasmā ca paccayantarādhīnāni liṅgādīni, tasmā yatthassa ādhipaccaṃ, taṃsadisesu matacittakatarūpesupi taṃsaṇṭhānatā dissati. Esa nayo purisindriyepi. Yaṃ panettha visadisaṃ, taṃ vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ . Tayidaṃ dvayaṃ yasmā ekasmiṃ santāne saha na pavattati ‘‘yassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa purisindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No’’tiādi (yama. 3.indriyayamaka.188) vacanato, tasmā ubhatobyañjanakassāpi ekasmiṃ khaṇe ekameva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Ye pana ‘‘sarīrekadesavutti bhāvarūpa’’nti vadanti, tesampi taṃ micchāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tadubhayampi…pe… byāpakamevā’’ti vatvā yadi evaṃ kāyappasādena saṅkaro siyāti āsaṅkaṃ nivattento ‘‘na ca kāyappasādenā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yadipi sakalasarīrabyāpitāya kāyappasādena aṭṭhitokāse ṭhitanti vattabbataṃ nāpajjati, tena pana bhinnanissayattā ṭhitokāse ṭhitantipi vattabbataṃ nāpajjatīti ayameva cettha nippariyāyakathā. ‘‘Rūparasādayo viyā’’ti etena samānanissayesupi nāma saṅkaro natthi lakkhaṇabhedato, kimaṅgaṃ pana bhinnanissayasabhāvesūti dasseti.
439 “对俱生色加以随护”是它的特相,意思是对与自己一同生起的诸色加以随护。命根纯粹是业所生,所以光是说“俱生”,就已经成立:它所随护的色也是业所生,因此不再另说“业生”。即使业生色只住一刹那,它仍然以作为那些色生起之因的方式随护它们,所以说是“对俱生色加以随护”。因为业生色不能只靠业作为住因,就像食生色等要靠食等作为住因一样。为什么?因为在那一刹那业并不存在。“它们”指的是俱生色。“转起”就是维持、延续。“安住”就是作为住因。通过自己随护,使应当延续、应当转起的诸大种得以维持,这就是它的近因,所以说是“以应当维持的诸大种为近因”。在“随护相等”中,“等”字就包含了转起作用等。只在存在的刹那,也就是只在所随护者存在的那一刹那。如果没有所随护者,就像没有莲花等,水还能随护什么呢?如果业生色没有住因就不能安住,那么命根又以什么为住因呢?回答说“自己……”等。如果业生色的安住系于命根,那为什么不能让它一切时都安住呢?回答说“不是从坏灭……”等。因为能成就种种随护等作用。而那种成就,是因为它成为活命状态种种差别的缘。应当知道:与根相连的色,比起死尸的色,以及随之而起的时节生色等,业生色有命根所造成的差别,并不只是刹那的安住,命根也是相续不断的因;否则,寿尽而死就不合理了。巴利
439.Sahajarūpānupālanalakkhaṇanti attanā sahajātarūpānaṃ anupālanalakkhaṇaṃ. Jīvitindriyassa ekantakammajattā sahaja-ggahaṇeneva anupāletabbānampi kammajabhāvo siddhoti kammaja-ggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Yathāsakaṃ khaṇamattaṭṭhāyinopi kammajarūpassa pavattihetubhāvena taṃ anupālakaṃ, tasmā sahajarūpānupālanalakkhaṇaṃ. Na hi kammajānaṃ kammaṃyeva ṭhitihetu bhavituṃ arahati āhārajādīnaṃ āhārādi viya. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Taṅkhaṇābhāvato. Tesanti sahajarūpānaṃ. Pavattanaṃ yāpanaṃ. Ṭhapanaṃ ṭhitihetutā. Attanā anupālanavasena yāpetabbāni pavattetabbāni bhūtāni etassa padaṭṭhānanti yāpayitabbabhūtapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Anupālanalakkhaṇādimhīti ādi-saddena pavattanarasādimeva saṅgaṇhāti. Atthikkhaṇeyevāti anupāletabbānaṃ atthikkhaṇeyeva. Asati anupāletabbe uppalādimhi kiṃ udakaṃ anupāleyya. Yadi kammajānaṃ ṭhitihetumantarena ṭhiti na hoti, jīvitindriyassa ko ṭhitihetūti āha ‘‘saya’’ntiādi. Yadi kammajānaṃ ṭhānaṃ jīvitindriyapaṭibaddhaṃ, atha kasmā sabbakālaṃ na ṭhapetīti āha ‘‘na bhaṅgato’’tiādi. Tassa tassa anupālanādikassa sādhanato. Taṃ sādhanañca jīvamānatāvisesassa paccayabhāvato. Indriyabaddharūpassa hi matarūpato kammajassa, tadanubandhabhūtassa ca utusamuṭṭhānādito jīvitindriyakato viseso, na kevalaṃ khaṇaṭṭhitiyā eva, pabandhānupacchedassāpi jīvitindriyaṃ kāraṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, itarathā āyukkhayato maraṇaṃ na yujjeyyāti.
440 心所依处具有意界和意识界的依止之相,这一点要怎么理解呢?可以通过教证和理证来理解。教证就像这样:“有某种色,意界和意识界依它而转起,那种色对于意界、意识界以及与之相应的诸法,以所依缘为缘。”诸如此类的就是教证。如果真是这样,那为什么在讲色蕴的部分没有提到它呢?在那里没有提到,是有别的理由。是什么理由呢?是教法方式上的区别。因为眼识等绝对以眼等为依止,而意识并不是绝对以心所依处为依止。另外,依所依而说的“所依二法”等教法已经展开,比如“有某种色是眼识的所依,有某种色不是眼识的所依”等等。对于那些绝对以心所依处为依止的,如果也按“有某种色是意识的所依”等二法来说,那么与之相应的“所缘二法”等就无法成立。因为不能说“有某种色是意识的所缘,有某种色不是意识的所缘”,这样一来,所依二法和所缘二法就成了不同类别,无法成为一味统一的教法。而导师的意趣正是要宣说一味统一的教法。所以应当知道,那里没有说心所依处,并不是因为它不可得。巴利
440.Manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ nissayalakkhaṇaṃ hadayavatthūti kathametaṃ viññātabbanti? Āgamato, yuttito ca. ‘‘Yaṃ rūpaṃ nissāya manodhātu ca manoviññāṇadhātu ca pavattanti, taṃ rūpaṃ manodhātuyā ca manoviññāṇadhātuyā ca taṃsampayuttakānañca dhammānaṃ nissayapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.8) evamādi āgamo. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā rūpakaṇḍe taṃ na vuttanti? Tattha avacanaṃ aññakāraṇaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Desanābhedo. Yathā hi cakkhuviññāṇādīni ekantato cakkhādinissayāni, na evaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ ekantena hadayavatthunissayaṃ. Nissitavasena ca vatthudukādidesanā pavattā ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthu, atthi rūpaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa na vatthū’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 584). Yampi ekantato hadayavatthunissayaṃ, tassa vasena ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa vatthū’’tiādinā dukādīsu vuccamānesupi na tadanuguṇā ārammaṇadukādayo sambhavanti. Na hi ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ, atthi rūpaṃ na manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇa’’nti sakkā vattunti vatthārammaṇadukā bhinnagatikā siyunti ekarasā desanā na bhaveyya. Ekarasañca desanaṃ desetuṃ idha satthu ajjhāsayo. Tasmā tattha hadayavatthu na vuttaṃ, na alabbhamānattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这个道理应该这样理解:在五蕴有中,意界和意识界这两界以完成的所造色为依托。其中,色处等以及食素,因为可以看到它们也能在根所系缚之外生起,所以它们不适合作为这两界的依托;男女根,因为在没有这两者的相续中也能看到这两界,所以它们不适合作为这两界的依托;命根也有其他作用,所以它不适合作为这两界的依托。这样通过排除,就可以知道心所依处是这两界的依托。确实可以说:在五蕴有中,这两界以完成的所造色为依托,因为它们是系属于色而转起的。凡是系属于色而转起的,都可以看到是以完成的所造色为依托的,就像眼识界一样。加上“在五蕴有中”这个限定,是针对意识界说的,因为意界在四蕴有中根本不存在。那么,会不会因为这两界实际上也以根为依托,而导致前面所说的产生矛盾呢?不会,因为这与所见相违。正如眼识随眼根的利钝等而转,同样,这两界不随所依处的利钝等而转,这也是被见到的。也正因如此,在圣典中没有说这两界以根为缘。由此,所谓“随根而转”的根依托性就被否定了。就算心所依处是这两界的依托,也是所造色,那么它是业所生、有特定作用、只住在心脏部位的,这又怎么知道呢?回答说:因为它是依处色,所以像眼根一样是业所生;正因为如此,它有特定作用;又因为它是依处色,所以是识的依托。当人集中精神、用心思考某件事时,心脏会疲劳,因此可以知道它就在那里。所谓“这两界”,就是指意界和意识界。因为它以依托的方式呈现,好像把东西扛在肩上运走一样,所以它的现起方式是“扛运”。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Yutti pana evaṃ veditabbā – nipphannaupādāyarūpanissayaṃ dhātudvayaṃ pañcavokārabhave. Tattha rūpāyatanādīnaṃ, ojāya ca indriyabaddhato bahipi pavattidassanato na taṃnissayatā yujjati, itthipurisindriyānampi tadubhayarahitepi santāne dhātudvayadassanato na taṃnissayatā yujjati, jīvitindriyassāpi aññakiccaṃ vijjatīti na taṃnissayatā yujjati evāti pārisesato hadayavatthu, tesaṃ nissayoti viññāyati. Sakkā hi vattuṃ nipphannaupādāyarūpanissayaṃ dhātudvayaṃ pañcavokārabhave rūpapaṭibaddhavuttibhāvato. Yaṃ yañhi rūpapaṭibaddhavutti, taṃ taṃ nipphannaupādāyarūpanissayaṃ diṭṭhaṃ yathā ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇadhātū’’ti. ‘‘Pañcavokārabhave’’ti ca visesanaṃ manoviññāṇadhātuvasena kataṃ. Manodhātu pana catuvokārabhave nattheva. Nanu ca indriyanissayatāyapi sādhanato viruddho hetu āpajjatīti? Na diṭṭhabādhanato. Diṭṭhaṃ hetaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa viya dhātudvayassa vatthuno mandatikkhādiananuvidhānaṃ. Tathā hissa pāḷiyaṃ indriyapaccayatā na vuttā. Tena tadanuvidhānasaṅkhātā indriyanissayatā bādhīyati. Hotu dhātudvayanissayo hadayavatthu, upādāyarūpañca, etaṃ pana kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ, paṭiniyatakiccaṃ, hadayapadese ṭhitamevāti kathaṃ viññāyatīti? Vuccate – vatthurūpabhāvato kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ cakkhu viya, tato eva paṭiniyatakiccaṃ, vatthurūpabhāvatoti ca viññāṇanissayabhāvatoti attho. Aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi katvā sabbacetasā samannāharitvā kiñci cintentassa hadayassa khijjanato tatthetamavaṭṭhitanti viññāyati. Tāsaññeva dhātūnanti manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃyeva . Nissayabhāvato upari āropetvā vahantaṃ viya paccupatiṭṭhatīti ubbahanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
441 那些以前进为起始的,即是前进等。用“等”这个字,把后退、弯曲、伸展、举起、放下等一切动作都包括进来了。能发动那些前进等动作的心,是它的等起;这风界就是以能发动前进等动作的心为等起的。对于与它俱生的色身,有一种称为僵硬、支持、移动的作用,而作为那作用的辅助因的一种特殊状态,就叫作身表。为了说明这一点,论师说“前进等……身表”。巴利
441. Abhikkamo ādi yesaṃ te abhikkamādī. Ādi-saddena paṭikkamasamiñjanapasāraṇaukkhepanaavekkhepanādikā sabbā kiriyā pariggayhati. Tesaṃ abhikkamādīnaṃ pavattakaṃ cittaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ yassā sā abhikkamādippavattakacittasamuṭṭhānā, vāyodhātu. Tassā yaṃ sahajarūpakāyassa thambhanasandhāraṇacalanasaṅkhātaṃ kiccaṃ, tassa sahakārīkāraṇabhūto ākāraviseso kāyaviññatti nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘abhikkamādi…pe… kāyaviññattī’’ti.
那么,是谁的形相变化呢?就能力而言,是那些以风界为增上的心生大种。那能力是什么?就是心生性与所造色性。或者应这样连接:风界的变化,以俱生……等等……为缘。若如此,表色的所造色性便说不通,因为所造色并非只依止一个大种而存在。经中说“四大种的所造色”,这不算过失,因为四大种的变化也可以是其中某一个的变化,就像四个人共有的一份财产。又因色聚以风界为增上,说“风界的”并不相违。而这种增上是就能力说的,不是就分量说的;否则,不可分离而运作的性质便说不通。有些人说“只是风界的”。照他们的看法,表色的所造色性就很难成立,因为一个大种的变化不会成为四个大种的变化。然而,这个身表,是在手移动等时,取到颤动之色之后,紧接着由一个无间、不可知的意门速行心所执取的。确实存在着一种与颤动之色不同的变化。它是在取到那颜色之后紧接着被取到的,这怎么知道呢?因为能了知意图。在没有表色变化的树木摇动等情形中,看不到“这是有人让它这样的”这种对意图的把握;但在手移动等情形中却能看到。因此可以知道,存在着一种与颤动之色不同的变化,它能让人了解意图。而能让人了解者,必须自身已经被取到,才能让人了解所应了解的意义,不是仅凭它存在就能让人了解;所以,在取到颜色之后,对变化的取到也是通过推理而了知的。正如他们这样说——巴利
Kassa pana ākāravikāroti? Sāmatthiyato vāyodhātuadhikānaṃ cittajamahābhūtānaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ sāmatthiyaṃ? Cittajatā, upādāyarūpatā ca. Atha vā vāyodhātuyā ākāravikāro sahaja…pe… paccayoti sambandhitabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ viññattiyā upādāyarūpabhāvo na yujjati. Na hi upādāyarūpaṃ ekabhūtasannissayaṃ atthi. ‘‘Catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpa’’nti hi vuttaṃ, nāyaṃ doso catunnaṃ vikāro catūsu ekassāpi hoti catusādhāraṇadhanaṃ viya. Vāyodhātuadhikatāya ca kalāpassa ‘‘vāyodhātuyā’’ti vacanaṃ na virujjhati. Evaṃ adhikatā ca sāmatthiyato, na pamāṇato. Aññathā hi avinibbhogavuttitā na yujjeyya. Vāyodhātuyā evāti keci. Tesaṃ matena viññattiyā upādāyarūpatā durupapādā. Na hi ekassa vikāro catunnaṃ hoti. Sā panāyaṃ hatthacalanādīsu phandamānavaṇṇaggahaṇānantaramaviññāyamānantarena manodvārajavanena gayhati. Phandamānavaṇṇavinimutto koci vikāro atthi. Tassa ca taggahaṇānantaraṃ gahaṇaṃ hotīti kathametaṃ viññāyatīti adhippāyaggahaṇato. Na hi viññattivikārarahitesu rukkhacalanādīsu ‘‘idamesa kāreti maññe’’ti adhippāyaggahaṇaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, hatthacalanādīsu pana diṭṭhaṃ. Tasmā phandamānavaṇṇavinimutto koci vikāro atthi adhippāyassa ñāpakoti viññāyati. Ñāpako ca hetu ñāpetabbamatthaṃ sayaṃ gahito eva ñāpeti, na vijjamānatāmattenāti vaṇṇaggahaṇānantaraṃ vikāraggahaṇampi anumānato viññāyati. Tathā hi vadanti –
“ 声音未达所缘性,并非能令知义者。
他们并不是仅凭存在就能让人知道意义,而是因为被认知,才成为意义的显示者。”巴利
‘‘Visayattamanāpannā, saddā nevatthabodhakā; Na sattāmattato atthe, te aññātā pakāsakā’’ti.
如果只是执取变异本身就是了知意图的原因,那么为什么对那些没有记住约定的人,不会生起了知意图呢?并不是只有执取变异才是了知意图的原因,还应当知道,先前已经成立的关联之执取也是它的亲依止缘。前面已经说过,僵硬、支持、移动是伴随表色变异的风界所起的作用。那么,是不是一切风界都做所有这些作用呢?并非如此。因为由第七速行心所生的风界,得到由前速行心所生的诸风界作为支持缘,就以成为其他地方生起之因的方式,使心生色移动,而其他风界则不这样。其他风界只做僵硬和支持,成为它的助益。其他地方生起本身就是移动,应当知道,这是把作者的身份安立在相上。否则,诸法没有功用以及刹那性就不能成立。注释中用需要七对牛来拉的车作为例子来说明这一点。当心生色移动时,由于与它相关联,时节生、业生和食生色也一起移动,就像投进河流中的干牛粪团一样。因为前面已经说过,在执取到颤动的颜色之后,紧接着就执取表色。那么,是不是只有能移动的风界才伴随表色变异呢?并非如此。即使不能那样移动,只是做僵硬和支持,由第一速行心等所生的诸风界,也应当被理解为确实伴随表色变异。因为,这个人想要朝某个方向前进等,就是朝向那个方向而现起变异。与意图共存的变异就是表。这样理解之后,说意门转向也能引发表,就非常合理了。通过上面所说的执取变异这一入口,具有那种变异者的意图就被了知,所以说“以显示意图为作用”。巴利
Yadi vikāraggahaṇameva kāraṇaṃ adhippāyaggahaṇassa, kasmā aggahitasaṅketānaṃ adhippāyaggahaṇaṃ na hotīti? Na kevalaṃ vikāraggahaṇameva adhippāyaggahaṇassa kāraṇaṃ, atha kho purimasiddhasambandhaggahaṇañca imassa upanissayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Thambhanasandhāraṇacalanāni viññattivikārasahitāya vāyodhātuyā hontīti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ sabbāva vāyodhātū sabbāni tāni karontīti? Nayidamevaṃ. Sattamajavanasambhūtā hi vāyodhātu purimajavanasambhūtā vāyodhātuyo upathambhakapaccaye labhitvā desantaruppattihetubhāvena calayati cittajarūpaṃ, na itarā. Itarā pana santhambhanasandhāraṇamattaṃ karontiyo tassā upakārāya honti. Desantaruppatti eva calananti nimitte ca kattubhāvo samāropitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññathā dhammānaṃ abyāpāratā, khaṇikatā ca na siyā. Sattahi yugehi ākaḍḍhitabbasakaṭamettha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ nidassitaṃ. Cittajarūpe pana calante taṃsambandhatāya utukammāhārajarūpampi calati nadīsote pakkhittasukkhagomayapiṇḍaṃ viya phandamānavaṇṇaggahaṇānantaraṃ viññattiggahaṇassa vuttattā. Kiṃ calanakarā eva vāyodhātu viññattivikārasahitāti? Nayidamevaṃ, tathā calayitumasakkuṇantiyopi thambhanasandhāraṇamattakarā paṭhamajavanādisambhūtāpi vāyodhātuyo viññattivikārasahitā evāti gahetabbaṃ. Yena disābhāgenāyaṃ abhikkamādiṃ pavattetukāmo, tadabhimukhavikārasabbhāvato. Adhippāyasahabhāvī hi vikāro viññatti. Evañca katvā manodvārāvajjanassāpi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakavacanaṃ suṭṭhu yujjati. Yathāvuttavikāraggahaṇamukhena taṃsamaṅgino adhippāyo viññāyatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘adhippāyappakāsanarasā’’ti.
身体动作是由风界造成的,而身表就是风界变化出来的状态,所以换个角度说,身表是以“身体动作之因”为表现。又说“以心生风界为近因”,这是就风界的作用突出而言。因为通过身体动作,意图才能被别人知道——也就是以身体动作作为工具,成为让人知道意图的原因,所以叫做“身表”,这是前后的关联。这里的意思是:能让人知道,所以叫“表”。让人知道什么?意图。靠什么让人知道?靠身体。什么样的身体?正在动作的身体。第二种解释则是:通过如上所说的身体而被人知道,所以叫“身表”。其余部分和前面说的一样。巴利
Kāyavipphandanassa hetubhūtāya vāyodhātuyā vikārabhāvato pariyāyena viññatti kāyavipphandanahetubhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā vuttā. Cittasamuṭṭhānavāyodhātupadaṭṭhānāti ca vāyodhātuyā kiccādhikatāya vuttaṃ. Kāyavipphandanena adhippāyaviññāpanahetuttāti kāyavipphandanena karaṇabhūtena adhippāyassa viññāpanahetubhāvato kāyaviññattīti vuccatīti sambandho. Ayañhettha attho – viññāpetīti viññatti. Kiṃ viññāpeti? Adhippāyaṃ. Kena? Kāyena. Kīdisena? Vipphandamānenāti. Dutiyanaye pana yathāvuttena kāyena viññāyatīti kāyaviññatti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
能够让人明白意义的特殊言语,就是语表。它排除了风动、水波、林声、雷声等声音。能发动它的心,就是它的等起心;以发动语表的心为等起者,即是地界。对于这地界——也就是被称为已执取的音节生起之处——其中被称为“撞击”的作用,作为它的辅助条件而存在的某种行相差别,就叫做语表。为了说明这一点,论师说“语表……乃至……语表”。巴利
Atthāvabodhanasamattho vacīviseso vacībhedo. Tena vāyuvanappatinadīghosādiṃ nivatteti. Tassa pavattakaṃ cittaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ yassā sā vacībhedappavattakacittasamuṭṭhānā, pathavīdhātu. Tassā yaṃ upādinnasaṅkhātassa akkharuppattiṭṭhānassa ghaṭṭanasaññitaṃ kiccaṃ, tassa sahakārīkāraṇabhūto ākāraviseso vacīviññatti nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘vacībhe…pe… vacīviññattī’’ti.
现在,“那么,是谁的行相变化呢”这类说法,应当完全按照身表那里已说的方法来理解。不过这里有一个差别:就像在那里说的是“在执取动摇的颜色之后”,在这里则应当接续为“在听到正被听到的声音之后”。而且,这里因为没有僵硬等状态,所以“第七速行所生”这类说法就用不上。因为声音是伴随着撞击而产生的,而撞击在最初速行等阶段也能得到。撞击,从缘的角度说,就是诸已生色聚彼此更近距离地生起;动摇,则是哪怕一个色聚也以一连串在其他地方生起的方式发生——这就是它们之间的差别。正如动摇是风界的作用,撞击则是地界的作用。因此说“地界是已执取撞击的缘”。其余部分和前面所说的一样。“正如”等语,是通过推理来说明身表和语表可以被人把握的方式。譬如,有人看见牛头等形象被吊起绑住,接着生起的、中间不夹杂其他了知的心门过程,取到牛头等与水同时存在的样相、概念和行相,于是就执取了水;同样,当取到正在颤动的色与正被发出的声之后,接着生起的、中间不夹杂其他了知的心门过程,带着先前已成立之关联的执取作为近依,于是就执取了有意图的行相变化。巴利
Idāni ‘‘kassa pana ākāravikāro’’tiādi kāyaviññattiyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha ‘‘phandamānavaṇṇaggahaṇānantara’’nti vuttaṃ, evamidha ‘‘suyyamānasaddasavanānantara’’nti yojetabbaṃ. Idha ca thambhanādīnaṃ abhāvato ‘‘sattamajavanasambhūtā’’tiādinayo na labbhati. Ghaṭṭanena hi saddhiṃ saddo uppajjati. Ghaṭṭanañca paṭhamajavanādīsupi labbhateva. Ghaṭṭanaṃ paccayavasena bhūtakalāpānaṃ aññamaññaṃ āsannataruppādo. Calanaṃ ekassāpi desantaruppādaparamparatāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Yathā ca vāyodhātuyā calanaṃ kiccaṃ, evaṃ pathavīdhātuyā ghaṭṭanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘pathavīdhātuyā upādinnaghaṭṭanassa paccayo’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Yathā hītiādi kāyavacīviññattīnaṃ anumānavasena gahetabbabhāvavibhāvanaṃ. Yathā hi ussāpetvā baddhagosīsādirūpāni disvā tadanantarappavattāya aviññāyamānantarāya manodvāravīthiyā gosīsādīnaṃ udakasahacārippakārasaññāṇākāraṃ gahetvā udakaggahaṇaṃ hoti, evaṃ vipphandamānasamuccāriyamānavaṇṇasadde gahetvā tadanantarapavattāya aviññāyamānantarāya manodvāravīthiyā purimasiddhasambandhagahaṇūpanissayasahitāya sādhippāyavikāraggahaṇaṃ hoti.
442 色法被(虚空界)划分,或者它自己被那些色法划分,又或者它只是诸色的分界,这就是色分界;以这个为特征,所以叫“色分界相”。这个空界确实就像在把一个个色聚划分开来一样。因此说“以显示色的边界为作用”。但从义理上说,因为它是作为诸色的分界而被把握的,所以说“以色之界限为现起”。在某个色聚中,诸大种的分界,就是以那些大种彼此不相接触的方式呈现。即使存在其他色聚的大种与其他色聚的大种相接触的情况,各个大种彼此隔离的状态就是色的边界,也就是空界;对于那些大种来说,它(空界)就是与它们不相接触的。否则,那些大种就不可能被划分,因为它们会变成互相遍满的。不被遍满,就是不相接触。因此世尊说“不为四大所接触”。或者,从耳孔、口孔等来说,它是以有孔有隙的方式呈现。凡诸色被划分的地方,就在那里以它们的分界状态而被获得,所以说“以被划分的色为近因”。通过“由它,在被划分的……”等语,说明空界使各个色聚不与其他色聚混杂。巴利
442. Rūpāni paricchindati, sayaṃ vā tehi paricchijjati, rūpānaṃ vā paricchedamattaṃ rūpaparicchedo, taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti rūpaparicchedalakkhaṇā. Ayaṃ hi ākāsadhātu taṃ taṃ rūpakalāpaṃ paricchindantī viya hoti. Tenāha ‘‘rūpapariyantappakāsanarasā’’ti. Atthato pana yasmā rūpānaṃ paricchedamattaṃ hutvā gayhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpamariyādapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti. Yasmiṃ kalāpe bhūtānaṃ paricchedo, teheva asamphuṭṭhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Vijjamānepi hi kalāpantarabhūtānaṃ kalāpantarabhūtehi samphuṭṭhabhāve taṃtaṃbhūtavivittatā rūpapariyanto ākāsoti yesaṃ so paricchedo, tehi so asamphuṭṭhova. Aññathā paricchinnatā na siyā tesaṃ bhūtānaṃ byāpibhāvāpattito. Abyāpitā hi asamphuṭṭhatā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘asamphuṭṭhaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehī’’ti (dha. sa. 637, 724). Kaṇṇacchiddamukhavivarādivasena ca chiddavivarabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā vā. Yesaṃ rūpānaṃ paricchedo, tattheva tesaṃ paricchedabhāvena labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paricchinnarūpapadaṭṭhānā’’ti. ‘‘Yāya paricchinnesū’’tiādinā ākāsadhātuyā taṃtaṃkalāpānaṃ kalāpantarehi asaṅkarakāraṇataṃ dasseti.
443 443. 不迟钝,就是说不沉重。驱散,即消除、去除,就是它的意思。不僵硬,就是说不坚硬。凭自身柔软的性质,在一切行为中都不抵触。柔软确实在任何地方都不会违逆。有人主张:在这三点上,“不”字是相反(的表述),因为轻快性等是从迟钝等之因的相反面生起的。另一些人则说“存在之否定”。以身体所应做的行为之随顺性,也就是适业性,是它的特征,所以是以身体行为的随顺适业性为特征。不适业就是软弱。因此,适业性被说成是以不软弱为表现。巴利
443.Adandhatāti agarutā. Vinodanaṃ vikkhipanaṃ, apanayananti attho. Athaddhatāti akathinatā. Attano mudubhāveneva sabbakiriyāsu avirodhitā. Mudu hi katthaci na virujjhati. Tīsupi ṭhānesu paṭipakkhe a-kāro dandhatādihetūnaṃ paṭipakkhasamuṭṭhānattā lahutādīnanti keci. Apare pana ‘‘sattāpaṭisedhe’’ti vadanti. Sarīrena kattabbakiriyānaṃ anukūlatāsaṅkhātakammaññabhāvo lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti sarīrakiriyānukūlakammaññabhāvalakkhaṇā. Akammaññaṃ dubbalaṃ nāma hotīti kammaññatā adubbalabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā vuttā.
轻快性等彼此不能分离,所以它们之间的差别难以了知;为了说明它们各自不同的变化形态,才说“即使如此”。界的扰动,就是风、胆汁、痰的激增,或者味等界的变异状态。虽然分成两种来说,但从义理上看,应当知道这只是地界等诸界本身的变异。与它们相反的缘,即适宜的气候、食物、不散乱的心,这些是各种变化的特殊条件;但如果不作区分,那么一切都可以成为一切的条件。因为轻快性等彼此不能分离,所以能随意掌控,就像在神变、幻术等中那样,这是柔软性的表现方式。这里拿经过反复捶打的皮革、炼净的黄金来作比喻,只是为了说明柔软、适业的样子,并不是这里所要表达的重点,因为柔软性和适业性本身是存在的。要知道,在不是由感官所系属的色相续中,轻快性等根本不可能存在;即使在由感官所系属的色界中,它们也不存在,因为没有迟钝等界的扰动。有人说,如果存在那样的界扰动,就应当由与它相反的缘所生的轻快性等而存在,这是没有道理的。因为并不是先看要对治的敌对法,才生起与它相违的法;如果真是那样,那么在善心、有因唯作心生起时,身轻快性等就根本不会有了。那为什么在业生色中不会有轻快性等呢?因为要观待当下的缘。否则,轻快性等就该永远存在了。巴利
Lahutādīnaṃ aññamaññāvijahanena duviññeyyanānattatā vuttāti taṃtaṃvikārādhikarūpehi taṃnānattappakāsanatthaṃ ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhātukkhobho vātapittasemhapakopo, rasādidhātūnaṃ vā vikārāvatthā. Dvidhā vuttopi atthato pathavīdhātuādīnaṃ dhātūnaṃyeva vikāroti daṭṭhabbo. Paṭipakkhapaccayā sappāyautuāhārāvikkhittacittatā. Te ca taṃtaṃvikārassa visesapaccayabhāvato vuttā, avisesena pana sabbe sabbesaṃ paccayā. Yato nesaṃ aññamaññāvijahanaṃ, iddhivaḷañjanādīsu viya vasavattanaṃ maddavappakāro. Suparimadditacammasudhantasuvaṇṇagahaṇañcettha mudukammaññasadisarūpanidassanamattaṃ, na taṃ idha adhippetaṃ mudutākammaññatāsabbhāvato. Na hi anindriyabaddharūpasantāne lahutādīni sambhavanti, indriyabaddhepi rūpabhave na santi dandhattakarādidhātukkhobhābhāvato. Sati hi tādise dhātukkhobhe tappaṭipakkhapaccayasamuṭṭhānāhi lahutādīhi bhavitabbanti keci, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Na hi vūpasametabbapaccanīkāpekkho tabbirodhidhammasamuppādo, tathā sati sahetukakiriyacittuppādesu kāyalahutādīnaṃ abhāvova siyā. Kasmā pana kammajarūpesu lahutādayo na hontīti? Paccuppannapaccayāpekkhattā. Aññathā sabbadābhāvīhi lahutādīhi bhavitabbaṃ siyāti.
444 “初积”是指最初的积聚,或者稍微积聚一点也叫积;又或者说,像随各自的因缘从各处聚集而来一样,所以叫积。把这两种含义合在一起,以这个为特征,所以叫“积的特征”。色的积集就是最初的生起,并且是增长,因为“upa”这个词有“最初”和“在上”两层意思,如“增上安立”“增上灌注”等用法所示。“前际”是指过去的那一部分,意思是尚未到来的状态。正在生起的色法,其生起就像从未来刹那中涌出一样,所以说“以涌出为作用”。同样,它像是被交付出来说“这些是色法”那样被把握,所以说“以交付为现起”。“以圆满为现起”应当依据“上积即积”这个含义来理解。“以转起为特征”,应当理解为色的转起。“以相续为作用”,就是依前后次第不断连接的作用。正因为如此,以不断绝的方式被把握,所以说“以不断绝为现起”。巴利
444. Ādi cayo, īsaṃ vā cayoti ācayo, yathāpaccayaṃ tato tato āgatassa viya cayoti vā ācayo, tadubhayaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ācayo lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti ācayalakkhaṇo. Rūpassa upacayo paṭhamuppādo, vaḍḍhi ca ‘‘upaññattaṃ upasitta’’ntiādīsu viya upa-saddassa paṭhamūpariatthassa nidassanato. Pubbantatoti pubbakoṭṭhāsato, anāgatabhāvatoti attho. Uppajjamāne rūpadhamme uppādo anāgatakkhaṇato ummujjāpento viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ummujjāpanaraso’’ti. Tathā so ‘‘ime rūpadhammā’’ti niyyātento viya gayhatīti āha ‘‘niyyātanapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti. Paripuṇṇabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānatā ‘‘uparicayo upacayo’’ti imassa atthassa vasena veditabbā. Pavattilakkhaṇāti rūpānaṃ pavattananti lakkhitabbā. Anuppabandhanarasāti pubbāparavasena anu anu pabandhanakiccā. Tato eva anupacchedavasena gahetabbato anupacchedapaccupaṭṭhānā.
“两者”就是指积集和相续这两者。“唯是生色”只是色法生起本身的另一种说法。如果是这样,那为什么还要分别来说呢?回答说:“因为行相有差别。”意思是,生色的生起行相有种种不同。针对不同根机的众生而分别解说,这样做的理由后面会说明。那么,怎么才能知道:生色的差别是由生起行相的不同而来,而不是由自性本身的不同而来呢?为了显示这可以从论书的解说来了知,就说了“然而因为……”等话。其中,“诸处的积”,是指对十一种半色处,因为是最初积集起来,所以称为“积”。这个本身就是积集,因为它是最初生起的状态,所以取“upa”这个词“最初”的含义。而对于就在那里生起的法,因为后来在上面又堆积起来,所以叫“积集”,这个就是“相续”,因为它是依不断连接的方式而生起的状态。或者也可以说:诸处的积,是以最初的状态为特征的生起;而对于就在那里生起的法,因为后来在上面又堆积起来,所以叫“积集”,也就是增长的意思。以增长为特征的生起,这个就是“相续”,因为它是以不断连接的方式生起的状态。因此说“在注释书中也……”等等。巴利
Ubhayampīti upacayo santatīti ubhayampi. Jātirūpassevāti rūpuppādasseva adhivacanaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā vibhajja vuttāti āha ‘‘ākāranānattato’’ti, jātirūpassa pavattiākārabhedatoti attho. Veneyyavasena vibhajjakathane kāraṇaṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Kathaṃ panetaṃ viññātabbaṃ, pavattiākāranānattato jātirūpassa bhedo, na sabhāvatoti ? Niddesatoti dassento ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yo āyatanānanti yo aḍḍhekādasannaṃ rūpāyatanānaṃ ādicayattā ‘‘ācayo’’ti vutto. So eva upacayo paṭhamuppādabhāvato upa-saddo paṭhamatthoti katvā. Yo pana tattheva uppajjamānānaṃ upari cayattā upacayo, sā eva santati anupabandhavasena uppattibhāvato. Atha vā yo āyatanānaṃ ācayo paṭhamabhāvena upalakkhito uppādo, so pana tattheva uppajjamānānaṃ upari cayattā upacayo, vaḍḍhīti attho. Upacayo vaḍḍhibhāvena upalakkhito uppādo, sā eva santati pabandhākārena uppattibhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyampī’’tiādi.
在这里,这样解说到底说明了什么?通过“诸处的积”等解说,说明了什么义理?是以处来说明积。因为积、上积、相续,都以生起的状态存在,所以都是积;通过诸处来显明积等,因此是以处说积。以“诸处的积”等说法,就是在表明诸处是具有积之自性的生起法,因此用积来指称那具有这种自性的处。因为生起才是它的特征,而不是色本身。巴利
Tattha evaṃ kiṃ kathitanti ‘‘yo āyatanānaṃ ācayo’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 641) niddesena kiṃ atthajātaṃ kathitaṃ hoti? Āyatanena ācayo kathito. Ācayupacayasantatiyo hi nibbattibhāvena ācayo evāti āyatanehi ācayādīnaṃ pakāsitattā tehi ācayo kathito. Āyatanānaṃ ācayādivacaneneva ācayasabhāvāni uppādadhammāni āyatanānīti ācayena taṃpakatikaṃ āyatanaṃ kathitaṃ. Lakkhaṇañhi uppādo, na rūparūpanti.
色的成熟,就是色法的衰老。它的作用是引向坏灭,也就是引向坏灭的功能。虽说自性并未消失——坚硬等自性也没有失去——但老发生在住的那一刹那,而那时法并不会舍弃自己的自性。新生的状态就是生起位;人们是依它的离去而觉知它的,所以说“以新生状态的离去为现起”。“非色法”这一说法,是因为它们的老被很好地隐蔽了才这样说。因为即使是色法的刹那老,也确实是被隐蔽的,这被称为无间老。这里所说的变异,是指分断等变异;这种变异在非色法中找不到。所谓无间老,也应当这样联系起来:对这种老而言,这种变异同样不存在。这个老没有间断,所以叫无间老,意思是从新生状态难以了知的内在衰老。巴利
Rūpaparipāko rūpadhammānaṃ jiṇṇatā. Upanayanarasāti bhaṅgupanayanakiccā. Sabhāvānapagamepīti kakkhaḷatādisabhāvassa avigamepi. Ṭhitikkhaṇe hi jarā, na ca tadā dhammo sabhāvaṃ vijahati nāma. Navabhāvo uppādāvatthā, tassa apagamabhāvena gayhatīti āha ‘‘navabhāvāpagamapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti. ‘‘Arūpadhammāna’’nti idaṃ tesaṃ jarāya suṭṭhu paṭicchannatāya vuttaṃ. Rūpadhammānampi hi khaṇikajarā paṭicchannā eva, yā avīcijarātipi vuccati. Esa vikāroti khaṇḍiccādivikāramāha. So hi arūpadhammesu na labbhati. Yā avīcijarā nāma, tassāpi esa vikāro natthīti sambandhitabbaṃ. Natthi etissā jarāya vīcīti avīcijarā, navabhāvato duviññeyyantarajarāti attho.
应当从各方面、完全地理解为“坏灭”,所以它以遍坏为特相。所谓“常”,就是恒久不变;但色法因为刹那坏灭,由于那种坏灭而不是常,所以是无常,这就是无常性。然而,这种无常性使已经达到住位的色法以毁灭的性质而仿佛沉没下去,所以说“以沉没为作用”。又因为这种无常性从色法的坏灭状态来看,只是以尽灭、坏灭的行相被把握,所以说“以尽灭坏灭为现起”。巴利
Parito sabbaso ‘‘bhijjana’’nti lakkhitabbāti paribhedalakkhaṇā. Niccaṃ nāma dhuvaṃ, rūpaṃ pana khaṇabhaṅgitāya yena bhaṅgena na niccanti aniccaṃ, so aniccassa bhāvoti aniccatā. Sā pana yasmā ṭhitippattaṃ rūpaṃ vināsabhāvena saṃsīdantī viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṃsīdanarasā’’ti. Yasmā ca sā rūpadhammānaṃ bhaṅgabhāvato khayavayākāreneva gayhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘khayavayapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti.
445 在这里,“食素之相”是指:随着身体各个大小肢节而运行的滋味精华,它能支撑身体、增长力量,是依靠大种而生起的一种特别性质,这就是食素。做成团块而食用,所以叫团食;被摄取进来,所以叫食,意思是做成团块后吞下去。这里是为了说明有依托的食素才这样说的。内在的食必须依靠外在食物作为条件,才能生起色法;而它摄取色法,所以叫食。因此说“以摄取色法为作用”。正因如此,它能生起以食素为第八的色聚,所以以支撑这个身体为现起。食素摄取色法的作用要依赖外在条件,所以说“以应当被摄取的事物为近因”。巴利
445.Ojālakkhaṇoti ettha aṅgamaṅgānusārino rasassa sāro upathambhabalakaro bhūtanissito eko viseso ojā. Kabaḷaṃ karīyatīti kabaḷīkāro. Āharīyatīti āhāro, kabaḷaṃ katvā ajjhoharīyatīti attho. Idaṃ pana savatthukaṃ ojaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Bāhiraṃ āhāraṃ paccayaṃ labhitvā eva ajjhattikāhāro rūpaṃ uppādeti, so pana rūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro. Tenāha ‘‘rūpāharaṇaraso’’ti. Tato eva ojaṭṭhamakarūpuppādanena imassa kāyassa upathambhanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Ojāya rūpāharaṇakiccaṃ bāhirādhīnanti āha ‘‘āharitabbavatthupadaṭṭhāno’’ti.
446 在“力色”等说法中,意思是:在这个身体里,确实有所谓“力”,有所谓“产生”,有所谓“病”;依据“生、再生”这一说法,确实有所谓“生”。而由于它们离开四大种即不存在,所以应当是所造色。“有些人”指的是无畏山寺的住众。关于“被驳斥”,这里应当这样理解:昏沉并不是色,因为它是在诸盖中被讲述的。凡是能在诸盖中被讲述的,就不是色,比如欲贪。不过,也许昏沉有两种:色和非色。那么,其中非色的那种是在诸盖中被讲述的,难道它不是色吗?不是的,因为没有特别说明。因为并没有特别区分之后才在诸盖中讲述昏沉,所以即使设想昏沉有两种,也不能否定它的盖的性质。因为可以这样说:即使设想有一种不同于无色昏沉的昏沉,它也仍然是盖,因为它具有昏沉的自性,就像另一种昏沉一样。巴利
446.Balarūpantiādīsu imasmiṃ kāye balaṃ nāma atthi, sambhavo nāma atthi, rogo nāma atthi, ‘‘jāti sañjātī’’ti (vibha. 191) vacanato jāti nāma atthi, tehipi catūhi mahābhūtehi vinā abhāvato upādāyarūpehi bhavitabbanti adhippāyo. Ekaccānanti abhayagirivāsīnaṃ. Paṭikkhittanti ettha evaṃ paṭikkhepo veditabbo – middhaṃ rūpameva na hoti nīvaraṇesu desitattā. Yassa hi nīvaraṇesu desanā, taṃ na rūpaṃ yathā kāmacchando. Siyā panetaṃ duvidhaṃ middhaṃ rūpaṃ, arūpañcāti. Tattha yaṃ arūpaṃ, taṃ nīvaraṇesu desitaṃ ‘‘na rūpa’’nti? Taṃ na, visesavacanābhāvato. Na hi visesetvā middhaṃ nīvaraṇesu desitaṃ, tasmā middhassa duvidhataṃ parikappetvāpi na sakkā nīvaraṇabhāvaṃ nivattetuṃ. Sakkā hi vattuṃ ‘‘yaṃ taṃ arūpato aññaṃ middhaṃ parikappitaṃ, tampi nīvaraṇaṃ middhasabhāvattā itaraṃ middhaṃ viyā’’ti.
如果说“盖”存在,那它和什么相冲突呢?盖是应当断除的。因为断除了五盖之后,经中说:“你确实是牟尼、正觉者,你没有盖。”(《经集》546)而色是不应当断除的,因为论中说:“哪些法既不是由见道所断,也不是由修道所断?四地中的善法、四地中的果报、三地中的唯作无记、色与涅槃。这些法既不是由见道所断,也不是由修道所断。”(《法集论》1407)这里并不是指断除以色为所缘的烦恼,因为在“比丘们,色不是你们的,应当舍弃它”等说法中,并不像欲贪等那样被理解为以那种方式断除。因此,昏沉不是色。如果你们不接受昏沉是色,那世尊怎么会有睡眠呢?因为昏沉在《分别论》中以“睡眠、瞌睡”等被分别,难道昏沉就是睡眠吗?昏沉不是睡眠,但因为它是睡眠的因,所以被分别说为“睡眠”,就像阴性词等的表达一样。即便如此,如果作为睡眠之因的昏沉不存在,世尊怎么会有睡眠呢?世尊的睡眠是由于身体不适,不是因为昏沉。不能说这种睡眠不存在,因为世尊说过:“我的背不舒服,我要伸展一下。”(《中部》2.22)这里并不是确定地说“只有昏沉才是睡眠之因”,而是确定地说“只有睡眠之因才是昏沉”。因此,还有别的睡眠之因,那是什么呢?就是身体的不适。所以说:“世尊的睡眠是由于身体不适,不是因为昏沉。”巴利
Bhavatu nīvaraṇaṃ, ko virodhoti ce? Nīvaraṇañca pahātabbaṃ. Pañca nīvaraṇe pahāya ‘‘addhā munīsi sambuddho, natthi nīvaraṇā tavā’’ti (su. ni. 546) vacanato. Appahātabbañca rūpaṃ ‘‘katame dhammā neva dassanena na bhāvanāya pahātabbā? Catūsu bhūmīsu kusalaṃ, catūsu bhūmīsu vipāko, tīsu bhūmīsu kiriyābyākataṃ, rūpañca nibbānañca. Ime dhammā neva dassanena na bhāvanāya pahātabbā’’ti (dha. sa. 1407) vacanato. Na cettha tadārammaṇakilesappahānaṃ adhippetaṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, na tumhākaṃ, taṃ pajahathā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.34) viya kāmacchandādīnaṃ tathā pahānassa anadhippetattā. Tasmā na middhaṃ rūpaṃ. Yadi middhassa rūpabhāvaṃ na sampaṭicchatha, kathaṃ bhagavato niddā. Middhañhi ‘‘niddāpacalāyikā’’tiādinā vibhaṅge vibhattattā niddāti? Na middhaṃ niddā, niddāhetubhāvato pana taṃ ‘‘niddā’’ti vibhattaṃ yathā itthiliṅgādi. Evampi niddāhetuno middhassa abhāvato kathaṃ bhagavato niddāti? Niddā bhagavato sarīragilāniyā, na middhena. Sā ca natthīti na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘piṭṭhi me āgilāyati, tamahaṃ āyamissāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.22) vacanato. Na cettha evamavadhāraṇaṃ middhameva niddāhetūti, niddāhetu eva middhanti evamavadhāraṇā. Tasmā aññopi atthi niddāhetu, ko pana soti? Sarīragilāniyā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘niddā bhagavato sarīragilāniyā, na middhenā’’ti.
不能说世尊没有睡眠,因为他说过:“阿吉韦萨那,我记得……在白天睡过。”(《中部》1.387)此外,从相应说法也可见昏沉不是色。论中确实说过:“昏沉睡眠盖与无明盖,既是盖,也是与盖相应的。”(《法集论》1176)这里难道不能像“碎石、沙砾、鱼群,行走的、站立的”那样,按“随所得”的方式来理解吗?可以理解,因为色的性质在那里并未成立。如果色的性质成立,那么“随所得”的缘才可以适用。此外,从这一点也可见昏沉不是色,因为它在无色界也会生起。论中也说过:“缘盖法而生起盖法,依非前生缘。”(《发趣论》3.8.8)在该论的分别中详细说:“在无色界,缘欲贪盖而生起昏沉睡眠盖、掉举盖、无明盖。”因此,注释书中否定“昏沉是色”的说法,是极为正确的否定。巴利
Niddā ca bhagavato natthīti na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ aggivessana…pe… divā supitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387) vacanato. Itopi na middhaṃ rūpaṃ sampayogavacanato. Vuttañhi ‘‘thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ avijjānīvaraṇena nīvaraṇañceva nīvaraṇasampayuttañcā’’tiādi (dha. sa. 1176). Na cettha yathālābhabhavanaṃ? Sakkā paccetuṃ ‘‘sakkharakathalikampi macchagumbampi carantampi tiṭṭhantampī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.249) viya appasiddhatāya rūpabhāvassa. Siddhe hi tassa rūpabhāve sambhavato yathālābhapaccayo yujjeyyāti. Itopi na rūpaṃ middhaṃ āruppesu uppajjanato. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘nīvaraṇaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca nīvaraṇo dhammo uppajjati napurejātapaccayā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.8.8) imassa vibhaṅge ‘‘āruppe kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ paṭicca thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccanīvaraṇaṃ avijjānīvaraṇaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vitthāro. Tasmā ‘‘na middhaṃ rūpa’’nti yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu paṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ supaṭikkhittameva.
至于其余那些,则是在力量色等里面。即使是由业所生的病,它的直接原因也是由不适应的条件所引生的界扰动,更何况其他的病。而这种病,从实质上说,只可能存在于色法变异、住立、坏灭的刹那中,所以说“病色已经被老和无常的执取所执取”。也已经被积集和相续的执取所执取,因为离开这个的色法生起是不存在的。而在依止的状态下,并没有别的所谓“生”。产生是欲界中某些众生根成熟的缘,是水界活动方式的一种差别,因此说“产生色已经被水界的执取所执取”。所谓身力,从实质上说,是风界活动方式的一种差别,因为它是风界的扩展状态。由于人们称它为“生命力”,所以说“力量色已经被风界的执取所执取”。那么,为什么不按照顺序来驳斥它们呢?因为要显示不重视,由于它们单独并不存在、观察不到;或者是因为对昏沉的驳斥是个大论题,所以先做了。应当知道,随顺着这个,也以逆序的方式说明了其余那些的不存在。巴利
Itaresūti balarūpādīsu. Kammasamuṭṭhānassāpi rogassa visabhāgapaccayasamuppanno dhātukkhobho āsannakāraṇaṃ, pageva itarassa. So ca atthato rūpadhammānaṃ vikārāvatthāṭhitibhaṅgakkhaṇesu eva siyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘rogarūpaṃ jaratāaniccatāgahaṇena gahitamevā’’ti. Upacayasantatigahaṇena gahitamevāti tabbinimuttassa rūpuppādassa abhāvato. Upādāvatthāya ca aññā jāti nāma nattheva. Sambhavo kāmadhātuyaṃ ekacciyasattānaṃ indriyaparipākapaccayo āpodhātuyā pavattiākāravisesoti āha ‘‘sambhavarūpaṃ āpodhātuggahaṇena gahitamevā’’ti. Kāyabalaṃ nāma atthato vāyodhātuyā pavattiākāraviseso tassā vipphārabhāvato. Yato naṃ ‘‘pāṇabala’’nti vadanti, tenāha ‘‘balarūpaṃ vāyodhātuggahaṇena gahitamevā’’ti. Kasmā pana nesaṃ ayathākkamato paṭikkhepo katoti? Visuṃ natthīti katvā anupalabbhamānattā anādaradassanatthaṃ, middhapaṭikkhepo vā mahāpañhoti paṭhamaṃ kato. Tadanusārena paṭilomanayena itaresampi abhāvo vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
“如此”这个词要和“二十八种”连起来理解,按照上面说的这个顺序,就成了二十八种。而且要知道,这只是依照巴利圣典里原有的方式来说的,所以没有缺少;至于没有多出来,前面也已经说明过了。巴利
‘‘Itī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhavīsatividha’’nti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ, iminā vuttakkamena aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ hotīti. So ca kho pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayenevāti anūnatā veditabbā. Anadhikabhāvo pana dassito eva.
447 447. 相应法之聚依此而安立,因此称为因;从根本义来说,贪等以及无贪等,这样的因不存在,所以是非因。没有它的因,所以是无因;与有因相对,意思是不与因一起生起。无因本身就是因不相应,因为与因相离,所以是因不相应。虽然法没有差别,但依字义的差别,为了适应不同根机的教化对象而作二法句的教导,所以这里按二法句来说。依缘而运作,所以与缘俱在,是有缘。在世间与自己的缘相应,或者说为人们所知,所以是世间。流向有顶,或流向种姓,所以是漏;与漏俱在,所以是有漏;意思是应当被漏所缘取。以“等”字应看到它统摄了结缚、暴流、轭、盖、杂染、执取、非心所、非心相应、非色界、非无色界、非出世间、不定、非出离、无常等这些类别。巴利
447. Sampayuttadhammarāsi hinoti etena patiṭṭhahatīhi hetu, mūlaṭṭhena lobhādiko, alobhādiko ca, tādiso hetu na hotīti nahetu. Nāssa hetu atthīti ahetukaṃ, sahetukapaṭiyogibhāvato hetunā saha na uppajjatīti attho. Ahetukameva hetunā vippayuttatāya hetuvippayuttaṃ. Dhammanānattābhāvepi hi saddatthanānattena veneyyavasena dukantaradesanā hotīti dukapadavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Paccayādhīnavuttitāya saha paccayenāti sappaccayaṃ. Attano paccayehi loke niyuttaṃ, viditanti vā lokiyaṃ. Ā bhavaggaṃ, ā gotrabhuṃ vā savantīti āsavā, saha āsavehīti sāsavaṃ, āsavehi ālambitabbanti attho. Ādisaddena saṃyojanīyaṃ oghanīyaṃ yoganīyaṃ nīvaraṇīyaṃ saṃkilesikaṃ parāmaṭṭhaṃ acetasikaṃ cittavippayuttaṃ narūpāvacaraṃ naarūpāvacaraṃ naapariyāpannaṃ aniyataṃ aniyyānikaṃ aniccanti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“我慢被安置在这里,这就是我”,所以称为我,也就是自体。针对这个我、为了这个我而运作的,是内,也就是系属于根的法;存在于这些之中的,是内,也就是眼等。不过在注释中,按照所说的方式,内本身就是内,就像“应被调伏者”那样,为了说明这个意思才说“因为针对自体而运作,所以是内”。其余二十三种。“由此是外”,这是因为没有内的特征才这么说。以碰触的方式,即成为有境者和境而彼此碰触。其余十六种。因为颠倒,所以不应以碰触的方式去执取。因为难以通达,所以由于微细而难以了知。不靠近智,所以是远。十三种,以心处为最后。就自性而言,就是不去执取“色的界限、色的变化、色的积聚”等,而是由智界定并执取各自的“坚硬”等自性。其余十种。因为与之相反,所以不能以自性来把握。为了说明耳等也像眼一样,因为具有明净的自性,所以成为各自取境的缘,所以说“眼等……净色”。因为相反,就是与那相反的自性。以增上的意义来说,这里眼等五根在眼识等中有增上作用,因为它们随利钝而转;男女二根在各自的作用上有增上;命根在守护俱生色上有增上。这两者前面已经说过。因为已执取,所以是已执取。业所生的,就像“这是我的果报”一样,被业执取,因为不可否定之故。巴利
Āhito ahaṃ māno etthāti attā, attabhāvo. Taṃ attānaṃ adhikicca uddissa pavattā ajjhattā , indriyabaddhadhammā, tesu bhavaṃ ajjhattikaṃ, cakkhādi. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttanayena ajjhattameva ajjhattikaṃ yathā venayikoti (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8) imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘attabhāvaṃ adhikicca pavattattā ajjhattika’’nti. Sesaṃ tevīsatividhaṃ. ‘‘Tato bāhirattā’’ti idaṃ ajjhattikalakkhaṇābhāvato vuttaṃ. Ghaṭṭanavasenāti visayī, visayo ca hutvā saṅghaṭṭanavasena. Sesaṃ soḷasavidhaṃ. Viparītattāti ghaṭṭanavasena agahetabbato. Duppaṭivijjhasabhāvattāti sukhumabhāvena duviññeyyasabhāvattā. Ñāṇassa āsanne na hotīti dūre. Terasa hadayavatthupariyosānāni. Sabhāvenevāti ‘‘rūpassa paricchedo, rūpassa vikāro, rūpassa upacayo’’tiādinā aggahetvā attano sabhāveneva kakkhaḷattādinā ñāṇena paricchijja gahetabbato. Sesaṃ dasavidhaṃ. Tabbiparītatāyāti sabhāvena apariggahitabbato. Sotādīnampi cakkhuno viya pasannasabhāvattā eva yathāsakaṃ visayaggahaṇapaccayatāti dassento āha ‘‘cakkhādi…pe… pasādarūpa’’nti. Viparītattāti tabbidhurasabhāvattā. Adhipatiyaṭṭhenāti ettha cakkhādīnaṃ tāva pañcannaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīsu ādhipateyyaṃ tesaṃ paṭumandabhāvānuvattanato, itthipurisindriyadvayassa sakicce jīvitindriyassa sahajarūpānupālane. Tadubhayaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Upādinnattāti gahitattā. Kammanibbattañhi ‘‘mametaṃ phalaṃ’’nti kammunā gahitaṃ viya hoti apaṭikkhepato.
448 关于有见、业生等三法组,指的是有见三法组以及业生等三法组。“粗”指十二种粗色。“色”指色处。以“可被看见的性质”为特征,连同能见一起,所以叫“有见”;以“可被撞击的性质”为特征,连同能撞击一起,所以叫“有对”;既是有见又是有对,所以叫“有见有对”。其中,凡是具有可被看见的性质的,就是有见。眼识的所缘境,就是可被看见的性质。虽然它和色处并无不同,但为了让色处区别于其他法,就把它当作另一回事来说:“连同能见,所以是有见。”因为在诸法以法的共性而成为一体时,那个造成差别的特殊性,适合被当作另一回事来譬喻说明。这样才能了知意义上的差别。所谓撞击的性质,就是自己以及依靠自身而到达的、未到达的,都面对面地互相碰触、互相撞击;由于这种作用,在眼等诸境上,伴随着变动等状态和其他条件,就产生了变化。其余十一种粗色,因为没有有见的性质,所以是无见;依照前面所说的方式,是有对。通过否定这两者,就是无见无对。关于“从业而生”:这里,纯粹由业等起的,有八根和心,共九种色;而在九种四等起中,由业等起的也唯有这九种色。这样,共十八种色,因为从业而生起,所以是业生。凡是已生的、正在生的、将要生的,这一切都称为“业生”,就像说“乳”一样。从业以外的其他缘而生的,就是由时节、心、食所生。“不从任何事物而生的”,指的是相色。两种表色、声、空界、轻快性等三种,是心等起的八不离色,这十五种色是心生。空界、轻快性等三种、食等起的八不离色,这十二种色是食生。这里加上声,则十三种色由时节等起,是时生。其余的,应当依照业生三法组中所说的方式来了知。巴利
448.Sanidassanakammajādīnaṃ tikānanti sanidassanattikassa, kammajādittikānañca. Oḷāriketi dvādasavidhe oḷārikarūpe. Rūpanti rūpāyatanaṃ. Daṭṭhabbabhāvasaṅkhātena saha nidassanenāti sanidassanaṃ, paṭihananabhāvasaṅkhātena saha paṭighenāti sappaṭighaṃ, sanidassanañca taṃ sappaṭighañcāti sanidassanasappaṭighaṃ. Tattha yassa daṭṭhabbabhāvo atthi, taṃ sanidassanaṃ. Cakkhuviññāṇagocarabhāvova daṭṭhabbabhāvo. Tassa rūpāyatanato anaññattepi aññehi dhammehi rūpāyatanaṃ visesetuṃ aññaṃ viya katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘saha nidassanena sanidassana’’nti. Dhammabhāvasāmaññena hi ekībhūtesu dhammesu yo nānattakaro viseso, so añño viya katvā upacarituṃ yutto. Evaṃ hi atthavisesāvabodho hotīti. Yo sayaṃ, nissayavasena ca sampattānaṃ, asampattānañca paṭimukhabhāvo aññamaññaṃ patanaṃ, so paṭihananabhāvo, yena byāpārādivikārapaccayantarasahitesu cakkhādīnaṃ visayesu vikāruppatti. Sesaṃ ekādasavidhaṃ oḷārikarūpaṃ. Tañhi sanidassanattābhāvato anidassanaṃ, vuttanayeneva sappaṭighaṃ. Ubhayapaṭikkhepena anidassanaappaṭighaṃ. Kammato jātanti ettha yaṃ ekantakammasamuṭṭhānaṃ aṭṭhindriyāni, hadayañcāti navavidhaṃ rūpaṃ, yañca navavidhe catusamuṭṭhāne kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ navavidhameva rūpanti evaṃ aṭṭhārasavidhampi kammato uppajjanato kammajaṃ. Yañhi jātañca yañca jāyati yañca jāyissati, taṃ sabbampi ‘‘kammaja’’nti vuccati yathā duddhanti. Tadaññapaccayajātanti kammato aññapaccayato jātaṃ utucittāhārajaṃ. Nakutocijātanti lakkhaṇarūpamāha. Viññattidvayaṃ, saddo, ākāsadhātu, lahutādittayaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānāni avinibbhogarūpānīti etaṃ pañcadasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ cittajaṃ. Ākāsadhātu, lahutādittayaṃ, āhārasamuṭṭhānāni avinibbhogarūpānīti etaṃ dvādasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ āhārajaṃ. Ettha saddaṃ pakkhipitvā terasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ututo samuṭṭhitaṃ utujaṃ. Sesaṃ kammajatike vuttanayānusāreneva veditabbaṃ.
449 对于“所见等四法”“色色等四法”“事等四法”,应当分别配上“四法”这个词。凡是色处,不论已见、正见、将见、当见,这一切都叫“所见”,因为它没有超出“所见”的本性,就像“乳”一样。其余诸法也照这个道理类推。因为是见的对象,即眼识所了知;因为是听的对象,即耳识所了知。香、味、触这三者,即香、味、触这一组。叫“所觉”,因为要通过接触、到达才能执取。因此说“因为是已达而能取之诸根的所缘性”。巴利
449. Diṭṭhādicatukkavasena, rūparūpādicatukkavasena, vatthādicatukkavasenāti pāṭekkaṃ catukkasaddo yojetabbo. Yaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ adakkhi yaṃ passati yaṃ dakkhissati yaṃ passeyya, taṃ sabbaṃ diṭṭhaṃ nāma diṭṭhasabhāvānātivattanato yathā duddhanti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Dassanavisayattāti cakkhuviññāṇaviññeyyattā. Savanavisayattāti sotaviññāṇaviññeyyattā. Gandharasaphoṭṭhabbattayanti gandho raso phoṭṭhabbanti etaṃ tayaṃ. Mutaṃ nāma mutvā patvā gahetabbato. Tenāha ‘‘sampattaggāhakaindriyavisayattā’’ti.
什么叫“触所缘”?就是地、火、风这三界。那为什么这里不把水界也算进去呢?难道不是因为碰到冷就能感觉到它,而冷就是水界吗?确实能感觉到冷,但冷并不是水界。那到底是什么呢?其实就是火界。因为当暖性很微弱的时候,就会产生冷的认知。实际上根本不存在一种叫“冷”的性质,只是因为暖性太弱,才误以为有冷。怎么理解这一点呢?因为冷的认知并不稳定,就像在对岸和此岸之间来回一样。比如热天里,站在太阳底下的人走进阴凉处,就会觉得冷;而刚从地窖里出来的人,在同一个地方却会觉得暖。如果冷真的是水界,那它就应该在同一聚中与暖性一起被感知到,但实际上感知不到。因此可以知道,冷并不是水界。这是对那些主张诸界不可分离的人的回答;而对于不主张四界不可分离的人,则通过在同一聚中观察四界的作用、以它们同处而成立,这也同样是对他们的回答。至于那些说“冷是风界的特相”的人,这个回答对他们也一样适用。如果冷是风界,那它就应该在同一聚中与暖性一起被感知到,但实际上感知不到。因此可以知道,冷并不是风界。至于那些认为流动性就是水界、而且它能通过触碰被感知的人,就应该对他们说:你们以为流动性也能被触知,这纯粹是一种执著,就像形状一样。正如古人所说——巴利
Kimidaṃ phoṭṭhabbaṃ nāmāti? Pathavītejovāyodhātuttayaṃ. Kasmā panettha āpodhātu aggahitā, nanu sītatā phusitvā gayhati, sā ca āpodhātūti? Saccaṃ gayhati, na pana sā āpodhātu. Kiñcarahīti? Tejodhātu eva. Mande hi uṇhabhāve sītabuddhi. Na hi sītaṃ nāma koci guṇo atthi, kevalaṃ pana uṇhabhāvassa mandatāya sītatābhimāno. Kathametaṃ viññātabbanti ce? Anavaṭṭhitattā sītabuddhiyā yathā pārāpāre. Tathā hi ghammakāle ātape ṭhitānaṃ chāyaṃ paviṭṭhānaṃ sītabuddhi hoti, tattheva pana pathavīgabbhato uṭṭhitānaṃ uṇhabuddhi. Yadi hi sītatā āpodhātu siyā, ekasmiṃ kalāpe uṇhabhāvena saddhiṃ upalabbheyya, na ca upalabbhati. Tasmā viññāyati na āpodhātu sītatāti . Idañca bhūtānaṃ avinibbhogavuttitaṃ icchantānaṃ uttaraṃ, anicchantānampi pana catunnaṃ bhūtānaṃ ekasmiṃ kalāpe kiccadassanena sabhāgavuttitāya sādhitāya uttarameva. Ye pana ‘‘vāyodhātuyā lakkhaṇaṃ sītatā’’ti vadanti, tesampi idameva uttaraṃ. Yadi hi vāyodhātu sītatā siyā, ekasmiṃ kalāpe uṇhabhāvena saddhiṃ sītatā upalabbheyya, na ca upalabbhati. Tasmā viññāyati na vāyodhātu sītatāti. Yesaṃ pana dravatā āpodhātu, sā ca phusitvā gayhatīti dassanaṃ. Te vattabbā ‘‘dravabhāvopi phusīyatīti āyasmantānaṃ adhimānamattaṃ saṇṭhānaṃ viyā’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ purātanehi –
与流动性俱生的三大,接触时……
此世间如是计度:我触到湿性。
“ 就像心能抓取所触到的种种事物和形状一样,
应了知:以‘我直接接触到’的方式,流动性也是如此。”巴利
‘‘Dravatā sahavuttīni, tīṇi bhūtāni samphusaṃ; ‘Dravataṃ samphusāmī’ti, lokoyamabhimaññati. ‘‘Phusaṃ bhūtāni saṇṭhānaṃ, manasā gaṇhate yathā; ‘Paccakkhato phusāmī’ti, ñātabbā dravatā tathā’’ti.
“其余”是指:除去前面所说的色等七种色之后,剩下那二十一种色。“唯识”就是唯意识。通过这个限定,说明色处等也能被意识认知,并没有一定规则,所以并不是“被识知的色”,这就显示出没有混杂。巴利
Sesanti yathāvuttaṃ rūpādisattavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ṭhapetvā avasiṭṭhaṃ ekavīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ. Viññāṇassevāti manoviññāṇasseva. Avadhāraṇena rūpāyatanādīnampi manoviññāṇaviññeyyatte niyamābhāvato na viññātarūpatāti saṅkarābhāvaṃ dasseti.
在这里,已经生成的色叫作“色色”。也就是说,在二十八种色里面,被称为“已生成”的那个色,正因为它具有色的特征,所以就是色。会变坏的就是色,这个色有“变坏”这件事,就像说“有痔疮的”一样;或者也可以按色的属性来说,就像因为具有蓝色的属性而说“蓝布”一样。这个“色”字按照惯用法,也可以用在并非以变坏为自身本质的东西上,所以为了区分,就用另一个“色”字来限定,说成“色色”,就像“芝麻油”“苦苦”那样。意思是:以变坏为本质的就是色。如果这样的话,虚空界等又怎么算是色呢?因为它们是已生成色的区划、变化和特相,所以就随顺那一类而被称为色。巴利
Nipphannarūpaṃ panettha rūparūpaṃ nāmāti yadettha aṭṭhavīsatividhe rūpe ‘‘nipphanna’’nti vuttaṃ rūpaṃ, tadeva rūpalakkhaṇayogato rūpaṃ. Ruppanaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ etassa atthīti yathā arisasoti, rūpaguṇayogato vā yathā nīlaguṇayogato nīlaṃ vatthanti. Svāyaṃ rūpasaddo ruḷhiyā ataṃsabhāvepi pavattatīti aparena rūpasaddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘rūparūpa’’nti yathā tilatelaṃ, dukkhadukkhanti (visuddhi. 2.539) ca, ruppanasabhāvaṃ rūpanti attho. Yadi evaṃ, ākāsadhātuādīnaṃ kathaṃ rūpabhāvoti? Nipphannarūpassa paricchedavikāralakkhaṇabhāvato taggatikamevāti ‘‘rūpa’’ntveva vuccati.
心与心所在这里生起、活动,所以称为“所依处”,也就是与心及其相应法有关的、作为它们依托的色法。这种色法共有六种。其中,心所依处的色法只是所依处,因为它是意界和意识界的依靠处,不是门;不像眼等那样,是有其他所依之法生起的门。正如眼等是领受等心识活动的门,心所依处并不是这样。因此说:“这里所说的心所依处色,是所依处,不是门。”两种表色是门,因为它们是业门;由于没有依它们而生起的心,所以不是所依处。净色既是所依处——对于依它而起的眼识等来说;也是门——对于依其他法而起的领受等来说。其余二十一种色,按照与上述相反的道理,既不是所依处,也不是门。巴利
Vasanti ettha cittacetasikā pavattantīti vatthu, cittataṃsampayuttānaṃ ādhārabhūtaṃ rūpaṃ. Taṃ pana chabbidhaṃ. Tattha hadayarūpaṃ vatthu eva manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ nissayabhāvato. Na dvāraṃ aññanissayānaṃ cakkhādi viya. Yathā hi cakkhādīni sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ pavattiyā dvāraṃ honti, na evaṃ hadayavatthu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ panettha hadayarūpaṃ nāma, taṃ vatthu, na dvāra’’nti. Viññattidvayaṃ dvāraṃ kammadvārabhāvato. Tannissitassa cittuppādassa abhāvato na vatthu. Pasādarūpaṃ vatthu ceva attasannissitassa cakkhuviññāṇādikassa, dvārañca aññanissitassa sampaṭicchanādikassa. Sesaṃ ekavīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ vuttavipariyāyato neva vatthu na ca dvāraṃ.
450 从同一个缘生起的,叫一因生。难道从同一个缘生起的所生法的生起不存在吗?确实不存在。这里的意思是,在能生色的诸缘中,从单一缘而生。因为色的生起并不依赖能生色的缘以外的其他缘。二因生等也是同样的道理。所谓“这些”,是就这些分类来说的。“唯业生”,就是单从业而生。“唯心生”,这里也同样理解。“从心与时而生”,就是有时从心生,有时从时节生;应当理解为如此从心与时而生。那是二因生,由两个因所生。其余的二因生也是同样的道理。“唯声处”,在这里,有些论师说,心生的声处唯是有表色。古师则说,也有非表色的寻所振动之声。巴利
450. Ekato eva jātaṃ ekajaṃ. Nanu ca ekato eva paccayato paccayuppannassa uppatti natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, rūpajanakapaccayesu ekatoti ayamettha adhippāyo. Na hi rūpuppatti rūpajanakato aññaṃ paccayaṃ apekkhati. Dvijantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Imesanti imesaṃ pabhedānaṃ vasena. Kammajamevāti kammato eva jātaṃ. Cittajamevāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Cittato ca ututo ca jātanti kālena cittato, kālena ututoti evaṃ cittato ca ututo ca jātaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃ dvijaṃ dvīhi jātanti. Parato dvīsupi eseva nayo. Saddāyatanamevāti ettha yaṃ cittajaṃ saddāyatanaṃ, taṃ saviññattikamevāti eke. Aviññattikopi atthi vitakkavipphārasaddoti porāṇā.
寻的振动之声不是耳识所能认知的,所以依据大注疏的这一主张,应当承认心所生之声即使没有表也能生起。因为按照“身表、语表”的说法,表并不与非耳识所认知的声音一同生起;如果真是那样,就必须有心所生的声九法聚了。而结集者认为“既有声音,又不是耳识所能认知”本身就是矛盾的,所以否定了这个主张。但另一些人并不否定大注疏的说法,而是解释它的意趣。怎么解释呢?经中说“舌、腭等的运动等由寻所生的、与表俱生的微细声音,以天耳听闻后而宣说”,而在《发趣论》中,是就粗声来说耳识的所缘缘条件;根据这个意趣,才说寻的振动之声不是耳识所能认知的。这是四因生。其余,是指与不可分离色共存的虚空界。巴利
Vitakkavipphārasaddo na sotaviññeyyoti hi evaṃ pavattamahāaṭṭhakathāvādaṃ nissāya cittasamuṭṭhānassa saddassa viññattiyā vināpi uppatti icchitabbā. Na hi viññatti ‘‘kāyavācāya viññattī’’ti vacanato asotaviññeyyena saddena saha uppajjati, evaṃ sante cittajenāpi saddanavakena bhavitabbaṃ. So ca vādo ‘‘saddo ca hoti, na sotaviññeyyo cā’’ti viruddhamevetanti maññamānehi saṅgahakārehi paṭikkhitto. Apare pana mahāaṭṭhakathāvādaṃ appaṭikkhipitvā tassa adhippāyaṃ vaṇṇenti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Jivhātālucalanādikaṃ vitakkasamuṭṭhitaṃ viññattisahajameva sukhumasaddaṃ dibbasotena sutvā ādisatī’’ti sutte, paṭṭhāne ca oḷārikaṃ saddaṃ sandhāya sotaviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvo vuttoti iminā adhippāyena vitakkavipphārasaddassa asotaviññeyyatā vuttāti. Taṃ catujaṃ. Avasesanti avinibbhogarūpena saddhiṃ ākāsadhātumāha.
相色并不是从任何处生起的,即不是从任何因缘生起的,也不是自己单独生起的,因为离开因缘而自己单独生起的东西,是完全没有的。那么,怎么理解“相色不生起”呢?因为它没有相。具有生起的事物,比如色处等,有生等相;但生等本身并不是这样。因此应当知道,生等并不生起。也许有人会提出:“生等有生等相。”不是的,为什么呢?因为如果那样,就会陷入无穷无尽的过失。如果生等具有生等相,那么那些生等又具有生等相,那些生等又具有生等相,这样就会无穷无尽。因此说得好:“生等不生起。”因此(原书)说:“生起之生起不存在,已经生起的另外两者仅仅是成熟与坏灭”,意思就是老与死。巴利
Lakkhaṇarūpaṃpana nakutocijātanti kutocipi paccayato na jātaṃ, nāpi sayameva jātaṃ paccayehi vinā sayameva jātassa sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvato. Kathaṃ panetaṃ viññātabbaṃ lakkhaṇarūpaṃ na jāyatīti? Lakkhaṇābhāvato. Uppattimantānaṃ hi rūpāyatanādīnaṃ jātiādīni lakkhaṇāni vijjanti, na evaṃ jātiādīnaṃ. Tasmā viññātabbametaṃ jātiādīni na jāyantīti. Siyā panetaṃ ‘‘jātiādīnaṃ jātiādīni lakkhaṇāni vijjantī’’ti? Taṃ na, kasmā? Tathā sati anavaṭṭhānāpattito. Yadi hi jātiādīni jātiādimantāni siyuṃ, tānipi jātiādimantāni, tānipi jātiādimantānīti anavaṭṭhānameva āpajjati. Tasmā suṭṭhu vuttaṃ ‘‘jātiādīni na jāyantī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘na hi uppādassa uppādo atthi, uppannassa ca paripākabhedamattaṃ itaradvaya’’nti, jarāmaraṇanti attho.
这里,“生起不存在”这句话,是用来说明生起没有老死。如果生起都不存在,老死又从哪儿来呢?用“仅仅”这个词,同时也说明了老死没有生起。如果真是这样,那么“生从某种因缘而生”这种说法又是怎么回事呢?于是回答说“以及此”等等。其中,所谓“在作用效力的刹那被认知”,意思是:那些心等法是色处等色法的生起因缘,它们产生那些色法,功用尚未止息。当这个可被认知为因缘状态的作用效力之刹那到来时,色处等法正在生起,被认知为变化状态。正是针对这一点,出于随应所化众生根性的考虑,经中允许说“生从某种因缘而生”,就像说心等是生起因等、表色等是心生等一样。这里的简要含义是:那些色法等从某些因缘法生起;当那些因缘法进入因缘状态的那个刹那,所认知的色法等,在此之前和之后都未被认知,因此被理解为从那里生起。同样,生也应该这样理解。如果这样的话,从了义上说,生从某处生起的道理就已经成立了,那为什么还要说是“随应所化众生的根性”呢?并非如此,因为生是作为正在生起的法的变化状态而被认知的。如果生能像法一样被直接认知,那么它从某处生起的道理就是了义的;但它并非如此被认知,而是作为变化状态被认知。因此才说“随应所化众生的根性”。巴利
Tattha ‘‘uppādo natthī’’ti etena uppādassa jarāmaraṇābhāvamāha. Asati uppāde kuto jarāmaraṇanti mattaggahaṇena jarāmaraṇassa uppādābhāvampi. Yadi evaṃ jātiyā kutoci jātatāvacanaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘yampī’’tiādi. Tattha kiccānubhāvakkhaṇe diṭṭhattāti ye te cittādayo rūpāyatanādīnaṃ rūpānaṃ janakapaccayā, tesaṃ taduppādanaṃ pati anuparatabyāpārānaṃ yo so paccayabhāvūpalakkhaṇīyo kiccānubhāvakkhaṇo, tadā jāyamānānaṃ rūpāyatanādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ vikārabhāvena upalabbhamānataṃ sandhāya veneyyapuggalavasena jātiyā kutoci paccayato jātattaṃ pāḷiyaṃ anuññātaṃ yathā taṃ cittasamuṭṭhānatādi viññattiādīnaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – yehi paccayadhammehi rūpādayo uppajjeyyuṃ, tesaṃ paccayabhāvūpagamanakkhaṇe upalabbhamānā rūpādayo tato pure, pacchā ca anupalabbhamānā tato uppajjantīti viññāyanti, evaṃ jātipi veditabbā. Yadi evaṃ nippariyāyato jātiyā kutoci jātatā siddhā, atha kasmā veneyyapuggalavasenāti vuttanti? Nayidamevaṃ jāyamānadhammavikārabhāvena upalabbhamānattā. Yadi hi dhammo viya upalabbheyya jāti, nippariyāyova tassā kutoci jātabhāvo, na evamupalabbhati, atha kho vikārabhāvena. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘veneyyapuggalavasenā’’ti.
据说,当时听众心里生起了这样的想法:“这个生是一切法的来源,而它自己不从任何地方生起,就像自性论者所说的自性那样。”为了破除他们这种错误的执取,导师把生分成“积集”和“相续”两种加以剖析,并说明它也是从某种因缘而生的;但他没有同样说老死也从因缘而生,因为在因缘法发挥作用的那一刹那,老死并不可见。如果是这样,那么经中为什么说“老死是缘所生的”呢?因为缘所生法有成熟与坏灭,所以当这些法存在时,老死才存在,它们不存在时便不存在。未生起的东西不会成熟,也不会坏灭。因此,经中是就“以生为缘”这一点,才方便说“老死是缘所生的”。至于在欲有等当中,由业等因缘,随胎门不同,在结生时和转起时,色法生起的种种差别应当如何说明,将在后面的缘起论中显现,所以这里没有说,应当这样理解。巴利
Tadā kira sotūnaṃ evaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ jāti sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ pabhavo, sayañca na kutoci jāyati yathā taṃ pakativādīnaṃ pakatī’’ti, taṃ nesaṃ micchāgāhaṃ vidhamento satthā ‘‘upacayo santatī’’ti dvidhā bhinditvā kutoci paccayato jātañca katvā desesi, na pana jarāmaraṇaṃ paccayadhammānaṃ kiccānubhāvakkhaṇe adassanato. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ paṭiccasamuppanna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) vuttaṃ? Yasmā paṭiccasamuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ paripākabhaṅgatāya tesu santesu honti, na asantesu. Na hi ajātaṃ paripaccati, bhijjati vā, tasmā taṃ jātipaccayataṃ sandhāya ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ paṭiccasamuppanna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) pariyāyena suttesu vuttaṃ. Yo panettha kāmabhavādīsu kammādinā paccayena yonivibhāgato paṭisandhiyaṃ, pavattiyañca rūpadhammānaṃ pavattibhedo vattabbo, so parato paṭiccasamuppādakathāyaṃ āvi bhavissatīti na vuttoti daṭṭhabbo.
识蕴论的注释巴利
Viññāṇakkhandhakathāvaṇṇanā
451 “任何”这个词,是通过“无余遍取”这一对词来显示所感受之物的多种多样,从而点出所说“蕴”的含义。感受以领纳所缘的滋味为特相,所以叫“以受为相”。意思是说,那一切都是法类;或者应像前面讲色蕴时所说的那样,从主要方面引过来连接理解。“合为一”是指:把过去等种种差别的一切,用智慧合在一起。这样,“蕴”的含义才能成立。对青等种种不同的所缘加以认知,以及通过“青、黄、长、短”等想生起的方式去了知、执取,以这个为特相,就是“以想为相”。造作、积集、起作用或连结;这两种情况都因为以思为主导,所以说行蕴“以造作为相”。正如在经分别中,世尊分别行蕴时,用“眼触所生思”等话所分别的正是思。“以识知为相”是说:就像有人用斗量东西,以具有认知方式的特殊行相执取所缘,这就是所谓“获得所缘”的识,以此为特相。其余的受蕴等则容易了知,因为它们与识同生起等,以及同种类等分别的缘故。巴利
451.Yaṃkiñcīti anavasesapariyādānadīpakena padadvayena vedayitassa bahubhedataṃ dassento vuccamānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ ulliṅgeti. Vedayitaṃ ārammaṇarasānubhavanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Sabbaṃ taṃ dhammajātanti adhippāyo, pubbe vā rūpakkhandhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ adhikārato ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Ekato katvāti atītādibhedabhinnaṃ sabbaṃ taṃ buddhiyā ekato katvā. Evañhi rāsaṭṭhassa sambhavo. Nīlādibhedassa ārammaṇassa sañjānanaṃ, ‘‘nīlaṃ pītaṃ dīghaṃ rassa’’nti (dha. sa. 615) ca ādinā saññuppādavasena jānanaṃ gahaṇaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ āyūhanaṃ byāpārāpatti, abhisandahanaṃ vā, ubhayathāpi cetanāpadhānatāya saṅkhārakkhandhassa evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇa’’nti. Tathā hi suttantabhājanīye saṅkhārakkhandhaṃ vibhajantena bhagavatā ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 21) cetanāva vibhattā. Minitabbavatthuṃ nāḷiyā minamāno puriso viya yena sañjānanākāravisiṭṭhena ākārena visayaṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ ārammaṇūpaladdhisaṅkhātaṃ vijānanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Itare vedanākkhandhādayo suviññeyyā hontīti viññāṇena ekuppādādibhāvato, samānajātiādivibhāgato ca.
为了用经文证明自己所说的“以识知为相”这个意思,所以说了“任何”等话。为了说明这只是随因缘而发生的运作,也就是所谓的自性法,所以依“状态成就”的方式说了“以识知为相”。为了说明并没有脱离法之自性的某个作者,为了显示彼本身的作者性,所以说了“识知”。以识知之义为识,以思惟等义为心,以思量义为意,也通过不同的说法让人了解它。到这里为止,识已经从蕴、差别、异门三个方面得到了阐明。巴利
Attanā ‘‘vijānanalakkhaṇa’’nti vuttamatthaṃ suttena samatthetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathāpaccayaṃ pavattimattametaṃ, yadidaṃ sabhāvadhammoti dassetuṃ ‘‘vijānanalakkhaṇa’’nti bhāvasādhanavasena vuttaṃ. Dhammasabhāvā vinimutto koci kattā nāma natthīti tasseva kattubhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vijānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇaṃ, tadeva cintanādiatthena cittaṃ, mananaṭṭhena manoti pariyāyatopi naṃ bodheti. Ettāvatā ca khandhato, bhedato, pariyāyato ca viññāṇaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hoti.
在这里,即使是不相似的事物,也会以相似的形态生起,所以叫“生”,也就是同类形态。不过,这个“生”虽然确实有多种多样、种种不同的形态,但为了显示这里所指的,就说了“善、不善及无记”。其中,就善的意义而言是善。什么是善的意义呢?就是无病的意思、无过失的意思、乐报的意思。以无病的意思,善也出现在“您是否安康?”这类说法中。以无过失的意思,则如“尊者,什么是善的身业?大王,就是无过失的身业”这类说法。以乐报的意思,则如“诸比丘,以受持善法为因”这类说法。因为善心能对治贪等心病,对治有过失的自性,并且能感得乐报,所以是无病、无过失、乐报。巴利
Jāyanti ettha visadisāpi sadisākārāti jāti, samānākāro. Sā panāyaṃ jāti kāmaṃ anekavidhā nānappakārā, taṃ idhādhippetameva pana dassento ‘‘kusalaṃ, akusalaṃ, abyākatañcā’’ti āha. Tattha kusalaṭṭhena kusalaṃ. Koyaṃ kusalaṭṭho nāma? Ārogyaṭṭho anavajjaṭṭho sukhavipākaṭṭho. Ārogyaṭṭhenāpi hi kusalaṃ vuccati ‘‘kacci nu bhoto kusala’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.146; 2.20.129). Anavajjaṭṭhenāpi ‘‘katamo pana, bhante, kusalo kāyasamācāro? Yo kho, mahārāja , anavajjo kāyasamācāro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.361). Sukhavipākaṭṭhenāpi ‘‘kusalānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ samādānahetū’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.80). Kusalacittañhi rāgādīnaṃ cetasikarogānaṃ avajjasabhāvānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato, sukhavipākavipaccanato ca arogaṃ, anavajjaṃ, sukhavipākañcāti.
从词义上说,善能动摇、搅动、使运作、摧毁那些可鄙的恶法,所以叫善。或者,以可鄙的方式而存在的是“kusā”,即可鄙的恶法;善能割断、斩断这些“kusā”,所以叫善。或者,能削弱、减薄可鄙之法的智叫做“kusa”;依此智而应获得、应把握、应令生起,所以叫善。又或者,就像吉祥草能割断伸入两边的手足部位一样,这善法也能割断已生起和未生起两方面的杂染,因此就像吉祥草一样割断,所以叫善。或者,因为能动摇、能制止可鄙的有过恶法,所以叫善。因为依靠善法,不善法被阻止现行、被令不再生起,于是在意等六门中被制止、被封闭而不再现行。或者,善能动摇、震动、去除可鄙的恶法。又或者,因为磨砺、锐化可鄙的杀生等恶法,所以贪嗔等叫“kusā”;由于贪嗔等使思心所变得锐利,杀生等才成为大过恶,善能割断、斩断这些“kusā”,所以叫善。或者,因为终结、破坏可鄙之法,依福德行而生的信等诸根叫“kusāni”;依这些诸根而应获得、应令生起,所以叫善。又或者,“ku”指地;由于作为依止处,对自身所依的色法与无色法相续,在现在和未来以燃烧而破坏,所以贪等叫“kusā”;善就像割断、斩断自身依止处一样,所以叫善。因为由加行所成就的善法,确实以令色法、无色法不现行而将它们彻底断除。巴利
Saddatthato pana kucchite pāpadhamme salayati calayati kammeti viddhaṃsetīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitena vā ākārena sayantīti kusā, pāpadhammā, te kuse lunāti chindatīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sānato tanukaraṇato ñāṇaṃ kusaṃ nāma, tena lātabbaṃ gahetabbaṃ pavattetabbanti kusalaṃ. Yathā vā kuso ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthapadesaṃ lunāti, evamidaṃ uppannānuppannavasena ubhayabhāgagataṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ lunāti chindati, tasmā kuso viya lunātīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sāvajjadhammānaṃ salanato saṃvaraṇato kusalaṃ. Kusaladhammavasena hi akusalā pavattinivāraṇena, appavattibhāvāpādanena ca manacchaṭṭhesu dvāresu appavattiyā saṃvutā pihitā honti. Kucchite vā pāpadhamme salayati kampeti apanetīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā pāṇātipātādīnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ sānato nisānato tejanato kusā, dosalobhādayo. Dosādīnañhi vasena cetanāya tikkhabhāvappattiyā pāṇātipātādīnaṃ mahāsāvajjatā, te kuse lunāti chindatīti kusalaṃ. Kucchitānaṃ vā sānato antakaraṇato vināsanato kusāni, puññakiriyavasena pavattāni saddhādīni indriyāni, tehi lātabbaṃ pavattetabbanti kusalaṃ. ‘‘Ku’’ iti vā bhūmi vuccati, adhiṭṭhānabhāvena taṃsadisassa attano nissayabhūtassa rūpārūpappabandhassa sampati, āyatiñca anudahanena vināsanato kuṃ siyantīti kusā, rāgādayo, te viya attano nissayassa lavanato chindanato kusalaṃ. Payogasampāditā hi kusaladhammā accantameva rūpārūpadhamme appavattikaraṇena samucchindantīti.
不是善,就是不善,意思是善的对立面。因为当通过否定善来解说“不善”这个词、按词素拆开来讲它的含义时,就显示出这样的意思:凡是那一类法,不是无病的、不是无可指责的、不是乐报的、也不是从善巧中生起的,那就是不善。同样,凡不是可鄙恶法那种动摇的本性、不是“恶法”(kusā)那种割断的本性、不应由智或由诸根令其生起、也不像吉祥草那样割断,那也叫作不善——这个意思也显示出来了。在这里,因为善是不善的直接对立面,又因为能对治心所的病等,所以也从无病等角度被说明;因此说不善是善的直接对立面,所以说“意思是善的对立面”。不过应当知道,这两者各自是依次以能断者和所断者的状态存在的。巴利
Na kusalanti akusalaṃ, kusalapaṭipakkhanti attho. Na kusalanti hi kusalapaṭikkhepena akusalapadassa avayavabhedena atthe vuccamāne yathā yaṃ dhammajātaṃ na arogaṃ, na anavajjaṃ, na sukhavipākaṃ, na ca kosallasambhūtaṃ, taṃ akusalanti ayamattho dassito hoti, evaṃ yaṃ na kucchitānaṃ salanasabhāvaṃ, na kusānaṃ lavanasabhāvaṃ, na kusena kusehi vā pavattetabbaṃ, na ca kuso viya lavanakaṃ, taṃ akusalaṃ nāmāti ayampi attho dassito hoti. Ettha ca yasmā kusalaṃ akusalassa ujuvipaccanīkabhūtaṃ, yato cetasikarogapaṭipakkhādibhāvato arogādipariyāyenapi bodhitaṃ, tasmā akusalaṃ pana kusalassa ujuvipaccanīkabhūtanti vuttaṃ ‘‘kusalapaṭipakkhanti attho’’ti. Taṃ pana yathākkamaṃ pahāyakapahātabbabhāvenevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
无记,就是“没有被记说”,意思是不以善或不善的性质来说明。这里,善的性质指的是没有过失、带来快乐果报;不善的性质指的是有过失、带来痛苦果报;无记则不被说成是这两种性质中的任何一种。正是由于这一点,也应该看到,无记被描述为不以无病、有病等性质来说明。在这里,因为先说了“善、不善”,然后再说“无记”,所以可以知道,无记只是不以善和不善的性质来说明,而不是以别的什么方式来说明。而且,这里的“不被记说”并不是仅仅因为不应那样说,而是因为那些法本身就具有脱离这两种性质的自性,应该这样理解。因此,这也被称为“无报相”。巴利
Na byākatanti abyākataṃ, kusalākusalabhāvena akathitanti attho. Tattha kusalabhāvo anavajjasukhavipākaṭṭho. Akusalabhāvo sāvajjadukkhavipākaṭṭho, tadubhayabhāvena avuttanti vuttaṃ hoti. Eteneva arogasarogādibhāvena ca avuttatā vaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbā. Ettha ca ‘‘kusalaṃ akusala’’nti ca vatvā ‘‘abyākata’’nti vuttattā kusalākusalabhāveneva avuttatā viññāyati, na pakārantarena. Avuttatā cettha na tathā avattabbatāmattena, atha kho tadubhayavinimuttasabhāvatāya tesaṃ dhammānanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hetaṃ ‘‘avipākalakkhaṇa’’nti vuccati.
452 452. 从地的差别来说:诸法在那里存在,所以叫地,也就是处所和状态。状态也被当作具有状态者的生起之处来理解,这样它们就容易把握了。其中,世间的地只应按处所来理解,出世间的地则按状态来理解。或者,世间的地按处所和状态来理解,出世间的地只按状态来理解。欲界:这里有两种欲,即事物之欲和烦恼之欲。其中,事物之欲特别指五种欲乐对象,因为它们是所欲求的;烦恼之欲就是渴爱,因为它欲求。这两者结合在一起,在其中活动和运作的,就是欲界。那是什么呢?就是十一种欲有。大多数情况下,这些法在那里活动和生起,所以省略了一个“行境”的词,称为欲界。同样,色界和无色界也应如此理解:以对色的渴爱为色,以对无色的渴爱为无色。或者,欲渴爱通过省略后分而称为欲,在其中活动故为行境,欲的行境就是欲界。同样,色界和无色界也应如此理解。出世间:超越世间,所以叫出世间,这是就善法而言。另一种则是已从世间超出,所以叫出世间。巴利
452.Bhūmibhedatoti bhavanti ettha dhammāti bhūmi, ṭhānaṃ, avatthā ca. Avatthāpi hi avatthāvantānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānaṃ viya gayhati, evaṃ nesaṃ sukhaggahaṇaṃ hotīti . Tattha lokiyā bhūmi ṭhānavaseneva veditabbā, lokuttarā avatthāvasena. Lokiyā vā ṭhānāvatthāvasena, lokuttarā avatthāvaseneva. Kāmāvacaranti ettha vatthukāmo kilesakāmoti dve kāmā. Tesu vatthukāmo visesato pañca kāmaguṇā kāmīyantīti, kilesakāmo taṇhā kāmetīti. Te dvepi sahitā hutvā yattha avacaranti, taṃ kāmāvacaraṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Ekādasavidho kāmabhavo. Idaṃ yebhuyyena tattha avacarati pavattatīti kāmāvacaraṃ ekassa avacarasaddassa lopaṃ katvā. Evaṃ rūpārūpāvacarānipi veditabbāni rūpataṇhā rūpaṃ, arūpataṇhā arūpanti katvā. Atha vā kāmataṇhā kāmo uttarapadalopena, avacarati etthāti avacaraṃ, kāmassa avacaraṃ kāmāvacaraṃ. Evaṃ rūpāvacarārūpāvacarānipi veditabbāni. Lokato uttaratīti lokuttaraṃ kusalassa adhippetattā. Itaraṃ pana lokato uttiṇṇanti lokuttaraṃ.
关于“喜、舍、智、行的差别”这句话,其中喜和舍的差别先成立,因为它们的本质不同。但智和行的差别又怎么讲呢?这并没有问题,因为“智行差别”是指由智和行造成的差别,这是根据它们的有无来说的。善心:心是美好的,或者这颗心是美好的。善心的状态就是“喜”,按照惯用法,指的是意门乐受。从喜生起直到坏灭,与它一起运作、混杂、相应,就是“喜俱”的意思。而喜俱的性质应该根据所缘来理解。对于可意的所缘,心就是喜俱的。难道可意所缘不是贪的依处吗?那在这种情况下怎么还能是善的呢?这并非绝对,因为即使在可意所缘上,也能通过如理作意等而生起善。对于因为四成就轮等因缘而如理作意的人,他的心已经决定“我只应该行善”,并且已经从不善的生起中脱离出来,转向行善,又通过反复修习而成为习惯,那么即使面对可意所缘,他的心也是与无贪等相应的,而不是与贪等相应。巴利
Somanassupekkhāñāṇasaṅkhārabhedatoti ettha somanassupekkhābhedo tāva yutto tesaṃ bhinnasabhāvattā, ñāṇasaṅkhārabhedo pana kathanti? Nāyaṃ doso ñāṇasaṅkhārakato bhedoñāṇasaṅkhārabhedo, so ca tesaṃ bhāvābhāvakatoti katvā. Sobhanaṃ mano, sundaraṃ vā mano etassāti sumano, sumanassa bhāvo somanassaṃ, mānasikasukhā vedanā ruḷhiyā, somanassena uppādato paṭṭhāya yāva bhaṅgā sahagataṃ pavattaṃ saṃsaṭṭhaṃ, sampayuttanti attho. Somanassasahagatatā cassa ārammaṇavasena veditabbā. Iṭṭhārammaṇe hi cittaṃ somanassasahagataṃ hoti. Nanu ca iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ lobhassa vatthu, kathaṃ tattha kusalaṃ hotīti? Nayidamekantikaṃ iṭṭhepi ābhogādivasena kusalassa uppajjanato. Yassa hi catusampatticakkasamāyogādivasena yonisova ābhogo hoti, kusalameva ca mayā kattabbanti kusalakaraṇe cittaṃ niyamitaṃ, akusalappavattito ca nivattetvā kusalakaraṇe eva pariṇāmitaṃ, abhiṇhakaraṇavasena ca samudācaritaṃ, tassa iṭṭhepi ārammaṇe alobhādisampayuttameva cittaṃ hoti, na lobhādisampayuttaṃ.
以智平等地结合于种种方式,就是与智相应。这里应当知道,俱生等就是那些方式。其中,业、投生、根成熟、烦恼远离,是与智相应的原因。如果有人为他人说法,教他们无过失的工巧处、业处、明处等,做这类导向智慧的事,那么依靠他的业习,善心生起时就与智相应。同样,投生在无瞋世间的人,依靠他的投生,善心也与智相应。经上确实这样说:“在那里,快乐的他对法句通达无碍;比丘们,他的忆念生起得慢,但那个众生很快就获得殊胜。”同样,达到慧十法的人,依靠根成熟,善心生起时就与智相应。而烦恼已被镇伏的人,依靠烦恼远离,善心也与智相应。经上也说:“由修行而生慧,不修行则慧灭。”由自己或他人的鼓励所生起的心的作用,叫做“行”;没有这个行的,就是“无行”。与那个行一起运作的,就是“有行”。与智分离、没有智的,就是“与智不相应”。这里应当知道,“不相应”就是智不存在、不运作。“舍”:平等地看待,即使正在感受,也以中立的状态对所缘保持平等看待。或者,不违逆苦乐地观察、体验,就是“舍”。或者,对可意和不可意的所缘,没有偏袒地、恰当地观察、体验,就是“舍”。与这个舍一起进行的,就是“舍俱”。其余一切都和前文所说的一样。巴利
Ñāṇena samaṃ pakārehi yuttanti ñāṇasampayuttaṃ. Ekuppādādayo eva cettha pakārāti veditabbā. Tattha kammūpapattiindriyaparipākakilesadūrībhāvā ñāṇasampayuttatāya kāraṇaṃ. Yo hi paresaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, anavajjāni sippāyatanakammāyatanavijjaṭṭhānāni sikkhāpetīti evamādikaṃ paññāsaṃvattaniyaṃ karoti, tassa kammūpanissayavasena kusalacittaṃ uppajjamānaṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ hoti. Tathā abyāpajje loke uppannassa upapattiṃ nissāya ñāṇasampayuttaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘tassa tattha sukhino dhammapadā plavanti, dandho, bhikkhave, satuppādo, atha kho so satto khippaṃyeva visesabhāgī (a. ni. 4.191) hotī’’ti. Tathā paññādasakapattassa indriyaparipākaṃ nissāya kusalaṃ uppajjamānaṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ hoti. Yena pana kilesā vikkhambhitā, tassa kilesadūrībhāvaṃ nissāya ñāṇasampayuttaṃ hoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘yogā ve jāyate bhūri, ayogā bhūrisaṅkhayo’’ti (dha. pa. 282). Attano vā parassa vā samussāhajanitaṃ cittapayogasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkharaṇaṃ saṅkhāro, so etassa natthīti asaṅkhāraṃ. Tena pana saha saṅkhārena pavattatīti sasaṅkhāraṃ. Ñāṇena vippayuttaṃ virahitanti ñāṇavippayuttaṃ. Vippayogoti cettha ñāṇassa abhāvo appavattiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Upekkhatīti upekkhā, vedayamānāpi ārammaṇaṃ ajjhupekkhati majjhattatākārasaṇṭhitattāti attho. Atha vā upetā sukhadukkhānaṃ aviruddhā ikkhā anubhavananti upekkhā. Atha vā iṭṭhe ca aniṭṭhe ca ārammaṇe pakkhapātābhāvena upapattito yuttito ikkhati anubhavatīti upekkhā, tāya sahagatanti upekkhāsahagataṃ. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
像这样开示了八种欲界善心之后,现在为了显示它们的转起方式,就开始解说“当……的时候”等文句。其中,“受者等成就”里的“等”字,包含处所、时间、善友等成就。“其他喜因”里的“其他”一词,包含信众多、见清净、能见行善的功德、以喜结生、以及十一种作为喜觉支基础之法等。“以始导转起”里的“始”字,不只是指“有布施”等九种正见事,还应当知道它也包含择法觉支基础法等。“先行”:就是令其为首。这是指俱生为首,就像“诸法以意为首”等所说的那样,因为这里指的是相应。“不退没”:不因为名声悭吝等而在福行中退没、退缩,以此显示慷慨等。“未被策励”:没有被任何人所策励。这是显示自发的福行。“由他人”则是显示由他人明显地策励。巴利
Evaṃ aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacittāni uddisitvā idāni tesaṃ pavattiākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yadā hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha paṭiggāhakādisampattinti ettha ādi-saddena desakālakalyāṇamittādisampattiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Aññaṃ vā somanassahetunti ettha aññaggahaṇena saddhābahulatā, visuddhadiṭṭhitā, kusalakiriyāya ānisaṃsadassāvitā, somanassapaṭisandhikatā, ekādasa pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyā dhammāti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Ādinayappavattanti ettha ādi-saddena na kevalaṃ ‘‘atthi yiṭṭha’’ntiādīnaṃ (ma. ni. 1.441; 2.95) navannaṃyeva sammādiṭṭhivatthūnaṃ gahaṇaṃ, atha kho dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyādīnampi saṅgaho veditabbo. Purakkhatvāti pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā. Tañca kho sahajātapubbaṅgamavasena ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 1-2) viya sampayogassa adhippetattā. Asaṃsīdantoti silokamacchariyādivasena puññakiriyāyaṃ saṃsīdaṃ saṅkocaṃ anāpajjanto, tena muttacāgatādiṃ dasseti. Anussāhitoti kenacipi na ussāhito. Sarasato hi puññapaṭipattidassanamidaṃ. Parehīti pana pākaṭussāhanadassanaṃ.
布施等:布施、持戒,一直到见正直业,这些就是布施等十种福业;或者说,布施等指的是由布施、持戒、修习所构成的,因为其余七种也包含在这里面。它们在自己相续中生起,能净化那个相续,能产生可敬的、有有的果报的,所以叫福。指具足福思的人。不舍:对施物有贪着、放不下。等字包含了在持戒等上不乐欲等情形。说彼即,是因为与喜俱等相似。相似的也可以叫彼即,比如那正是鹧鸪,那些正是药草。在这个义中:指对沉滞的心加以策励的作用。此:指行这个词。前加行:当福业中产生退缩时,从中脱离出来、以策励使心转起的作用。这里说前,是依这样转起的前行而成为行的缘故,并不是说那个行是前时的。说愚者,是为了显示有所施等正见之不生。说突然,是为了显示不退缩与无策励。意思是行福时没有喜。应当知道,因无喜因只是举例。因为以中舍为所缘、如是心行等也是舍俱的原因。巴利
Dānādīnīti dānaṃ sīlaṃ yāva diṭṭhijukammanti imāni dānādīni dasa puññāni, dānādīnīti vā dānasīlabhāvanāmayāni itaresampi sattannaṃ etthevantogadhattā. Yattha sayaṃ uppajjanti, taṃ santānaṃ punanti, pujjaṃ bhavaphalaṃ nibbattentīti vā puññāni. Assa puññacetanāsamaṅgino. Amuttacāgatā deyyadhamme sāpekkhacittatā. Ādi-saddena sīlasamādānādīsu anadhimuttatādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tadevāti somanassasahagatādinā sadisatāya vuttaṃ. Sadisampi hi ‘‘tadevā’’ti voharīyati yathā ‘‘sā eva tittirī, tāniyeva osadhānī’’ti. Imasmiñhi attheti līnassa cittassa ussāhanapayogasaṅkhāte atthe. Etanti ‘‘saṅkhāro’’ti etaṃ padaṃ. Pubbapayogassāti puññakiriyāyaṃ saṅkoce jāyamāne tato vivecetvā samussāhanavasena pavattassa cittapayogassa, pubbaggahaṇañcettha tathāpavattapubbābhisaṅkhāravasena so saṅkhāro hotīti katvā vuttaṃ, na tassa saṅkhārassa pubbakālikattā. ‘‘Atthi dinna’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.441; 2.95) nayappavattāya sammādiṭṭhiyā asambhavadassanatthaṃ bāla-ggahaṇaṃ. Saṃsīdanussāhanābhāvadassanatthaṃ sahasā-gahaṇaṃ. Somanassarahitā honti puññaṃ karontāti adhippāyo. Somanassahetūnaṃ abhāvaṃ āgammāti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Majjhattārammaṇatathārūpacetosaṅkhārādayopi hi upekkhāsahagatatāya kāraṇaṃ hontiyevāti.
“以上”等语是总结。应当知道,这八种欲界善心,无论取六种所缘中的哪一种——从色所缘直到法所缘——作为所缘,都在舍俱无因唯作意识界之后,通过身门等三门,以身业等方式生起。其中,与智相应的四种心,当它们产生三因结生时,就有十六种异熟心生起;当它们产生二因结生时,则除去三因的,有十二种生起。至于无因结生,三因心根本不产生无因结生;二因心在产生二因结生时,有十二种生起,在产生无因结生时,有八种生起。三因结生绝不会由二因心产生。所谓“八种生起”,这是就能产生结生的业来说的。然而,依其他业,根据“有因有分对无因有分以无间缘为缘”的说法,有因异熟心对于无因结生者确实也会生起。在这种情况下,应当知道,由强缘所生的是无行,由弱缘所生的是有行。至于那些依据传承主张异熟心有无行、有行的区别的人,按照他们的见解,应配为十二种和八种生起。如此,以三种方式给予果报的此心,成就欲界善趣的投生,以及善趣和恶趣中的财富圆满。因为即使对龙和金翅鸟等,所生起的与天界财富圆满相似的财富种类,也是欲界善心的果报。不善心确实没有可爱的果报。巴利
Evantiādi nigamanaṃ. Tayidaṃ aṭṭhavidhampi kāmāvacaraṃ kusalacittaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ yāva dhammārammaṇanti chasu ārammaṇesu yaṃ vā taṃ vā ālambitvā upekkhāsahagatāhetukakiriyāmanoviññāṇadhātānantaraṃ kāyadvārādīhi tīhi dvārehi kāyakammādivasena uppajjatīti veditabbaṃ. Tattha ñāṇasampayuttāni cattāri yadā tihetukapaṭisandhiṃ uppādenti, tadā soḷasa vipākacittāni phalanti. Yadā pana duhetukaṃ, tadā dvādasa tihetukavajjāni. Ahetukaṃ pana paṭisandhiṃ tihetukāni na uppādenteva, duhetukāni pana duhetukapaṭisandhidānakāle dvādasa, ahetukapaṭisandhiṃ dānakāle aṭṭha phalanti. Tihetukā pana paṭisandhi duhetukehi na hotiyeva. ‘‘Aṭṭha phalantī’’ti cetaṃ paṭisandhiṃ janakakammavasena vuttaṃ. Aññena pana kammunā ‘‘sahetukaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ ahetukassa bhavaṅgassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 3.1.102) vacanato sahetukampi vipākacittaṃ ahetukapaṭisandhikassa hotiyeva. Imasmiṃ ca pakkhe balavatā paccayena uppannaṃ asaṅkhāraṃ, dubbalena sasaṅkhāranti veditabbaṃ. Ye pana āgamanato ca vipākassa asaṅkhārasasaṅkhārabhāvaṃ icchanti, tesaṃ matena dvādasa, aṭṭha ca phalantīti yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ tidhā phalaṃ dadantañcetaṃ kāmāvacarasugatiyaṃ upapattiṃ, sugatiduggatīsu bhogasampadañca karoti. Nāgasupaṇṇādīnampi hi yaṃ devabhogasampattisadisaṃ bhogajātaṃ uppajjati, tampi kāmāvacarakusalasseva phalaṃ. Na hi akusalassa iṭṭhaṃ phalaṃ atthīti.
色界心这里的“pana”一词,是在点出差别。也就是说:欲界心只是暂时断除烦恼,色界心不是这样,它是镇伏断除。或者说,欲界心按受、智、行的差别分成八种,色界心不是这样,它是按另一种方式区分——这就是在点明下文将要说的差别。这个色界心应当理解为有依处、有漏、无盖。说“有依处”,就排除了无色界心;说“有漏”,就排除了初道心;说“无盖”,就排除了与嗔相应的两种心。某处有五禅支,某处有四禅支,某处有三禅支,某处有二禅支,某处另有二禅支——为了展开这样按禅支组合而成的五种差别,下文才开始说“所谓”等。其中应当说的内容,前面讲禅那的地方已经说过了。这个心只是修所成的,它按上面说的方式缘取地遍等所缘,在与之相应、与智相应的善心之后生起。不过,这个心按下劣等差别,依次成为梵众天等十六种梵天界的投生之因,应当这样理解。巴利
Rūpāvacaraṃ panāti pana-saddo visesatthajotako. Tena yathā kāmāvacaraṃ kilesānaṃ tadaṅgappahānamattakaraṃ, na evamidaṃ, idaṃ pana vikkhambhanappahānakaraṃ. Yathā vā taṃ vedanāñāṇasaṅkhārabhedato aṭṭhadhā bhijjati, na evamidaṃ, idaṃ pana tato aññathā vāti vakkhamānaṃ visesaṃ joteti. Taṃ panetaṃ savatthukaṃ, sāsavaṃ, vinīvaraṇañca rūpāvacaranti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Savatthukaṃ evā’’ti hi iminā arūpāvacaraṃ nivatteti, ‘‘sāsava’’nti iminā paṭhamamaggacittaṃ, ‘‘vinīvaraṇa’’nti iminā paṭighasahitadvayaṃ. Katthaci pañca jhānaṅgāni, katthaci cattāri, katthaci tīṇi, katthaci dve, katthaci aparāni dveti evaṃ jhānaṅgayogabhedato pañcavidhanti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘seyyathida’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā jhānakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 1.79 ādayo) vuttameva. Tayidaṃ bhāvanāmayameva hutvā vuttanayena pathavīkasiṇādikaṃ ālambitvā yathārahaṃ ñāṇasampayuttakusalānantaraṃ uppajjati, hīnādibhedabhinnaṃ panetaṃ yathākkamaṃ brahmapārisajjādīsu soḷasasupi brahmalokesu upapattinipphādakanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
通过超越色想等而证得的,是无色界的心。所谓“四种无色”,是指以舍和定为其特质的四种无色禅。这里属格形式是用在工具格的意义上。或者说,是依据无色法在所缘等方面与相应法的结合及结合方式的不同来说的。“以所说的方式”,是指在前面讲无色界时所说的方式。“第一”,是指第一种无色界善心。“第二、第三、第四”也是同样的道理。这些心都是修所成的,依次缘取破除遍相后的虚空、第一无色识、无所有、无所有处,在舍俱与智相应的善心之后生起,在四种无色梵天界中带来结生和转起的异熟果。这里其余该说的内容,前面已经说过了。出世间心是通过六种清净的次第而证得的。其中该说的内容,后面会讲到。“与四道相应”,是指与入流道乃至阿拉汉道这四种圣道相应。这四种心也都是修所成的,缘取涅槃,以空解脱、无相解脱、无愿解脱的名义生起,应当知道它们能阻止七有等各种有的投生。意思是:按不略不广的方式来说,共有二十一种。巴利
Rūpasaññāsamatikkamādinā samadhigantabbaṃ arūpāvacaraṃ. Catunnaṃ arūpānanti upekkhāsamādhisaṅkhātehi catūhi arūpajjhānehi. Karaṇe hi etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Arūpānaṃ vā yo ārammaṇādikato sampayuttadhammehi yogo yogabhedo, tassa vasena. Vuttappakārenāti heṭṭhā āruppakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 1.275 ādayo) vuttappakārena. Paṭhamanti paṭhamaṃ arūpāvacarakusalacittaṃ. Dutiyatatiyacatutthānīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tānimāni bhāvanāmayāneva hutvā yathānupubbaṃ kasiṇugghāṭimākāsaṃ, paṭhamāruppaviññāṇaṃ, natthibhāvaṃ, ākiñcaññāyatananti imāni ālambitvā upekkhāsahagatañāṇasampayuttakusalānantaraṃ uppajjitvā catūsu arūpībrahmalokesu paṭisandhipavattivipākadāyīni. Sesaṃ panettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Chavisuddhiparamparāya samadhigantabbaṃ lokuttaraṃ. Tattha vattabbaṃ parato āgamissati. Catumaggasampayogatoti sotāpattimaggo yāva arahattamaggoti imehi catūhi ariyamaggehi sampayogato. Catubbidhampi cetaṃ bhāvanāmayameva hutvā nibbānaṃ ālambitvā suññato vimokkho, animitto vimokkho, appaṇihito vimokkhoti nāmena uppajjati, sattabhavādibhavūpapattinivattakanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekavīsatividhaṃ hoti nātisaṅkhepavitthāranayenāti adhippāyo.
453 “唯是欲界”:在这里,其他部派认为色界和无色界也有不善,为了否定他们的看法,所以举出“欲界”一词。即使它生在广大地,并在那里的色界产生转起异熟,也决定只是欲界——这是为了显示这一点而加的限定。如果是这样,为什么说“唯是欲界”?理由前面已经说过了。怎么说的呢?“欲贪为欲,省略后词;在此处活动,所以是活动处;欲的活动处就是欲界。”这里说,作为欲贪之境界是“欲界性的理由”,正如作为色贪、无色贪之境界是“色界性、无色界性的理由”。这一点应当确定如此理解。否则,遍满的特征就不能成立。因为,如果按应被所缘的法来判定地的区别,那么没有所缘的法就无法被包含进去。如果按产生异熟来判定,那么不产生异熟的法也无法被包含进去。所以,对属于世间范围内的法,应当按所缘法来判定;而对不属于世间范围的法,则因为超越世间而是出世间,因为没有比它更高的而是无上,应当这样理解。巴利
453.Kāmāvacaramevāti ettha nikāyantariyā rūpārūpāvacarampi akusalaṃ icchantīti tesaṃ matinisedhanatthaṃ kāmāvacaraggahaṇaṃ. Mahaggatabhūmiyaṃ uppajjantampi tattha rūpadhātuyaṃ pavattivipākaṃ dentampi ekantena kāmāvacaramevāti dassanatthaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā kāmāvacaramevāti? Tattha kāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Kathaṃ vuttaṃ? ‘‘Kāmataṇhā kāmo uttarapadalopato, avacarati etthāti avacaraṃ, kāmassa avacaraṃ kāmāvacara’’nti. Ettha hi kāmataṇhāvisayatā ‘‘kāmāvacarabhāvassa kāraṇaṃ’’ vuttā yathā rūpārūpataṇhāvisayatā ‘‘rūpārūpāvacarabhāvassa’’. Ekaṃsena cetaṃ evaṃ icchitabbaṃ. Aññathā byāpilakkhaṇaṃ na siyā. Yadi hi ālambitabbadhammavasena bhūmivavatthānaṃ kareyya, evaṃ sati anārammaṇānaṃ saṅgaho na siyā. Atha vipākadānavasena, evampi avipākānaṃ saṅgaho na siyā. Tasmā ālambaṇadhammavasena pariyāpannānaṃ sā kātabbā, apariyāpannānaṃ pana lokato uttiṇṇatāya lokuttaratā, uttaritarābhāvato anuttaratā ca veditabbā.
所谓“被包含”,是指被具有限定作用的渴爱所划定而包含在内,也就是被执取的意思。那么这里难道不是在问:什么是欲渴爱?就是以欲界法为所缘的渴爱。那什么是欲界法?就是欲渴爱的对象。这样一来,岂不是有互相依赖的过失?其实不是这样。因为不能随便拿任何一种渴爱就把它当成欲渴爱,而是应该根据它倾向于无间地狱等十一种生存地这一点来理解:从同性质渴爱作为所缘这一角度,来标示欲界法。在《法集论》的“安置品”(《法集论》985等)中,“此处所系属”这句话,也应当理解为:是针对从无间地狱到他化自在天所限定的范围内,渴爱所缘的对象而说的。而这里的“生存地性”,也应当知道,就是渴爱对那个生存地的倾向。巴利
Pariyāpannāti ca paricchedakārikāya taṇhāya paricchijja āpannā, gahitāti attho. Nanu cettha kāmataṇhā katamā? Kāmāvacaradhammārammaṇā taṇhā, kāmāvacaradhammā katame? Kāmataṇhāvisayāti itaretarasannissayatādosoti? Nayidamevaṃ avīciādiekaādasokāsaninnatāya kañci taṇhaṃ kāmataṇhābhāvena gahetvā taṃsabhāvāya taṇhāya visayabhāvena kāmāvacaradhammānaṃ upalakkhitabbattā. Nikkhepakaṇḍepi (dha. sa. 985 ādayo) ‘‘etthāvacarā’’ti vacanaṃ avīciparanimmitaparicchinnokāsāya kāmataṇhāya visayabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Tadokāsatā ca taṇhāya tanninnatāya veditabbā.
从根本来说有三种,就是贪等三种不善根;依它们来说,与它们相应的心也有三种,这就是这里的含义。因为它们能令心稳固安住,所以就像根一样,称为根;贪是它的根,所以叫贪根。这是按不共的方式来命名的,就像说鼓声、麦芽一样。同样地,嗔是根,所以叫嗔根;只有痴是它的根,不是别的,所以叫痴根。巴利
Mūlato tividhanti tīṇi akusalamūlāni lobhādīni, tesaṃ vasena taṃsahitampi tividhanti attho. Tāni hi suppatiṭṭhitabhāvakāraṇattā mūlamivāti mūlāni, lobho mūlaṃ etassāti lobhamūlaṃ. Asādhāraṇena niddeso yathā bherisaddo, yavaṅkuroti. Tathā dosamūlaṃ. Moho eva mūlaṃ imassa, nāññanti mohamūlaṃ.
由于喜舍、邪见、行的差别:应当把“差别”这个词分别与喜舍的差别、邪见的差别、行的差别结合起来理解。这里应当说的内容,和前文所说的方法一样。“与邪见相应”:邪见本身就是邪见,就像说“粪所成”“尿所成”那样。或者,因为被颠倒执取,仅仅是邪见的去,其中并没有像那样以自性存在的可去之处,所以叫“邪见”。这个邪见因为执著“只有这是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”,所以只和贪一起生起,不和嗔一起生起。巴利
Somanassupekkhādiṭṭhigatasaṅkhārabhedatoti somanassupekkhābhedato diṭṭhigatabhedato saṅkhārabhedatoti paccekaṃ bhedasaddo yojetabbo. Yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Diṭṭhigatasampayuttanti diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ, muttagata’’nti (ma. ni. 2.119; a. ni. 9.11) yathā. Atha vā vipariyesaggāhatāya diṭṭhiyā gatameva, na ettha gantabbavatthu tathā sabhāvanti diṭṭhigataṃ. Tayidaṃ ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 202, 203, 427; 3.27-29) abhinivesabhāvato lobheneva saddhiṃ pavattati, na dosena.
“当……时”等,是为了显示贪根心生起的方式。“邪见”,指断见等邪见。因为被这种邪见颠倒心的众生认为“生命所及的范围就这么大,只到感官所能感知的领域为止”,于是否定他世,认为“诸欲中没有过患”,就以各种方式沉溺于诸欲之中。用“等”字,还收摄了这样的邪见:比如“这条路早就铺好了,是通往天界的路,有儿子的人沿着它走就没有忧愁。畜生看得见它,飞鸟也看得见它,所以它们甚至母子配对交合”——像这样把看见儿子的脸当作升天之路和解脱之路等等。巴利
Yadāhītiādi lobhamūlacittānaṃ pavattiākāradassanaṃ. Micchādiṭṭhinti ucchedadiṭṭhiādimicchādiṭṭhiṃ. Tāya hi vipallatthacittā sattā ‘‘etāvako jīvavisayo yāva indriyagocaro’’ti paralokaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘natthi kāmesu ādīnavo’’ti yathā tathā kāmesu pātabyataṃ āpajjanti. Ādi-saddena ‘‘esa pantho pageva vihito devayāne, yena yanti puttavanto visokā. Taṃ passanti pasavo, pakkhino ca, tena te mātaripi mithunaṃ carantī’’tiādinā nayena puttamukhadassanaṃ saggamokkhamaggoti evamādikaṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
在这里,“欲”中的“或”字表示不确定的意思。因此,婆罗门认为只有偷黄金才算犯不与取,其他不算犯;为了父母师长、牛、自己、性命和婚姻而说妄语不算犯,其他妄语算犯;为了父母师长等的利益而说离间语不算犯,其他离间语算犯;像《婆罗多大战》《掳走悉多》这类故事能平息恶行——诸如此类的邪执也被包括在内。“所见吉祥等”:就是所见、所闻、所觉的吉祥。“自性锐利”:是因为贪心或邪执的力量,本身就很锐利、凶狠。“迟钝”:就是缓慢、不锐利。但那样的心是由自己或别人激励才生起的,所以说“被激励的”。“或盗取他人财物”:通过“或”这个字,应当知道也包含了如此生起的妄语等。“或当诸欲正被享受时”:通过“或”字,包含了由于对他人所有物持有不如实意图而获得的,应当执取之物的执取之类。巴利
Kāmevāti ettha vā-saddo aniyamattho, tena brāhmaṇānaṃ suvaṇṇaharaṇameva adinnādāne sāvajjaṃ, itaraṃ anavajjaṃ. Garūnaṃ, gunnaṃ, attano, jīvitassa, vivāhassa ca atthāya musāvādo anavajjo, itaro sāvajjo. Garuādīnaṃ atthāya pesuññaharaṇaṃ anavajjaṃ, itaraṃ sāvajjaṃ. Bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādikathā pāpavūpasamāya hotīti evamādike micchāgāhe saṅgaṇhāti. Diṭṭhamaṅgalādīnīti diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalāni. Sabhāvatikkhenāti lobhassa, micchābhinivesassa vā vasena saraseneva tikhiṇena kurūrena. Mandenāti dandhena atikhiṇena. Tādisaṃ pana attano, parassa vā samussāhanena pavattatīti āha ‘‘samussāhitenā’’ti. Parabhaṇḍaṃ vā haratīti vā-saddena tathāpavattanakamusāvādādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Kāmānaṃ vā anubhuyyamānānaṃ. Vā-saddena parasantakassa vā ayathādhippetatāya yaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ gahetabbanti gahaṇādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
只有两种,因为相应法方面没有差别。如果是这样,为什么说“与忧俱、与瞋相应”呢?这是为了用不共的法来标示那个心。“于杀生等中”:就是在杀生等当中。用“等”这个字,包含了不与取、妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语、瞋恚。以自性锐利而现起的心就是无行,另一种是有行——正是出于这个意思才说“锐利与迟钝现起之时”。然而,以迟钝而现起的心,不能一概认定它一定就是有行。应当这样理解:凡是依有行、有策励而现起的,那就是迟钝的,所以才那样说。巴利
Duvidhameva hoti sampayuttadhammavasena bhedābhāvato. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā ‘‘domanassasahagataṃ paṭighasampayutta’’nti vuttanti? Asādhāraṇadhammehi tassa cittassa upalakkhaṇatthaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīsūti pāṇātipātanādīsu. Ādi-saddena adinnādānamusāvādapesuññapharusasamphappalāpabyāpāde saṅgaṇhāti. Sabhāvatikkhaṃ hutvā pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ asaṅkhārameva hoti, itaraṃ sasaṅkhāranti adhippāyenāha ‘‘tikkhamandappavattikāle’’ti. Mandaṃ pana hutvā pavattamānaṃ ekaṃsena sasaṅkhāramevāti na sakkā viññātuṃ. Yaṃ sasaṅkhārena sappayogena pavattati, taṃ mandameva hotīti katvā tathāvuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
以痴为唯一根源的心,因为缺少其余两个根(无贪、无瞋),所以极其愚昧;又因为与疑和掉举相应,所以摇摆不定。因此它只与舍受相伴,这种心在任何时候都不具有自性上的锐利。因为这两种心是以在所缘上爬行游移、以散乱的方式生起的,对于这样的心,要说它在什么作用上有自性的锐利,或者说它需要被激励呢?所以在这里不存在行的差别。掉举虽然在其它不善心里也能找到,但在这里特别强盛,因此成为相应法中的主导而现起,所以特别用掉举来区分它,说为“与掉举相应”。正如在巴利圣典《法集论》(427)中,这里掉举是以自性而出现的;同样,依不共的主导法,痴根被说为“与疑相应”和“与掉举相应”两种,应当这样理解。不决定,就是疑。散乱,就是不寂静、迷乱的意思。巴利
Mohekahetukaṃ cittaṃ mūlantaravirahato atimūḷhaṃ, vicikicchuddhaccayogato cañcalañcāti upekkhāsahagatameva hoti, na tassa kadācipi sabhāvatikkhatā atthi. Ārammaṇe hi saṃsappanavasena, vikkhipanavasena ca pavattamānassa cittadvayassa kīdise kicce sabhāvatikkhatāya, ussāhetabbatāya vā bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā na tattha saṅkhārabhedo atthi. Aññesu akusalacittesu labbhamānampi uddhaccaṃ visesato ettheva balavaṃ, tato eva sampayuttadhammesu padhānaṃ hutvā pavattatīti idameva uddhaccena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘uddhaccasampayutta’’nti. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ (dha. sa. 427) idha sarūpato uddhaccaṃ āgataṃ, evaṃ asādhāraṇapadhānadhammavasena mohamūlaṃ ‘‘vicikicchāsampayuttaṃ, uddhaccasampayutta’’nti duvidhaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Asanniṭṭhānaṃ saṃsayo. Vikkhepo avūpasamo, bhantatāti attho.
应当知道,这十二种不善心,无论取六种所缘中的哪一种作为对象,都是在与舍俱行的、无因的唯作意识界心之后,通过身门等三门,以身业等方式,按照各自的情况,依杀生等业道以及依业而生起。巴利
Tayidaṃ dvādasavidhampi akusalacittaṃ chasu ārammaṇesu yaṃ vā taṃ vā ālambitvā upekkhāsahagatāhetukakiriyāmanoviññāṇadhātānantaraṃ kāyadvārādīhi tīhi dvārehi kāyakammādivasena yathārahaṃ pāṇātipātādikammapathavasena ceva kammavasena ca uppajjatīti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,除了与掉举相应(的心)之外,其余十一种(不善心)都能在四恶道中产生结生,在善趣中也能产生转起之果。但与掉举相应的心只产生转起之果。对此有人问:是什么原因,一切中最薄弱的疑相应心能产生结生,而由于具有胜解、比它更强的掉举相应心却不产生结生呢?因为见所断法中没提到它。如果它能产生结生,就应该在恶道中产生结生,而导向恶道的法属于见所断,那么在那里就该提到它,但并没有提到。因此它不产生结生,不过不能否认它产生转起之果。因为《分别论·无碍解分别》中说:“掉举相应心中的智是法无碍解,其果报中的智是义无碍解。”巴利
Tattha ṭhapetvā uddhaccasahagataṃ sesaṃ ekādasavidhampi catūsupi apāyesu paṭisandhiṃ deti, pavattivipākaṃ sugatiyampi. Uddhaccasahagataṃ pana pavattivipākamevāti. Etthāha – kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ sabbadubbalaṃ vicikicchāsampayuttaṃ paṭisandhiṃ deti, adhimokkhasabbhāvato tato balavantampi uddhaccasahagataṃ na detīti? Dassanena pahātabbesu avuttattā. Idaṃ hi paṭisandhiṃ dentaṃ apāyesu dadeyya, apāyagamanīyañca dassanapahātabbanti tattha vucceyya, na ca vuttaṃ. Tasmā paṭisandhiṃ na deti, pavattivipākadānaṃ panassa na sakkā paṭikkhipituṃ. Paṭisambhidāvibhaṅge ‘‘uddhaccasahagate ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā, tassa vipāke ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 730 atthato samānaṃ) vacanato.
另有一些人说:掉举相应心在凡夫生起时,因为伴随见所断法的性质,所以能产生两种果报;有学圣者没有这种伴随,所以不产生。这一点在这里需要考察:既然说它能产生果报,那它到底是修所断,还是非修所断?这里还有一层:如果它是修所断,那么在《发趣论》里就应该说修所断法有异刹那业缘的关系。如果它不是修所断,那么在“见所断三法”的分类中,《分别论》就应该说它是“非见所断非修所断”。如果因为它与见所断法性质相违,所以在那里不说它,那么在那个三法中,它就成了不被说到的法,这难道不犯过失吗?不犯过失。什么原因呢?因为在《心生起品》(《法集论》365等)里所说的十二种不善心生起,已经用两种范畴完全收摄了,由于必须分别展示,所以不存在某个心生起没被说到的情况;就像在“已生三法”中没有说过去等法不应被说到一样,这里也是如此。或者换个说法:即使它不能被修所断,但它在凡夫中生起时,因为与修所断法有共通的性质,又是有过失的,所以方便说为“修所断”,因此并没有“不应被说到”的过失。而从严格意义上说,它并不是修所断,所以也就不依它说异刹那业缘关系。见所断的因缘对于掉举相应心来说,也只是缺少了伴随条件而已,见所断并没有使任何法变成不生起的法,所以它绝对是修所断。或者也可以说,这是为了显示它有能力导向恶道,才说它是见所断;正因为不具备那种能力,所以才作了那样的分别。巴利
Apare panāhu – puthujjanassa uppajjamānaṃ uddhaccasahagataṃ dassanappahātabbasahāyasabbhāvato ubhayavipākampi deti, na sekkhassa tadabhāvatoti. Idamettha vicāretabbaṃ, yassa vipākadānaṃ vuttaṃ, kiṃ taṃ bhāvanāya pahātabbaṃ, udāhu noti? Kiñcettha – yadi tāva bhāvanāya pahātabbaṃ, paṭṭhāne bhāvanāya pahātabbassa nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayabhāvo vattabbo siyā. Atha na bhāvanāya pahātabbaṃ, dassanenapahātabbattike ‘‘nevadassanenanabhāvanāyapahātabba’’miccassa vibhaṅge vattabbaṃ siyā. Yadi tabbiruddhasabhāvatāya tattha na vucceyya, evampi tasmiṃ tike tassa navattabbatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Cittuppādakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 365 ādayo) āgatānaṃ dvādasannaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ dvīhi padehi saṅgahitattā vibhajitvā dassetabbassa niyogato kassaci cittuppādassa abhāvā, yathā uppannattike atītādīnaṃ navattabbatā na vuttā, evametassāpi. Atha vā bhāvanāya pahātuṃ asakkuṇeyyassāpi tassa puthujjane vattamānassa bhāvanāya pahātabbasabhāvasāmaññato, sāvajjato ca bhāvanāya pahātabbapariyāyo vijjatīti natthi navattabbatāpasaṅgadoso. Nippariyāyena ca na bhāvanāya pahātabbanti tassa vasena nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayabhāvopi na vutto. Dassanapahātabbapaccayassāpi uddhaccasahagatassa sahāyavekallamattameva dassanena kataṃ, na kocipi bhāvo anuppādadhammataṃ tassa āpāditoti ekantena bhāvanāya pahātabbatā vuttā. Atha vā apāyagamanīyabhāvāpekkhaṃ dassanappahātabbavacananti tadabhāvato taṃ vibhajanaṃ vuttanti.
454 考虑到“识”这个词,因为“无记、果报”等说法用的是中性词形,所以这样说。也正是由于它更偏向无记这一点,才说它有两种。否则,色法和涅槃也是无记的,那就应当说它有四种了。果报属于欲界等的性质,应当依照在善心那里所说的方式来理解。无因性和有因性一样,是就相应因来说的,不是就产生它的因来说的。因为果报的有因性,虽然是由有因的业所成就,却仍是就相应因来说的;否则,无因的心也会变成有因了。那么,为什么有因的业会生出无因的果报呢?其中的道理前面已经说过了。再者,在仅仅由所缘冲击而生的五种识里,无贪等相应心所尚且不可能存在,那么在领受心和推度心里,它们的作用更加微弱,也同样不可能存在;由于因不可能生起,所以应当知道这些都是无因的。巴利
454. ‘‘Viññāṇa’’nti padaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘abyākataṃ vipāka’’nti ādiko napuṃsakaniddeso, tato eva adhikatābyākatāpekkhāya duvidhanti vuttaṃ. Aññathā rūpanibbānānampi abyākatabhāvato taṃ catubbidhanti vattabbaṃ siyā. Vipākassa kāmāvacarādibhāvo kusale vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ahetukatā sahetukatā viya sampayuttahetuvasena, na nibbattakahetuvasena. Vipākassa hi sahetukatā sahetukakammavasena sijjhamānāpi sampayuttahetuvaseneva vuccati, aññathā ahetukānampi sahetukatā āpajjeyyāti. Kasmā pana sahetukassa ahetuko vipāko hotīti? Tattha kāraṇaṃ vuttameva. Kiñca ārammaṇābhinipātamattesu pañcasu viññāṇesu yathā alobhādisampayogo na sambhavati, evaṃ mandataramandakiccesu sampaṭicchanasantīraṇesūti hetūnaṃ uppattiyā asambhavatopi nesaṃ ahetukatā daṭṭhabbā.
由于不存在以“从意识生起”为其殊胜之处的思量作用,它只是意,所以称为意界。巴利
Manoviññāṇato uppajjanavisiṭṭhamananakiccānaṃ abhāvato manomattā dhātu manodhātu.
依靠眼而生起的对色的了知,这就是它的特相,所以叫“依靠眼而了知色的特相”。在这里,说“依靠眼”,是为了排除以色为所缘的其他识。说“了知”,是为了排除依靠眼而生起的触等心所。说“眼”和“色”,是从依止和所缘两方面来说明识,因为识的生起要依靠这两者。如果根本没有眼,那么盲人也应该能看见色,但他们实际上看不见。如果根本没有青等色,就不应该有方位等的固定限定,但这种限定确实存在;而且前面已经说过,心必定有确定的所缘。所以应当知道,“没有所缘,心也能显现青等相”这种说法是错误的。因此世尊说:“依靠眼和色,眼识生起”等等。巴利
Cakkhusannissitaṃ hutvā rūpassa vijānanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti cakkhusannissitarūpavijānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Tattha cakkhusannissitavacanena rūpārammaṇaṃ aññaṃ viññāṇaṃ nivatteti. Vijānanaggahaṇena cakkhusannissite phassādike nivatteti. Cakkhurūpaggahaṇena nissayato, ārammaṇato ca viññāṇaṃ vibhāveti ubhayādhīnavuttikattā. Yadi hi cakkhu nāma na siyā, andhāpi rūpaṃ passeyyuṃ, na ca passanti. Yadi ca nīlādirūpaṃ nāma na siyā, desādiniyamena na bhavitabbaṃ, attheva ca niyamo, ekantasārammaṇatā ca cittassa vuttāti ‘‘ārammaṇena vinā nīlādiābhāsaṃ cittaṃ pavattatī’’ti evaṃ pavatto vādo micchāvādoti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425; saṃ. ni. 2.44; 4.60; kathā. 465).
为什么这里用词会有不同呢?因为要显示这样一个差别:眼虽然只是一个,却能作为眼识的缘;而色则是许多个聚合在一起。那又是什么原因,使眼只是一个也能作为眼识的缘,而色却要是许多个呢?因为作为缘的方式有差别。眼对于眼识,是依止缘、前生缘、根缘、不相应缘,它仅仅以“存在”的方式就成为缘——因为它存在时眼识才存在,它不存在时眼识就不存在。因此说,它是以“有缘”和“不离去缘”作为识的缘。而识以眼为依止,不能理解成像无色法那样一部分一部分地附着上去,而应理解成像大臣等依附于国王、随从依附于国王那样,是系属于它而活动。其他的缘则要按各自不同的特点来理解。这种作为缘的状态,不可能在单一的法上完全具备,所以说眼只是一个,却能作为眼识的缘,因此用单数说“依于眼”。巴利
Kasmā panettha vacanabhedo katoti? Ekampi cakkhu viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, rūpaṃ pana anekameva saṃhatanti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ. Kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ ekampi cakkhu viññāṇassa paccayo hoti, rūpaṃ pana anekamevāti? Paccayabhāvavisesato. Cakkhu hi cakkhuviññāṇassa nissayapurejātaindriyavippayuttapaccayehi paccayo hontaṃ atthibhāveneva hoti, tasmiṃ sati tassa bhāvato, asati abhāvato. Yato taṃ atthiavigatapaccayehissa paccayo hotīti vuccati, taṃnissayatā cassa na ekadesena allīyanavasena icchitabbā arūpabhāvato, atha kho garurājādīsu sissarājapurisādīnaṃ viya tappaṭibaddhavuttitāya. Itare pana paccayā tena tena visesena veditabbā. Svāyaṃ paccayabhāvo na ekasmiṃ na sambhavatīti ekampi cakkhu viññāṇassa paccayo hotīti ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭiccā’’ti ekavacanena niddeso kato.
不过,色虽然像眼一样,依靠前生、有、不离去这些缘而成为缘——因为它在之前就已存在,在存在的当下就提供帮助——但它仍然要由许多色聚合起来才能成为缘,因为它是所缘。凡是作为缘的法,无论是真实存在的自性,还是仅仅概念上的影像,当识以它为对象生起时,即使其他法也具有缘的作用,由于这个识本身必定有所缘才能生起,对于没有所缘就不能生起的识来说,它就成了识生起的依靠和原因,所以叫做所缘。识以各种方式领受自性而获得所缘缘,因此,眼识缘取色而生起时,正是在分辨色的自性而生起。而这种对境的领受,对于依根而转起的识来说,并不是按一两个聚合的色来领受,也不是按少数聚合的色来领受,而是按照作意的相应方式,以呈现在面前的色来领受。因此,为了显示正是许多色以聚合的作用而成为识的缘,世尊用复数说“于诸色”。巴利
Rūpaṃ pana yadipi cakkhu viya purejātaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti puretaraṃ hutvā vijjamānakkhaṇeyeva upakārakattā, tathāpi anekameva saṃhataṃ hutvā paccayo hoti ārammaṇabhāvato. Yañhi paccayadhammaṃ sabhāvabhūtaṃ, parikappitākāramattaṃ vā viññāṇaṃ vibhāventaṃ pavattati, tadaññesañca satipi paccayabhāve so tassa sārammaṇasabhāvatāya yaṃ kiñci anālambitvā pavattituṃ asamatthassa olubbha pavattikāraṇatāya ālambanīyato ārammaṇaṃ nāma. Tassa yasmā yathā tathā sabhāvūpaladdhivasena ārammaṇapaccayalābho, tasmā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpaṃ ārabbha pavattamānaṃ tassa sabhāvaṃ vibhāventameva pavattati. Sā cassa indriyādhīnavuttikassa ārammaṇasabhāvūpaladdhi, na ekadvikalāpagatavaṇṇavasena hoti, nāpi katipayakalāpagatavaṇṇavasena, atha kho ābhogānurūpaṃ āpāthagatavaṇṇavasenāti anekameva rūpaṃ saṃhaccakāritāya viññāṇassa paccayo hotīti dassento bhagavā ‘‘rūpe cā’’ti bahuvacanena niddisi.
那么,前面《发趣论》里说“色处对眼识界以及和它相应的诸法,以所缘缘为缘”,这句话该怎么理解呢?这也是针对那种能作为眼识的所缘缘的色处而说的。那到底是怎样的色处呢?是“聚合起来的”,这个意思很清楚。这样看来,有些人说“按照处的观察方式,眼识等是以相为所缘,而不是以实物之相为所缘”,这也是合理的。在这里不应该怀疑眼识是以聚合为所缘,因为根本不存在对聚合的作意。不过,聚合起来的色法确实能成为所缘缘。那一个个单独不能起作用的色法,聚合起来怎么就能成为所缘缘呢?难道单独看不见的盲人,聚在一起就能看见吗?这并不是绝对的,因为可以看到,一个个单独没力气的人,在抬轿子等事情上聚合起来就能起作用。再比如头发等,在某个位置上单独取不到色,而在同一个位置上聚合起来就能取到色,这就更清楚地显示出它们聚合起来才能起作用。由此应当知道,像“眼识是以极微色为所缘,还是以极微的聚合为所缘”这类责难,已经被遮止了。“缘耳与声”等处,也是同样的道理。这样,眼识因为是依靠两者而转起的,所以从依止和所缘两方面作了说明;耳识等也应按照相应的情况这样解说。巴利
Yaṃ pana ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā taṃsampayuttakānañca dhammānaṃ ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.2) vuttaṃ, taṃ kathanti? Tampi yādisaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hoti, tādisameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kīdisaṃ pana tanti? Samuditanti pākaṭoyamattho. Evañca katvā yadeke vadanti ‘‘āyatanasallakkhaṇavasena cakkhuviññāṇādayo sallakkhaṇārammaṇā, na dabbasallakkhaṇavasenā’’ti, tampi yuttameva hoti. Na cettha samudāyārammaṇatā āsaṅkitabbā samudāyābhogassevābhāvato. Samuditā pana vaṇṇadhammā ārammaṇapaccayā honti. Kathaṃ pana paccekaṃ asamatthā samuditā ārammaṇā paccayā honti, na hi paccekaṃ daṭṭhuṃ asakkontā andhā samuditā passantīti? Nayidamekantikaṃ visuṃ visuṃ asamatthānaṃ sivikāvahanādīsu samatthatāya dassanato. Kesādīnañca yasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitānaṃ paccekaṃ vaṇṇaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkā, tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne samuditānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ gahetuṃ sakkāti bhiyyopi tesaṃ saṃhaccakāritā paribyattā. Etena cakkhuviññāṇassa paramāṇurūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ, udāhu taṃsamudāyotiādikā codanā paṭikkhittāti veditabbā. ‘‘Sotañca paṭicca sadde cā’’tiādīsupi (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425, 426) eseva nayo. Evaṃ ubhayādhīnavuttikatāya cakkhuviññāṇassa nissayato, ārammaṇato ca vibhāvanaṃ kataṃ, evaṃ sotaviññāṇādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ.
以色为唯一所缘的作用,就是只把色处当作所缘来运作。“唯一”这个词,一方面排除了其他所缘,另一方面也排除了色处中可能存在的某些差别。因为眼识在色上,除了取颜色本身,并不能取任何别的差别。所以世尊说:“以五种识不能了知任何法,除了只是触及而已。”眼识生起时,只以色为所缘而生起,因此是以面向色的方式被把握的,所以说“现起为面向色”。为了说明:等无间离去的非色法,通过给予活动机会,对在自身之后无间生起的非色法,以无间、等无间、无有、离去等缘而成为助缘,就像依止法和所缘法一样是近因,所以说“以对色所缘的唯作意界的离去为近因”。对耳识等,也应当按同样的方式理解其含义。巴利
Rūpamattārammaṇarasanti rūpāyatanamattasseva ārammaṇakaraṇarasaṃ. Mattasaddena yathā ārammaṇantaraṃ nivatteti, evaṃ rūpāyatanepi labbhamāne ekacce visese nivatteti. Na hi cakkhuviññāṇaṃ vaṇṇamattato aññaṃ kiñci visesaṃ tattha gahetuṃ sakkoti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘pañcahi viññāṇehi na kiñci dhammaṃ paṭivijānāti aññatra abhinipātamattā’’ti. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ rūpārammaṇe eva uppajjanato tadabhimukhabhāvena gayhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāna’’nti. Attano anantaraṃ uppajjamānānaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ samanantaravigatā arūpadhammā pavattiokāsadānena anantarasamanantaranatthivigatapaccayehi upakārakā nissayārammaṇadhammā viya āsannakāraṇanti dassento āha ‘‘rūpārammaṇāya kiriyamanodhātuyā apagamapadaṭṭhāna’’nti. Sotaviññāṇādīsupi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo.
眼识等所取的色等所缘,就在紧接着的那一刹那,让它不至于消失,而加以领受、执取,就好像正在执取一样,所以说“作用是领受色等”。它以那样的状态,也就是以领受的状态而现前,所以说“现起为那样的状态”。巴利
Cakkhuviññāṇādigahitaṃ rūpādiārammaṇaṃ tadanantarameva aparipatantaṃ katvā sampaṭicchantī gaṇhantī viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpādisampaṭicchanarasā’’ti. Tathābhāvena sampaṭicchanabhāvena paccupatiṭṭhatīti tathābhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā.
在六种所缘里,有时能认识五种,或者认识其中的某几种;虽然它的自性就是识知,但说它的特相是识知六种所缘,因为不超出这种自性,或者因为其余所缘都包含在六种之内。说到推度等作用,意思是指推度、彼所缘的作用,或者推度、彼所缘、结生、有分、死的作用。所谓“以心所依处为依处”,这是就这两种意识界必定依止心所依处而说的。不过,按照前面所说的方式,也还是可以说它们“以各自无间灭去的识的离去为依处”。它的分类,就是指这个异熟意识界被称为“两种”的那种两种性,也就是它的分类。“唯于可爱所缘”,就是必定在可爱的所缘中,意思是极可爱的所缘。在五门以及速行结束时:这里,在五门中,是指领受和确定之间的位置;在另一种情况下,是指速行和有分之间的位置;这样就有两种位置。对于另一种,在推度和彼所缘的时候,位置也像前面说的那样;但在结生等时候,应当知道:死和有分之间是结生的位置;结生与转向之间、彼所缘与转向之间、速行与转向之间、确定与转向之间是有分的位置;彼所缘与结生之间,或者速行与结生之间,是死的位置。巴利
Chasu ārammaṇesu kadāci pañcannaṃ, tato vā katipayānaṃ vijānanasabhāvāpi chaḷārammaṇavijānanalakkhaṇā vuttā taṃsabhāvānativattanato, chasveva vā itaresaṃ ārammaṇānaṃ antogadhattā. Santīraṇādikiccāti santīraṇatadārammaṇakiccā vā, santīraṇatadārammaṇapaṭisandhibhavaṅgacutikiccā vāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Hadayavatthupadaṭṭhānā’’ti idaṃ imāsaṃ dvinnaṃ manoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ ekanteneva hadayavatthusannissayatāya vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhā vuttanayena pana taṃtaṃanantarātītaviññāṇāpagamapadaṭṭhānātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Tassā bhedoti tassā vipākamanoviññāṇadhātuyā ‘‘duvidhā’’ti vuttāya duvidhatāsaṅkhāto bhedo. Ekantamiṭṭhārammaṇeti ekanteneva iṭṭhe ārammaṇe, ativiya iṭṭhārammaṇeti attho. Pañcadvāre ceva javanāvasāne cāti ettha pañcadvāre sampaṭicchanavoṭṭhabbanānaṃ antarāḷaṃ ṭhānaṃ, itaratra javanabhavaṅgānanti evaṃ dviṭhānā hoti. Itarāyapi santīraṇatadārammaṇakāle yathāvuttameva ṭhānaṃ, paṭisandhiādikāle pana cutibhavaṅgānaṃ antarāḷaṃ paṭisandhiyā, paṭisandhiāvajjanānaṃ tadārammaṇāvajjanānaṃ javanāvajjanānaṃ voṭṭhabbanāvajjanānañca antarāḷaṃ bhavaṅgassa, tadārammaṇapaṭisandhīnaṃ javanapaṭisandhīnaṃ vā antarāḷaṃ cutiyā ṭhānanti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,“六”应当依照前面所说的方式来了知分类。作为身体所依的、并非极度可爱的可触大种,其撞击和摩擦的力量强,所以身识与乐受相应。而所造色之间的撞击力弱,所以眼识等与舍受俱行。因此说“其余与舍受相应”。其余也是六种。巴利
Chasūti ettha pubbe vuttanayeneva vibhāgo veditabbo. Kāyassa nissayabhūtānaṃ nātiiṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbabhūtānaṃ paṭighaṭṭanānighaṃsassa balavabhāvato kāyaviññāṇaṃ sukhasampayuttaṃ. Upādārūpānaṃyeva ghaṭṭanā dubbalāti cakkhuviññāṇādīni upekkhāsahagatāni. Tenāha ‘‘sesaṃ upekkhāyutta’’nti. Sesaṃ chabbidhampi.
无贪、无嗔、无痴,以及无贪、无嗔等,合称无贪等;与那些无贪等异熟因相应,就是与无贪等异熟因相应。就像欲界善那样,有喜、舍等的差别——欲界善依喜、舍、智、行的差别而有八种,这个心也是如此,由此显示它在八种性上相似。从欲界的层面、从低劣等的层面、从在诸生类中受生的层面来看,都相似;但从相应法、所缘和转起方式来看,则不相似。因为善心是依业门而转起的,这个心不是,因为异熟不产生表色。不过从生起之门来看,这个心也有转起的差别,因为大异熟心能在五门和意门中以彼所缘的方式转起。然而,善心依趣有五种,依识住有七种,这个心不是这样,因为它只生起于其中一部分。为了显示在所缘和某种转起方式上的不相似,所以说“然而”等。“于六所缘中”,是指在有限、过去等、内等分类的六种所缘中。巴利
Alobhādosāmohā ceva alobhādosā ca alobhādayo, tehi alobhādīhi vipākahetūhi sampayuttaṃ alobhādivipākahetusampayuttaṃ. Kāmāvacarakusalaṃ viya somanassādibhedatoti yathā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ somanassupekkhāñāṇasaṅkhārabhedato aṭṭhavidhaṃ, evamidampīti aṭṭhavidhatāya sadisataṃ dasseti. Kāmāvacarabhāvato hīnādito, yonīsu uppattito ca sadisameva, sampayuttadhammato pana ārammaṇato, pavattiākārato ca visadisaṃ. Tathā hi kusalaṃ kammadvāravasena pavattati, na idaṃ, vipākānaṃ aviññattijanakattā. Uppattidvāravasena pana imassāpi attheva pavattibhedo pañcadvāramanodvāresu mahāvipākānaṃ tadārammaṇavasena pavattisambhavato. Yathā pana kusalaṃ gativasena pañcavidhaṃ, viññāṇaṭṭhitivasena sattavidhañca, na evamidaṃ tadekadese eva uppajjanato. Tattha ārammaṇato, ekaccapavattiākārato ca visadisataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Chasu ārammaṇesūti parittādiatītādiajjhattādippabhedesu chasu ārammaṇesu.
关于“依来由等”,是指依来由与依缘。其中,按某些论师的主张:就像嘴在镜面前动时,镜中的嘴像也跟着动一样,无行的善之异熟是无行,有行的善之异熟是有行,这是依来由来说。另一些论师则主张:由强盛而显著的缘、业等所生起的是无行,由微弱的缘等所生起的是有行,这是依缘来说。“相应法”是指在圣典中按自性而说到的相应法。因为依这些相应法,异熟与善才没有差别。“无勤勇”在这里是指:所谓勤勇,就是在未断无明、渴爱、慢的相续中,能令异熟生起的那种作用,叫做行作;这种作用在异熟中不存在,所以说它是无勤勇。但在善心中,即使是依神通而转起的善心,也有这种勤勇,所以它是有勤勇。巴利
Āgamanādivasenāti āgamanapaccayavasena. Tattha ekaccānaṃ ācariyānaṃ matena mukhe calite ādāsatale mukhanimittaṃ calanaṃ viya asaṅkhārassa kusalassa vipāko asaṅkhāro, sasaṅkhārassa kusalassa vipāko sasaṅkhāroti evaṃ āgamanavasena. Ekaccānaṃ pana ācariyānaṃ matena balavantehi vibhūtehi paccayehi kammādīhi uppanno asaṅkhāro, dubbalehi sasaṅkhāroti evaṃ paccayavasena. Sampayuttadhammānanti pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato āgatasampayuttadhammānaṃ. Tesaṃ hi vasena kusalato vipākassa visesābhāvo. Nirussāhanti ettha ussāho nāma anupacchinnāvijjātaṇhāmānasantāne vipākuppādanasamatthatāsaṅkhāto byāpāro, so vipākesu natthīti taṃ nirussāhaṃ. Kusalesu pana abhiññāvasapavattesupi atthevāti taṃ saussāhaṃ.
贪等法完全有过失,以不如理作意为因,所以没有异熟的性质;无贪等法也完全是无过失的本性,因为它们的因与那种不如理作意相反,所以根本不会成为不善异熟。因此说“不善异熟唯是无因”。就像在极可爱和可爱中等的所缘上,由于受有种种差别,善异熟意识界有两种:与喜俱行、与舍俱行;但在极不可爱和不可爱中等的所缘上,受并没有差别,所以不善异熟意识界只有一种,因此说“七种”。因为如果那里受有差别,在极不可爱的所缘上就应该有忧俱,而忧不可能离开嗔恨而生起。巴利
Lobhādīnaṃ ekantasāvajjatāya ayonisomanasikārahetukānaṃ natthi vipākabhāvo, alobhādīnampi ekantaanavajjasabhāvānaṃ kāraṇassa tabbidhuratāya nattheva akusalavipākabhāvoti āha ‘‘akusalavipākaṃ ahetukamevā’’ti. Yathā atiiṭṭhe, iṭṭhamajjhatte ca ārammaṇe vedanābhedasabbhāvato kusalavipākamanoviññāṇadhātu duvidhā hoti somanassasahagatā, upekkhāsahagatāti, na evaṃ atianiṭṭhe, aniṭṭhamajjhatte ca ārammaṇe vedanābhedo atthīti akusalavipākamanoviññāṇadhātu ekamevāti ‘‘sattavidha’’nti vuttaṃ. Sati hi tattha vedanābhede atianiṭṭhe domanassena bhavitabbaṃ, na ca paṭighena vinā domanassaṃ uppajjatīti.
身识具有与苦俱行的性质,这一点应该按照在善异熟里所说的相反方式来理解。舍是卑下的:因为它是极端卑下之不善业的异熟,所以舍即使是舍,也同样是卑下的,因为它具有苦的自性。因此说“如苦而非极锐利”。就像苦极其锐利、辛辣,这个舍并不是那样,但它仍然以苦的自性而运作。因为不善的异熟不可能是无苦的。而这里舍的状态,应该看作像一个被强者逼迫、无力还击的弱者,对于那股力量加在他身上的逼迫,只能默默忍受。“于其余”是指在善异熟中。巴利
Kāyaviññāṇassa dukkhasahagatatā kusalavipāke vuttavipariyāyena veditabbā. Upekkhā hīnāti ekantanihīnassa akusalassa vipākabhāvato upekkhāpi samānā hīnā eva dukkhasabhāvattā. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhaṃ viyanātitikhiṇā’’ti. Yathā dukkhaṃ ativiya tikhiṇaṃ kaṭukaṃ, na evamayaṃ, tathāpi dukkhasabhāveneva pavattati. Na hi akusalassa vipāko adukkho hoti. Upekkhābhāvo cassa balavatā bādhiyamānassa paṭippaharituṃ asakkontassa dubbalassa purisassa tena kariyamānabādhāya upekkhanā viyāti daṭṭhabbo. Itaresūti kusalavipākesu.
“色界”是指色界异熟识,因为这里讲的是关于异熟的内容。“如善”是指像色界善心一样,因为色界异熟并不与色界善以外的其他善相似。另外,“善”和“异熟”在这里是关联的词。所以,就像说“侍奉母亲”时,虽然没有明说“自己的母亲”,但意思自然就是自己的母亲;这里也是一样,意思是“自己的善”。这里所说的与善相似,要从法和所缘两方面来理解:在善心中能生起的触等心所,在异熟中也能生起;善心以什么为所缘而生起,这个异熟识也以同样的所缘而生起。不过,这里第五禅心如果是获得神通的善心,那就没有它的异熟。为什么没有呢?因为不可能有,也因为它是禅那的殊胜功德。这个第五禅善心如果要给异熟,只能给色界的异熟,因为不同地的业不会给不同地的异熟。而且,色界异熟被说成是以业相为所缘,所以它不会缘取别的所缘而生起;它也不是有限所缘之类的所缘,这就是不可能的原因。再者,它是禅那的功德,就像布施等能成为那一生中的助缘一样。巴利
Rūpāvacaranti rūpāvacaravipākaviññāṇaṃ. Vipākakathā hesāti. Kusalaṃ viyāti rūpāvacarakusalaṃ viya. Na hi rūpāvacaravipāko tadaññakusalasadiso. Apica sambandhisaddā ete, yadidaṃ ‘‘kusalaṃ, vipāko’’ti ca. Tasmā yathā ‘‘mātaraṃ payirupāsatī’’ti vutte attano mātaranti avuttampi siddhamevetaṃ, evaṃ idhāpīti attano kusalaṃ viyāti attho. Kusalasadisatā cettha dhammato, ārammaṇato ca veditabbā. Tathā hi ye phassādayo kusale labbhanti, te vipākepi labbhanti. Yasmiṃ ca ārammaṇe kusalaṃ pavattati, tattheva ayaṃ vipākopi pavattati. Yaṃ panettha pañcamajjhānacittaṃ abhiññāppattaṃ, tassa vipāko eva natthi. Kasmā natthi? Asambhavato, ānisaṃsabhūtattā ca. Tañhi vipākaṃ dentaṃ rūpāvacarameva dadeyya. Na hi aññabhūmikaṃ kammaṃ aññabhūmikaṃ vipākaṃ deti. Kammanimittārammaṇatā ca rūpāvacaravipākassa vuttāti na taṃ aññaṃ ārabbha pavattati. Parittārammaṇādiārammaṇañca taṃ na hotīti ayamasambhavo. Jhānassa ānisaṃsabhūtañca dānādīnaṃ tasmiṃ attabhāve paccayalābho viyāti.
不过,异熟和善在生起上确实是有差别的。为了说明这一点,才说了“然而善”等这些话。就像善一样,从所缘的差别来看——比如除去遍处后所现的虚空等——有四种。生起上的差别则和前面说的一样,也就是按速行来分,以及按结生等来分。巴利
Pavattito pana vipākassa, kusalassa ca attheva bhedoti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kusalaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kusalaṃ viya kasiṇugghāṭimākāsādiārammaṇabhedato catubbidhaṃ. Pavattibhedo vuttanayova javanavasena, paṭisandhiādivasena ca pavattanato.
“与四道相应之心的果”是指:与四种圣道相应的善心的果,也就是与四种沙门果相应的状态,这就是它的意思。在道心路中生起两次或三次,在果等至中则没有限定数量地持续生起,但由于在两种情形下生起,所以说“以两种方式生起”。“一切”是指:二十三种欲界异熟、五种色界异熟、四种无色界异熟、四种出世间异熟,这一切异熟识按不略不广的方式合计为三十六种。巴利
Catumaggayuttacittaphalattāti catūhi ariyamaggehi sampayuttakusalacittassa phalattā, catubbidhasāmaññaphalasampayuttabhāvatoti attho. Maggavīthiyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ, tikkhattuṃ vā phalasamāpattiyaṃ aparicchinnaparimāṇaṃ pavattamānampi dvīsu ṭhānesu pavattiyā ‘‘dvidhā pavattatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbampīti tevīsatividhaṃ kāmāvacaravipākaṃ, pañcavidhaṃ rūpāvacaravipākaṃ, catubbidhaṃ arūpāvacaravipākaṃ, catubbidhameva lokuttaravipākanti sabbampi vipākaviññāṇaṃ nātisaṅkhepavitthāranayena chattiṃsavidhaṃ hoti.
按地的区别,唯作心有三种,因为不存在出世间唯作心。出世间唯作心确实不存在,因为它不具有立即产生果报的性质。经中说过:“定是即刻的,人们称之为。”(《小诵》6.5;《经集》228)有学圣者生起的无上善心,因为能引生另一补特伽罗之体,所以是有果的,这暂且不论。而阿拉汉生起的出世间善心,因为不能引生另一补特伽罗之体,所以是无果的,那为什么不把它看作唯作呢?这或许可以接受。然而,出世间善心只生起一次。如果它能反复生起,阿拉汉也会生起道心,这样就会有出世间唯作心,但事实并非如此,因为没有这个必要。因此,不存在出世间唯作识。所谓“唯作识”,就是纯粹只是唯作的识:不像善心、不善心那样产生任何果报,只是单纯作为唯作而生起的识,这就是它的含义。那么,它为什么不产生果报呢?回答说:在这里,那两种转向心,即使在尚未断除有之根的相续中生起,也由于未被反复修习而力量微弱,就像没有种子能力的花一样,只是无果的。至于在已断除有之根的相续中生起的十八种无因唯作识,应当知道就像被断根的藤蔓一样,不能结果。由于没有其他可能,必须以无贪等唯作之因作为它的因,所以说“远离无贪等唯作之因”。巴利
Bhūmibhedatotividhaṃ lokuttarassa abhāvato. Lokuttarañhi kiriyacittaṃ natthi ekantena anantaravipākadāyibhāvato. Vuttañhi ‘‘samādhimānantarikaññamāhū’’ti (khu. pā. 6.5; su. ni. 228). Hotu tāva sekkhānaṃ uppajjamānaṃ anuttaraṃ kusalaṃ puggalantarabhāvūpanayanato saphalaṃ, arahato pana uppajjamānaṃ puggalantarabhāvūpanayanato nipphalaṃ, tassa kiriyabhāvo kasmā na icchitoti? Icchitabbo siyā. Yadi tassa punappunaṃ uppatti siyā, sakiṃyeva pana lokuttarakusalaṃ pavattati. Yadi hi punappunaṃ pavatteyya, maggacittaṃ arahatopi pavattatīti lokuttarakiriyacittaṃ siyā, na cetaṃ atthi payojanābhāvato. Tasmā natthi lokuttarakiriyaviññāṇaṃ. Kiriyaviññāṇanti ca kiriyāmattaṃ viññāṇaṃ, kusalākusalaṃ viya kiñci vipākaṃ anuppādetvā kiriyāmattameva hutvā pavattanakaviññāṇanti attho. Kasmā panetaṃ vipākaṃ na uppādetīti? Vuccate – ettha hi yadetaṃ āvajjanadvayaṃ, taṃ anupacchinnabhavamūlepi santāne pavattaṃ anāsevanatāya dubbalabhāvato abījasāmatthiyaṃ viya pupphaṃ aphalameva hoti. Yaṃ pana ucchinnabhavamūlāyaṃ santatiyaṃ pavattaṃ aṭṭhārasavidhaṃ viññāṇaṃ, taṃ samucchinnamūlāya latāya pupphaṃ viya phaladāyi na hotīti veditabbaṃ. Aññassa asambhavato kiriyahetunā nāma alobhādināva bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘alobhādikiriyahetuvirahita’’nti.
眼识等的前行者,以了知色等所缘为特相,也就是具有“眼识等的前行、了知色等”的特相。不过,这个意界虽然是从意识生起的,却因为没有殊胜的思量作用,只是单纯的意,所以称为意界。同样地,它也不能成为意识的缘。这里是简略说明,详细内容会在“界分别”(《清净道论》2.517)中讲到。所谓“转向作用”,就是作意作用,或者说是让心相续从先前的状态转向其他所缘的作用。所谓“以有分断为近因”,就是以有分相续的断为近因。由于它只对从未出现过的所缘生起一次,不能完全地品尝所缘的滋味,所以对于可意、不可意等一切所缘,它总是与舍受相应。巴利
Cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ purecarā hutvā rūpādiārammaṇānaṃ vijānanalakkhaṇā cakkhuviññāṇādipurecararūpādivijānanalakkhaṇā. Ayaṃ pana manoviññāṇato uppannāpi visiṭṭhamananakiccābhāvena manomattā dhātūti manodhātu. Tathā hesā manoviññāṇassa paccayo na hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana dhātuniddese (visuddhi. 2.517) āgamissati. Āvajjanarasāti ābhogarasā, cittasantānassa vā purimākārato aññathā oṇojanarasā. Bhavaṅgavicchedapadaṭṭhānāti bhavaṅgasantānavicchedapadaṭṭhānā. Apubbārammaṇā sakideva pavattamānā sabbathā visayarasaṃ anubhavituṃ na sakkotīti iṭṭhādīsu sabbattha upekkhāyuttāva hoti.
共通是指有学、无学与凡夫共同具有的。不共是指唯独无学者才有的。它的作用是确定和转向:在五门中,它像是对已经被推度取到的所缘加以确定那样生起,所以有确定的作用;在意门中,则按照前面所说的方式,有转向的作用。由于具备这样的状态,它在五门和意门中依次以确定和转向的状态出现,所以说是以这样的状态现起。在确定的时候,是三种无因异熟意识界在履行推度的作用;在转向的时候,则是任何一个有分的断裂;这些当中任何一种的离去,就是它的近因,因此说以无因……为近因。巴利
Sādhāraṇāti sekkhāsekkhaputhujjanānaṃ sādhāraṇā. Asādhāraṇāti asekkhānaṃyeva āveṇikā. Voṭṭhabbanāvajjanarasāti pañcadvāre santīraṇena gahitārammaṇaṃ vavatthapentī viya pavattanato voṭṭhabbanarasā, manodvāre pana vuttanayena āvajjanarasā. Tathābhāvena pañcadvāramanodvāresu yathākkamaṃ voṭṭhabbanāvajjanabhāvena paccupatiṭṭhatīti tathābhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Voṭṭhabbanakāle santīraṇakiccānaṃ tissannaṃ ahetukavipākamanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ āvajjanakāle yassa kassaci bhavaṅgassāti imesaṃ aññatarāpagamo etissā āsannakāraṇanti āha ‘‘ahetuka…pe… padaṭṭhānā’’ti.
阿拉汉:因为只属于阿拉汉,不与其他人共通。于粗显所缘:指骨锁、饿鬼形相之类,或者其他粗显、不微细的所缘。令笑生起的作用:就是令笑生起的作用。因此,这个心才被称为“令笑生起”,并非由于其他能令笑生起的心不存在。其他十二种与喜俱行的欲界善、不善、唯作心,也能随宜令凡夫等生起笑。然而,这个心没有伺察和慧,在粗显、不微细的所缘上,只令阿拉汉生起喜受而生起。注释中说世尊也会生起这个心。有些论师认为,在说了于过去世等无碍之智后,依据“具足这三种法的佛陀、世尊,一切身业都以智为先导、以智为随转”这句话,此事应当加以审察。不过,即使世尊以令笑生起的心而示现微笑,由于它随顺宿住智、未来分智和一切知智,仍然是以智为随转。这样一来,在以智为随转这一点上,与巴利圣典和注释都没有矛盾。也正因如此,注释中说:“这个心在他们那些智的惯行终了时生起。”而且必然应当这样认可,否则,世尊生起其他能引发表色的无因心就不合理。因为能引发表色的心,并不会妨碍由它所引生的表色成为身业等。它完全以心所依处为近因,仅于五蕴有的生命中才生起。巴利
Arahatanti arahataṃyeva asādhāraṇabhāvato. Anuḷāresūti aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikapetarūpādīsu, aññesu vā appaṇītesu vatthūsu. Hasituppādanarasāti hasitasseva uppādanarasā. Tathā hi taṃ cittaṃ ‘‘hasituppādana’’ntveva vuccati, na aññesaṃ hasituppādakacittānaṃ abhāvato. Aññānipi hi dvādasa somanassasahagatāni parittakusalākusalakiriyacittāni yathārahaṃ puthujjanādīnaṃ hasituppādakāni vijjanti, idaṃ pana cittaṃ vicāraṇapaññāvirahitaṃ parittesu appaṇītesu ārammaṇesu arahantānaṃ somanassamattaṃ uppādentaṃ uppajjati. Bhagavatopi uppajjatīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ atītaṃsādīsu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ vatvā ‘‘imehi tīhi dhammehi samannāgatassa buddhassa bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivattī’’ti (mahāni. 69; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato vicāretabbanti eke . Tattha hasituppādacittena pavattiyamānampi bhagavato sitakaraṇaṃ pubbenivāsānāgataṃsasabbaññutaññāṇānaṃ anuvattakattā ñāṇānuparivattiyevāti evaṃ pana ñāṇānuparivattibhāve sati na koci pāḷiaṭṭhakathānaṃ virodho. Evañca katvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ ciṇṇapariyante idaṃ cittaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avassañca etaṃ evaṃ icchitabbaṃ, aññathā aññassāpi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakassa ahetukacittassa bhagavato uppatti na yujjeyya. Na hi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakassa taṃsamuṭṭhitāya viññattiyā kāyakammādibhāvaṃ āpajjanabhāvo vibandhatīti. Ekantato hadayavatthupadaṭṭhānā pañcavokārabhave eva uppajjanato.
这里所说的差别是:有学圣者和凡夫生起这种心时,有能力产生果报;而阿拉汉生起时,则没有这种能力。这就是根据两者相续中生起的情况,对善心和唯作心所作的区分。这样处理之后,就避免了“因为缺少条件,连没有果报的善心和不善心也会变成唯作”这种错误。关于“与后面的善心之间的差别”等处,道理也是一样的。巴利
Ayamettha visesoti ayaṃ sekkhaputhujjanānaṃ uppattiyā vipākuppādanasamatthatā, arahataṃ uppattiyā tadabhāvoti ubhayesaṃ santāne uppattisamupalakkhito ettha kusalakiriyaviññāṇesu viseso. Evañca katvā paccayavekallena avipākassāpi kusalākusalassa kiriyabhāvappasaṅgo nivattito hoti. Parato kusalato visesoti etthāpi eseva nayo.
455 这句话的意思是:所有善、不善、无记的识,共八十九种,都是依既不太简略、也不太详细的方式解说的。所谓结生识等的作用,其实就是它依结生到另一有等行相而生起。除此之外,心再没有别的作用,所以说“以十四种行相而转起”。巴利
455.Sabbānipi kusalākusalabyākatāni ekūnanavuti viññāṇāni honti nātisaṅkhepavitthāranayenāti adhippāyo. Paṭisandhiviññāṇādīnaṃ kiccaṃ nāma bhavantarapaṭisandhādinā ākārena pavatti eva. Tabbinimuttañca cittassa aññaṃ kiccaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘cuddasahi ākārehi pavattantī’’ti.
以威力,就是靠能力。已经造作并积累的业,在其余诸缘齐备时给出果报,就像在释放自己的威力一样。于天、人中,是指在六层欲界天以及人间。关于业、业相、趣相:这里,业指已造作已积累的欲界善业,而且是已经得到机会来给出果报的,所以说为现前。业相指造业那一刻作为思的缘的布施物等。趣相指所投生之趣所摄的色处。半择迦等状态,指半择迦、哑巴、口吃者等状态。微弱的二因善业的果报,是舍俱无因意识界,也就是微弱的意识界。所谓“对他们”,是指对修习色界、无色界善的众生。所谓“唯业相”,就是指地遍等,仅仅是自己的业所缘的对象。巴利
Ānubhāvenāti sāmatthiyena. Katūpacitaṃ hi kammaṃ avasesapaccayasamavāye vipākaṃ dentaṃ attano ānubhāvaṃ vissajjantaṃ viya hoti. Devamanussesūti chasu kāmāvacaradevesu ceva manussesu ca. Kammakammanimittagatinimittānanti ettha kammaṃ nāma katūpacitaṃ kāmāvacarakusalakammaṃ, tañca kho vipākadānāya laddhokāsaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccupaṭṭhita’’nti. Kammanimittaṃ kammāyūhanakkhaṇe cetanāya paccayabhūtaṃ deyyadhammādi. Gatinimittaṃ yaṃ gatiṃ upapajjati, tappariyāpannaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ. Paṇḍakādibhāvanti paṇḍakamūgamammanādibhāvaṃ. Dubbalassa dvihetukakusalassa vipākabhūtā upekkhāsahagatāhetumanoviññāṇadhātu dubbala…pe… manoviññāṇadhātu. Nesanti bhāvitarūpārūpāvacarakusalānaṃ sattānaṃ. Kammanimittamevāti pathavīkasiṇādikaṃ attano kammārammaṇameva.
关于这里说的“就这样到此为止”:在解释识蕴的地方,应当知道,这只是从简略的角度、以显示自性的方式,依照结生而有十九种异熟识的转起。至于要按有所缘等等这些分别在这里说的内容,会在缘起论的部分讲到。巴利
Evaṃtāvetthāti ettha viññāṇakkhandhaniddese evaṃ saṅkhepato sarūpadassanamatteneva ekūnavīsatiyā vipākaviññāṇānaṃ paṭisandhivasena pavatti veditabbā. Bhavālambanādivibhāgena pana yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭiccasamuppādakathāyaṃ āgamissatīti.
所谓“那”,是指在十九种结生识当中,无论哪一个生起后又灭去,它都被无间生起所跟随。所谓“那的”,是指某业的果报即是结生识,那它就是属于那个业的。所谓“就在那里面”,就是指就在业等当中。如果业是结生识的所缘,那就是在那个业里面;如果是业相或趣相,那就是在业相或趣相当中,这就是它的意思。所谓“正是那样的”,是说结生识从因来说、从其余相应法来说,正是那样。所谓“中断相续者”,是指中断有分相续的。所谓“在另一种”,是指在称为转向的心生起中。所谓“唯以作用心才有梦的显现”,因此说“当不见梦时”。即使是无量数也仍然在转起,正如这以生有的支分而转起,所以称为“有分”。所谓“即他们之”,唯是那些成为结生者的。巴利
Taṃ tanti ekūnavīsatiyā paṭisandhiviññāṇesu yaṃ yaṃ uppajjitvā niruddhaṃ, taṃ taṃ anantaraṃ uppattiyā anubandhamānaṃ. Tassa tassevāti yassa yassa kammassa vipākabhūtaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ, tassa tasseva. Tasmiññevāti kammādike eva. Kammañce paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ kamme, atha kammanimittaṃ, gatinimittañca, tasmiṃ kammanimitte gatinimitteti attho. Tādisamevāti yādisaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ hetuto, sesasampayuttadhammato ca tādisameva. Santānavinivattaketi bhavaṅgasantānassa vinivattanake. Aññasmiṃ āvajjanasaṅkhāte cittuppāde. Kiriyamayacitteneva supinadassanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘supinaṃ apassato’’ti. Aparimāṇasaṅkhyampi pavattatiyeva, tathā hidaṃ upapattibhavassa aṅgabhāvena pavattanato ‘‘bhavaṅga’’nti vuccati. Tesaññevāti paṭisandhibhūtānaṃyeva.
“诸根”,就是眼等诸根。“能执取所缘”,是指有能力执取色等所缘。就像住在母胎里的时候一样,即使已经出胎,诸根也还不能立刻发挥各自的作用,而是要逐渐达到明净的时候,才能真正发挥各自的作用。所以经文说“此处诸处已成熟”。“现在面前”,是指处在合适的位置。就是依着这个处在合适位置的色,得到了撞击的缘。“撞击”,就是碰触。借着它,在眼的领域里,伴随着作用等种种缘的差别,对生起为变异或不同形态的境,以可意、不可意的方式给予助益或损害,这就是它的意思。“由此”,是指撞击之后。“由撞击之力”,是指由撞击的力量。“有分波动”,是指有分心发生动摇,也就是说,它成为两次转起不同状态的因,这就是它的意思。因为在那心相续中,前一位和后一位的因不同,所以就像动摇一样,说为“波动”。依照境与有境关系成立的法性,当所缘现前时,净色先有撞击;可是,依其他法而住的有分,怎么会有波动呢?因为它们相互关联。这里有个譬喻:放在鼓面上的砂粒中,当一粒砂被撞击时,停在另一粒砂上的苍蝇就会动摇。“即彼色”,就是成为有分波动之缘的、现在面前的色处。“好像切断有分”,就是好像切断有分的相续。因为所缘生起之后有分才生起,所以说了执取境的五门转向之后,在应当说“见”等的时候却不提它们,而说意门转向,因为在概说中以转向的共通性摄取了两种转向。巴利
Indriyānīti cakkhādīni indriyāni. Ārammaṇagahaṇakkhamānīti rūpādiārammaṇaṃ gahetuṃ samatthāni. Mātukucchigatakāle viya hi bahinikkhantakālepi na tāva indriyāni sakiccakāni honti, anukkamena pana visadabhāvaṃ pattakāle eva sakiccakāni honti. Tenevāha ‘‘idha paripakkattā āyatanāna’’nti. Āpāthagateti yogyadesāvaṭṭhite. Tameva yogyadesāvaṭṭhitaṃ rūpaṃ paṭicca ghaṭṭanā paccayaṃ laddhā. Ghaṭṭanāti paṭighāto, yena byāpārādivisesapaccayantarasahite cakkhussa visaye vikāruppattivisadisuppattivisayassa iṭṭhāniṭṭhabhāvena anuggaho, upaghāto cāti attho. Tatoti ghaṭṭanānantaraṃ. Ghaṭṭanānubhāvenāti ghaṭṭanābalena. Bhavaṅgacalananti bhavaṅgacittassa pakampanaṃ, tathā dvikkhattuṃ pavattiyā visadisassa kāraṇabhāvūpagamananti attho. Tañhi cittasantānassa purimāvatthāya bhinnāvatthāhetutāya calanaṃ viyāti ‘‘calana’’nti vuttaṃ. Visayavisayībhāvasiddhāya dhammatāya ārammaṇassa abhimukhībhāvena pasādassa tāva ghaṭṭanā hotu, aññasannissitassa pana bhavaṅgassa calanaṃ kathaṃ hotīti? Taṃsambandhabhāvato. Bheritale ṭhapitāsu sakkharāsu ekissā sakkharāya ghaṭitāya tadaññasakkharāyaṃ ṭhitamakkhikā calanaṃ cettha udāharaṇanti. Tadeva rūpanti tadeva bhavaṅgacalanassa paccayabhūtaṃ āpāthagataṃ rūpāyatanaṃ. Bhavaṅgaṃ vicchindamānā viyāti bhavaṅgasantānaṃ vicchindantī viya. Tadārammaṇuppattiyā parato bhavaṅgassa uppajjanato visayaggahaṇaṃ pañcadvārāvajjanaṃ vatvā tadanantaraṃ dassanādīsu vattabbesu tāni avatvā manodvārāvajjanassa gahaṇaṃ uddese dvinnaṃ āvajjanānaṃ āvajjanasāmaññena gahitattā.
“转向之后”,就是五门转向之后。有些人既不承认心所依处,也不承认领受等路心,但对这些人来说,经典中各处都出现了“于领受、眼识界”等巴利文句。因为巴利文句是无法否认的。巴利
Āvajjanānantaranti pañcadvārāvajjanānantaraṃ. Ye hadayavatthu viya sampaṭicchanādivīthicittānipi nānujānanti, tesaṃ ‘‘sampaṭicchanāya cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā’’tiādinā tattha tattha pāḷi āgatā. Na hi sakkā pāḷiṃ paṭisedhetuṃ.
“如果是大所缘”这句话,是就速行结束时的心识活动来说的。因为在这里,以十四个心刹那为寿命的所缘被称为“大”,而且应当知道,它生起之后,经过两三个心刹那,才以进入感知范围的方式呈现。巴利
‘‘Sacemahantaṃ hotī’’ti idaṃ javanapariyosānāya cittappavattiyā vuccamānattā vuttaṃ. Cuddasacittakkhaṇāyukañhi ārammaṇamidha ‘‘mahanta’’nti adhippetaṃ, tañca uppajjitvā dviticittakkhaṇātītaṃ hutvā āpāthagamanavasena veditabbaṃ.
对于“已确定”这句,意思是:按照确定的方式,也就是以确定作用所说明的方式,已经作了确定。因为已经说到了转向和确定,所以说“其余的欲界唯作”,这是用“其余”来概括剩下的部分。“六或七”里的“或”字,应当知道也包含了“或五”这种情况。因为在睡眠、昏厥等时候,五速行也能生起。巴利
Yathāvavatthāpiteti voṭṭhabbanena vuttākārena katavavatthāpane. Āvajjanāya, voṭṭhabbanassa ca vuttattā ‘‘avasesakāmāvacarakiriyāna’’nti avasesaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Cha satta vāti vā-saddena ‘‘pañca vā’’ti idampi vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Suttamucchitādikāle hi pañcapi javanāni javantīti.
这里说的“它们”,就是指依照《清净道论》“或八种”等说法所讲的那二十九种欲界速行心。为了说明除此以外,再没有别的心能在意门转向之后生起,所以特别用了“唯”这个字。“种姓者”这一说法,也包括了种姓位上的遍作和净化,并不只是指种姓心本身。“果心”,是指依等至而转起的果心。“凡已获得缘者”,是指在种姓心之后无间,任何以色界速行等形态获得生起之缘的速行。巴利
Tāniyevāti ‘‘aṭṭhannaṃ vā’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 2.455) vuttāni ekūnatiṃsa kāmāvacarajavanāniyeva. Ito aññaṃ manodvārāvajjanānantaraṃ uppajjanakacittaṃ nāma natthīti dassanatthaṃ evakāraggahaṇaṃ. ‘‘Gotrabhūto’’ti idaṃ gotrabhuṭṭhāniyānaṃ parikammavodānānampi gahaṇaṃ, na gotrabhuno eva. Phalacittānīti samāpattivasena pavattanakaphalacittāni. Yaṃ yaṃ laddhapaccayanti yaṃ yaṃ javanaṃ rūpāvacarajavanādivasena gotrabhuanantaraṃ uppattiyā laddhapaccayaṃ.
“极大”是指寿命有十六个心识刹那那么长。因为彼所缘心只在这种情况下一生起,别处不会生起。“明显”就是非常清楚,而且也只属于欲界。因为彼所缘只在那里生起。“在欲界速行结束时”,就是只在欲界速行的末尾。彼所缘不会紧跟由欲贪为因的业所生的广大速行和无上速行,因为广大速行和无上速行不能产生彼所缘,而且与能产生彼所缘的速行不相似。就像一个小男孩想从家里出去,他会跟着父亲或像父亲的人走,不会跟着别人;这里也是这样。而且,并不是从所有速行之后都能确定有彼所缘,因为彼所缘要由速行来决定,感受也要随所缘而转换。这里的规则是:欲界善、贪根、痴根中任何一种喜俱唯作速行之后,在极大所缘上,五种喜俱彼所缘中的一种会生起;同样,在欲界善、不善中任何一种舍俱唯作速行之后,六种舍俱彼所缘中的一种会转起。“依可爱所缘等”,是依照可爱、中可爱、不可爱所缘来说的,这是为了显示感受随所缘而转换。“依先前之业”,这是为了显示彼所缘的差别。因为并不是只有给结生的业才能产生彼所缘,其他业也能产生。不过,那种业所产生的东西,和给结生的业所应产生的彼所缘并不相同。“依速行心”,这是为了显示彼所缘的确定规则。因为前面说过,彼所缘要由速行来确定。“等”字包含了结生心。因为结生心不是比自己更强的彼所缘的缘。“凡已得缘者”,就是在上面所说的可爱所缘等当中,凡是已经具备彼所缘生起之缘的。“某些间隔”,就是某些刹那的间隔。“像水一样”,就像逆流而上的水一样。巴利
Atimahantanti soḷasacittakkhaṇāyukaṃ. Tattha hi tadārammaṇacittaṃ uppajjati, na aññattha. Vibhūtanti supākaṭaṃ, tañca kāmāvacarameva. Tattha hi tadārammaṇassa uppatti. Kāmāvacarajavanāvasāneti kāmāvacarajavanasseva avasāne. Na hi taṃ kāmataṇhāhetukakammanibbattaṃ mahaggatānuttarajavanaṃ anubandhati ajanakattā, janakāsadisattā ca. Yathā gehato bahi gantukāmo taruṇadārako janakaṃ, janakasadisaṃ vā anubandhati, na aññaṃ, evamidampi . Tatthāpi na sabbasmā javanā sabbaṃ javanena tadārammaṇassa niyametabbato, ārammaṇena ca vedanāya parivattetabbato. Tatthāyaṃ niyamo – parittakusalalobhamohamūlasomanassasahagatakiriyajavanānaṃ aññatarānantaraṃ atimahati visaye pañcannaṃ somanassasahagatānaṃ aññataraṃ tadārammaṇaṃ uppajjati, tathā parittakusalākusalaupekkhāsahagatakiriyajavanānaṃ aññatarānantaraṃ upekkhāsahagatānaṃ channaṃ tadārammaṇānaṃ aññataraṃ pavattati. Iṭṭhārammaṇādīnanti iṭṭhaiṭṭhamajjhattaaniṭṭhārammaṇānaṃ vasenāti sambandho. Tayidaṃ ārammaṇena vedanāparivattidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Purimakammavasenā’’ti idaṃ tadārammaṇavisesadassanatthaṃ. Na hi paṭisandhijanakameva kammaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ janeti, atha kho aññakammampi. Taṃ pana paṭisandhidāyinā kammena nibbattetabbatadārammaṇato visadisampi nibbattetīti. ‘‘Javanacittavasenā’’ti idaṃ tadārammaṇaniyamadassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Javanena tadārammaṇaṃ niyametabba’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena paṭisandhicittaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tañhi attano ukkaṭṭhatarassa tadārammaṇassa paccayo na hoti. Yo yo paccayo laddho hotīti yathāvuttesu iṭṭhārammaṇādīsu yo yo tadārammaṇassa uppattiyā paccayo samaveto hoti. Kiñci antaranti kiñci khaṇantaraṃ. Udakamivāti paṭisotaṃ gacchantaṃ udakamiva.
“两次或一次”这种说法,是为了让言辞顺畅才这样说的,就像“八或十”等例子那样(《增支部》8.11;《巴拉基格》11)。但实际上他们只说是两次。因为彼所缘是异熟心,而转向心离得很远,又因为根本有分等有分与有分在种类上是共同的,所以彼所缘适合在有分的所缘上生起,而那个速行的所缘就是它的所缘,因此称为“彼所缘”——这是省略了一个“所缘”的词,就像“欲界”“唇口”这样的说法一样。在这里,有些人认为:“《发趣论》中说‘善、不善灭去后,异熟以彼所缘性生起’(《发趣论》1.1.406),这只是说在异熟法之后才有彼所缘”,所以他们不接受唯作速行之后有彼所缘。他们认为:具有威力的速行就像船一样,有分的河流随顺它;而具足六支舍、寂静而转起的唯作速行,就像树叶做的小杯一样,有分的河流不随顺它。不过,即使某些说法在某个地方确实可以找到依据,但因为某种用意而在某处没有说出来,这种情况也是有的,比如在《法集论》讲不善的部分里,虽然增上缘确实存在,却没有提到它。而且,所举的树叶杯比喻,也和所要比喻的东西并不相同。因为船和树叶杯对于河流的漩涡和流向,情况本来就不一样,所以说有分的河流随顺船、不随顺树叶杯,这是合理的;但在这里,唯作速行和其他速行对于有分河流的漩涡和流向,情况是相同的,所以说有分河流不随顺前者、随顺后者,就不合理了。因此,这需要进一步考察。巴利
Dvikkhattuṃ sakiṃ vāti vacanasiliṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭha vā dasa vā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 11) viya. Dvikkhattuṃyeva pana vaṇṇenti. Vipākacittattā, āvajjanassa ca vidūrattā, mūlabhavaṅgādibhavaṅgasāmaññasabbhāvato ca bhavaṅgassa ārammaṇe pavattanārahaṃ samānaṃ tassa javanassa ārammaṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ etassāti tadārammaṇanti vuccati ekassa ārammaṇasaddassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘kāmāvacaraṃ, oṭṭhamukha’’nti ca yathā. Ettha ca keci ‘‘paṭṭhāne ‘kusalākusale niruddhe vipāko tadārammaṇatā uppajjatī’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.406) vipākadhammadhammānaṃ eva anantaraṃ tadārammaṇaṃ vutta’’nti kiriyājavanānantaraṃ na icchanti. Vipphāravantaṃ hi javanaṃ nāvaṃ viya nadīsoto bhavaṅgaṃ anubandhati, na pana chaḷaṅgupekkhāvato santavuttikiriyajavanaṃ paṇṇapuṭaṃ viya nadīsototi. Tayidaṃ labbhamānassāpi kenaci adhippāyena katthaci avacanaṃ dissati, yathā taṃ dhammasaṅgahe akusalaniddese labbhamānopi adhipati na vutto. Yañca paṇṇapuṭaṃ nidassitaṃ, tampi nidassitabbena na samānaṃ. Nāvāpaṇṇapuṭānañhi nadīsotassa āvaṭṭanaṃ, gati ca visadisīti nāvāya nadīsotassa anubandhanaṃ, paṇṇapuṭassa ananubandhanañca yujjati, idha pana kiriyajavanetarajavanānaṃ bhavaṅgasotassa āvaṭṭanaṃ, gati ca sadisīti etassa ananubandhanaṃ, itarassa anubandhanañca na yujjati. Tasmā vicāretabbaṃ.
“唯是有分”这个限定,是因为这里并不是指存在的终结。否则,在彼所缘结束时,死心也就根本不会生起。“见等”是指见、闻、嗅、尝、触。iti这个词是“等”的意思,因此应当知道领受等也被包括在内。从结生唯是有分,从有分唯是转向,这只是依照转起心的法则来说的。“那也”是指死心。死心和结生心、有分心一样,也只有十九种,因为意义上并无差别。巴利
Bhavaṅgamevāti avadhāraṇaṃ bhavapariyosānassa idha na adhippetattā. Aññathā tadārammaṇāvasāne cutipi na hotiyeva. Dassanādīnīti dassanasavanaghāyanasāyanaphusanāni. Iti-saddo ādiattho, tena sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Paṭisandhito bhavaṅgameva, bhavaṅgato āvajjanamevāti evaṃ pavattacittaniyamavaseneva. Tampīti cuticittampi. Paṭisandhibhavaṅgacittāni viya ekūnavīsatividhameva hoti atthato bhedābhāvato.
在有、趣、住、居处中,就是指在三有、五趣、七识住和九有情居中。不过,这里所说的无心众生不应被纳入,因为此处是在讨论识。这里的“在此处”应当和“流转轮回的众生”连起来理解。意思是:在这些处所中,按上面所说的方式流转轮回的众生,如果有人依正行道证得阿拉汉,那么这位阿拉汉的心,因为不再有结生,就只是归于寂灭。巴利
Bhavagatiṭhitinivāsesūti tīsu bhavesu, pañcasu gatīsu, sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu, navasu sattāvāsesu ca. Yo panettha acittako, so idha na gahetabbo viññāṇakathābhāvato. ‘‘Etthā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘saṃsaramānānaṃ sattāna’’nti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ. Ettha etesu vuttanayena saṃsaramānesu sattesu yo pana arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti sammāpaṭipattimanvāyāti adhippāyo. Tassa arahato niruddhameva hoti cittaṃ appaṭisandhikabhāvato.
受蕴论的注释巴利
Vedanākkhandhakathāvaṇṇanā
456 以感受的方式领纳、已生起的,就是“所受”;应当被认定为“所受”的那一类法,就是“所受相”。而它在意义上就是受,所以说“所谓所受相,就是受”。或者,“所受是它的相”,依据假立而成的差别,按照外位释复合词的方式,也可以称为受,所以说“所谓所受相,就是受”。“感受、感受着”,这是按遍满欲来说的,目的是显示受在自己的境界上反复生起。为了显示除了自性法之外没有别的作者,所以提出作者的说法。“iti”是不定的原因义;“kho”只是言辞上的装饰;“因此”是确定的意思。这里说的是:因为依缘而领纳所缘之味,所以称为受。巴利
456. Vedena anubhavanākārena ayitaṃ pavattaṃ vedayitaṃ, vedayitanti lakkhitabbadhammajātaṃ vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Taṃ pana atthato vedanā evāti āha ‘‘vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ nāma vedanāvā’’ti. Atha vā vedayitaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti kappanāsiddhaṃ bhedaṃ nissāya aññapadatthasamāsavasenāpi vedanāva vuccatīti āha ‘‘vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ nāma vedanāvā’’ti. Vedayati vedayatīti byāpanicchāvasena vacanaṃ vedanāya savisaye abhiṇhappavattidassanatthaṃ. Sabhāvadhammato añño kattā natthīti dassanatthaṃ kattuniddeso. Itīti aniyamato hetuattho. Khoti vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ. Tasmāti tassa niyamanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā yathāpaccayaṃ ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavati, tasmā vedanāti vuccatīti.
“与善识相应”这一说法,应当看作是对善受的界定。凡是善受,都与善识相应,但这并不是为了显示善受的善性得以成立。因为善受的善性并不是从与善识相应而来的,而是从如理作意等而来的。因此说“依生类”。在不善等情况下,道理也一样。然而,正如依生类,由于与善等识相应而有三类,同样,应当知道,从与八十九种识相应而有八十九类。所谓“依自性差别”,意思是不取由相应、地、所缘等而得的差别,只依自性本身的差别。巴利
‘‘Kusalaviññāṇenasampayuttā’’ti idaṃ kusalāya vedanāya upalakkhaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yā kāci kusalā vedanā, sabbā sā kusalena viññāṇena sampayuttāti, na pana tassā kusalabhāvasaṃsiddhidassanatthaṃ. Na hi kusalena viññāṇena sampayogato kusalāya vedanāya kusalabhāvo, atha kho yonisomanasikārādikato. Tenāha ‘‘jātivasenā’’ti. Akusalādīsupi eseva nayo. Yathā pana jātivasena kusalādiviññāṇasampayuttatāya tividhā, evaṃ yāva ekūnanavutiviññāṇasampayuttāti ekūnanavutividhā veditabbā. Sabhāvabhedatoti sampayuttabhūmiārammaṇādivasena labbhamānaṃ bhedaṃ aggahetvā kevalaṃ sabhāvakatabhedato evāti attho.
说了“五种”之后,为了说明这五种分类,接着说了“乐”等。其中,能带来快乐,所以叫乐,意思是让身体和与它相应的心法获得喜悦。或者,它能很好地咀嚼、破坏身体的疾病,所以叫乐。另一些人说:给它提供机会很容易,所以叫乐。能带来痛苦,所以叫苦,意思是逼迫身体和与它相应的心法。或者,它恶劣地咀嚼、破坏身体的快乐,所以叫苦。另一些人说:给它提供机会很难,所以叫苦。喜和舍的词义前面已经说过。忧应当依照喜的说法来理解。那么,为什么把乐和苦按心理上的喜悦与不喜悦区分开来,说成“乐、喜、苦、忧”,而舍却不管是心理上的还是另一种,都只作为一种来说呢?因为没有差别。正如乐和苦由于有饶益和损害的作用,对身体和对心的饶益与损害方式不同,舍却不是这样。所以,因为没有差别,舍就只作为一种来说。巴利
‘‘Pañcavidhā’’ti vatvā taṃ pañcavidhataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sukha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, kāyaṃ, sampayuttadhamme ca laddhassāde karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khādati, khaṇati vā kāyikaṃ ābādhanti sukhaṃ. Sukaraṃ okāsadānaṃ etassāti sukhanti apare. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, kāyaṃ, sampayuttadhamme ca vibādhatīti attho. Duṭṭhu vā khādati, khaṇati vā kāyikaṃ assādanti dukkhaṃ. Dukkaraṃ okāsadānaṃ etassāti dukkhanti apare. Somanassupekkhānaṃ saddattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Domanassassa somanasse vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ. Kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ mānasetarasātāsātavasena sukhaṃ, dukkhañca vibhajitvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sukhaṃ somanassaṃ dukkhaṃ domanassa’’nti, upekkhā pana mānasī, itarā ca ekadhāva vuttāti? Bhedābhāvato. Yathā hi anuggahūpaghātakatāya sukhadukkhāni aññathā kāyassa anuggahamupaghātañca karonti, aññathā manaso, na evamupekkhā. Tasmā bhedābhāvato ekadhāva upekkhā vuttāti.
在这里,受依自性差别而分为五种;这一点,要在它生起的场合被说明时才显得很清楚。所以,先为说明生起的场合,才开始了“其中”等话。在“由不善果报”这里,也要把“与身识相应”引来连接。就像把一团棉花放在砧板上,用铁锤打下去时,锤子穿过棉花团而打在砧板上,撞击就很强;同样,因为撞击和摩擦很强,面对可意的、可意中性的所缘时,身识就与乐俱行;面对不可意的、不可意中性的所缘时,就与苦俱行。所以说“善……略……苦”。欲界的果报识有五种,依业所缘而与喜俱行;色界的四种果报识依业而与喜俱行;其余的十三种欲界识、八种色界识、三十二种出世间识,则各随其所应,依心行所缘、足处等而与喜俱行。所以说“喜与六十二识相应”。忧与两种不善识相应,是依心行所缘等来说的。巴利
Tattha yena sabhāvabhedena vedanā pañcavidhā, sā pavattiṭṭhāne dassite supākaṭā hotīti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Akusalavipākenāti etthāpi ‘‘kāyaviññāṇena sampayutta’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Yathā adhikaraṇīmatthake kappāsapicupiṇḍaṃ ṭhapetvā ayokūṭena paharantassa picupiṇḍaṃ atikkamitvā kūṭaṃ adhikaraṇiṃ gaṇhāti, nighaṃso balavā hoti, evaṃ paṭighaṭṭanānighaṃsassa balavabhāvato iṭṭhe, iṭṭhamajjhatte ca ārammaṇe kāyaviññāṇaṃ sukhasahagataṃ hoti. Aniṭṭhe, aniṭṭhamajjhatte ca dukkhasahagatanti āha ‘‘kusala…pe… dukkha’’nti. Kāmāvacaravipākaviññāṇāni pañca kammārammaṇavasena somanassasahagatāni honti, rūpāvacaravipākāni cattāri kammavasena, sesāni terasa kāmāvacarāni, aṭṭha rūpāvacarāni, dvattiṃsa lokuttarāni, yathārahaṃ cetobhisaṅkhārārammaṇapādakādivasena somanassasahagatāni hontīti āha ‘‘somanassaṃ dvāsaṭṭhiyā viññāṇehi sampayutta’’nti. Domanassaṃ dvīhi akusalaviññāṇehi sampayuttaṃ cetobhisaṅkhārārammaṇādivasena.
“在其余的五十五种”是指:除去前面所说的六十六种识之后,剩下的那五十五种。其中,善果报和不善果报的识,对于可意和不可意的所缘,本来应该成为无分别地跟乐受或苦受相应的,但是,就像两团棉花互相碰触摩擦一样,两种所造色之间的撞击和摩擦太微弱了,所以依靠眼等所依的八种识,在一切情况下都只跟舍受相应。同样,乐受和苦受需要有强有力的缘,而这些识缺少这种强缘,因此它们也只跟舍受相应。转向识和领受识,依着以前没出现过的所缘和所依而生起;确定识以非同类法为无间缘,是造作的起点;以身体的苦为主导、作为不善果报近依的不善果报结生识等,以及在可意或中性所缘上生起的欲界善果报识——这些也都只跟舍受相应。或者,从业的角度来看,体验果报时,对于可意和不可意的所缘,不苦不乐的状态是合理的。当果报性的舍受处于乐和苦之间的中性状态时,应当知道:从业所缘的角度来说,善果报是可意的,不善果报是不可意的。剩下的三十七种识,则依心行所缘、足处等而跟舍受相应。因此,应当知道舍受与五十五种识相应。巴利
Avasesapañcapaññāsāyāti yathāvuttāni chasaṭṭhi viññāṇāni ṭhapetvā avasesāya pañcapaññāsāya. Tattha kusalākusalavipākāni iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu nibbikappakāni sukhadukkhasampayuttāni bhavituṃ yuttānipi dvinnaṃ picupiṇḍānaṃ viya dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ upādārūpānaṃ ghaṭṭanānighaṃsassa mandabhāvato cakkhādisannissitāni aṭṭhapi viññāṇāni sabbattha upekkhāsampayuttāneva honti, tathā balavapaccayatāya sukhadukkhānaṃ tesañca tadabhāvato. Apubbārammaṇanissayappavattīni āvajjanasampaṭicchanaviññāṇāni, asadisānantarappaccayaṃ kiriyārambhassa ādibhūtaṃ voṭṭhabbanaṃ, kāyadukkhapadhānatāya akusalaphalassa tadupanissayabhūtaṃ akusalavipākapaṭisandhiādi, iṭṭhamajjhattārammaṇappavattīni kāmāvacarakusalavipākaviññāṇāni ca upekkhāsahagatāniyeva honti. Kammavasena vā vipākānubhavanassa iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇesu adukkhamasukhabhāvo yutto. Sati ca vipākabhūtāya upekkhāya sukhadukkhamajjhattabhāve kammārammaṇavasena kusalavipākāya iṭṭhabhāvo, akusalavipākāya aniṭṭhabhāvo ca veditabbo. Avasiṭṭhāni pana sattatiṃsa viññāṇāni cetobhisaṅkhārārammaṇapādakādivasena upekkhāsampayuttāni hontīti evaṃ pañcapaññāsāya viññāṇehi upekkhāya sampayuttatā veditabbā.
所谓“自相”,就是诸法各自独有、不与其他法共通的自性;而“领纳”则是一切受共同的特征。为了用固定的所缘把它限定并显示出来,所以说“领纳可意触的特征就是乐”,因为乐不会偏离这个特征。“bhusaṃ brūhanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ upabrūhanaṃ”意思是强力的增长、增大、滋益。这种滋益固然在欲乐和心所乐里也能找到,但那是有分别的,而且是依心行而起的。这里说的身乐则是无分别的,因为它是自性成就的,所以比前者更殊胜,因此说“滋益相应法的作用”。被享受、被品味,就是“assāda”,也就是乐受。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,缘五取蕴而生起的乐和喜,诸比丘,这称为于五取蕴中的味。”(相应部3.26)因为依止于身,所以存在于身中的就是身乐味;这种味就是这样现起的,因此说“身乐味现起”。身根是它的近因,因为它没有别的依处。巴利
Salakkhaṇaṃ nāma dhammānaṃ anaññasādhāraṇo sabhāvo, anubhavanañca sabbavedanānaṃ sādhāraṇalakkhaṇanti taṃ paṭiniyatena ārammaṇena niyametvā dassento āha ‘‘iṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbānubhavanalakkhaṇaṃ sukha’’nti tassa byabhicārābhāvato. Bhusaṃ brūhanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ upabrūhanaṃ. Tayidaṃ kāmañca cetasikasukhepi labbhati, taṃ pana savikappakaṃ cetobhisaṅkhāravasenāpi hoti. Idantu nibbikappakaṃ sabhāvasiddhattā tato sātisayanti āha ‘‘sampayuttānaṃ upabrūhanarasa’’nti. Assādiyatīti assādo, sukhāvedanā. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, pañcupādānakkhandhe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, pañcupādānakkhandhesu assādo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.26). Kāyanissitattā kāye bhavo kāyiko, so eva assādo tathā paccupatiṭṭhatīti kāyikaassādapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāyindriyapadaṭṭhānaṃ anaññavatthukattā.
苦的相、味等,应该按照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
Dukkhassa lakkhaṇādīni vuttanayānusārena veditabbāni.
从自性或者从假想来说,它的特相就是体验可爱的所缘,也就是体验可爱所缘的特相。因此说“以这样或那样的方式,享受可爱之相的味道”,意思是以如实或不如实的可爱之相,受用所缘是它的作用,领受是它的功能。“轻安是它的近因”这句话,是依据“身轻安的人感受乐”这段经文说的,但它应当理解为属于离染的喜悦。巴利
Sabhāvato , parikappato vā iṭṭhassa ārammaṇassa anubhavanalakkhaṇaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇānubhavanalakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathā tathā vā iṭṭhākārasambhogarasa’’nti, yathābhūtena vā ayathābhūtena vā iṭṭhākārena ārammaṇassa saṃbhuñjanarasaṃ, paccanubhavanakiccanti attho. ‘‘Passaddhipadaṭṭhāna’’nti idaṃ ‘‘passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.376; a. ni. 11.12) suttapadaṃ nissāya vuttaṃ, taṃ pana nirāmisasomanassavasena veditabbaṃ.
与喜悦相反,应当知道忧的特相等。因为忧只生起于欲界,所以它必定以心所依处为近因,这就是它与喜悦的差别。巴利
Somanasse vuttavipariyāyena domanassassa lakkhaṇādīni veditabbāni. Domanassassa kāmadhātuyaṃ uppajjanato ekantena hadayavatthupadaṭṭhānatā tato viseso.
中舍受以所缘的中舍或中舍的感受与体验为特相,所以称为“中舍感受之特相”。正因为体验中舍,它的作用是不让相应诸法过度增长或萎缩。“寂静状态现起”这一句,应当依无过失的、离染的舍来理解,而不是依一切舍来理解。巴利
Majjhattassa, ārammaṇassa majjhattaṃ vā vedayitaṃ anubhavanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti majjhattavedayitalakkhaṇā. Majjhattānubhavanato eva sampayuttānaṃ nātiupabrūhanamilāpanarasā. ‘‘Santabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti idaṃ anavajjāya nirāmisāya upekkhāya vasena veditabbaṃ, na sabbāya.
想蕴论的注释巴利
Saññākkhandhakathāvaṇṇanā
457 关于“了知的特相”等等,也就是“想”这部分,凡是应当说明的内容,都要按照受蕴解说里已经讲过的方式来理解。巴利
457.Sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ nāma saññāvātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vedanākkhandhaniddese vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
确实,与受不相应的识并不存在,但由于受的自性各不相同,识也与某种受相应、与某种受不相应。想却没有这种情况,所以说“没有那样的识……与想不相应”。巴利
Kāmaṃ vedanāyapi vippayuttaṃ viññāṇaṃ natthi, tassā pana sabhāvato bhinnattā kāyaci vedanāya sampayuttampi kāyaci vippayuttaṃ hoti. Saññāya pana īdisaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘na hi taṃ viññāṇaṃ…pe… saññāyā’’ti.
“一切”是指四地的一切想。或者,受因为自性不同,所以从坏灭特相等角度来解说,想却不是这样;一切想都以了知为特相。它对青等种种所缘加以认知,以认知为想,了知就是它的特相,所以称为了知特相。因此,它以标记而了知,所以说它的作用是再了知。确实,依相再了知就是它的作用。应当理解为:就像木匠在木材上做了标记,后来凭那个标记再认出来的情形。所以说“即此”等。再了知的缘就是再了知缘,那相就是再了知之相,那造作就是再了知缘的相造作;或者说,作为再了知缘的相造作就是它的作用,所以称为再了知缘相造作作用。再了知相造作、相作者、以相了知者,应当理解为通于一切想。执取造作应当只看作“此即真实”的想执取,因为它以如所现前的境为近因,是无分别的自性。与智相应的想则随顺于智,所以不是执取作者,也不是颠倒执取者。由此应当知道,与定相应故,也不是不久住。同样,与贪、见、慢等相应的想,就有随顺贪等的情形。巴利
Sabbāvāti catubhūmikāpi. Atha vā yathā vedanā bhinnasabhāvattā bhedanalakkhaṇādito vuttā, na evamayaṃ, ayaṃ pana sabbāva sañjānanalakkhaṇā . Nīlādibhedassa ārammaṇassa sañjānanaṃ saññaṃ katvā jānanaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti sañjānanalakkhaṇā. Tathā hi sā abhiññāṇena sañjānanato paccābhiññāṇarasāti vuccati. Nimittena hi puna sañjānanakiccā paccābhiññāṇarasā. Tassā vaḍḍhakissa dārumhi abhiññāṇaṃ katvā tena abhiññāṇena paccābhijānanakāle pavatti veditabbā. Tenāha ‘‘tadeveta’’ntiādi. Puna sañjānanassa paccayo punasañjānanapaccayo, tadeva nimittaṃ puna…pe… nimittaṃ, tassa karaṇaṃ, puna…pe… karaṇaṃ, punasañjānanapaccayabhūtaṃ vā nimittakaraṇaṃ puna…pe… karaṇaṃ, tadassā kiccanti punasañjānanapaccayanimittakaraṇarasā. Punasañjānananimittakaraṇaṃ nimittakārikāya, nimittena sañjānanantiyā ca sabbāya saññāya samānaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Abhinivesakaraṇaṃ ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 202, 203, 427; ma. ni. 3.27-29) saññābhinivesamatteneva daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathāupaṭṭhitavisayapadaṭṭhānā avikappasabhāvattā. Ñāṇasampayuttā pana saññā ñāṇameva anuvattati, tasmā abhinivesakārikā, viparītaggāhikā ca na hoti. Eteneva samādhisampayuttatāya aciraṭṭhānatā ca na hotīti veditabbā. Evaṃ rāgadiṭṭhimānādisampayuttāya saññāya rāgādianuvattikabhāvoti.
行蕴的解说注释巴利
Saṅkhārakkhandhakathāvaṇṇanā
458 积聚的特相,就是集合的特相,因此诸行被称为有积集的作用。因为以思为主导,行蕴的诸法才被这样说。所以才有“那么那是什么?就是诸行”等说法。其中,造作所造的意思是:以使自己的果——所造——完全成就的方式去造作。扩展现起中,扩展就是具有扩展性,因此意思是具有作用的现起。巴利
458.Rāsikaraṇalakkhaṇanti sampiṇḍanalakkhaṇaṃ, tato saṅkhārā āyūhanarasā vuccanti. Cetanāpadhānatāya hi saṅkhārakkhandhadhammā evaṃ vuttā. Tenevāha ‘‘kiṃ pana tanti saṅkhārāyevā’’tiādi. Tattha saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti yathā attano phalaṃ saṅkhataṃ sammadeva nipphannaṃ hoti, evaṃ abhisaṅkharontīti attho. Vipphārapaccupaṭṭhānāti ettha vipphāro nāma vipphāravantatā, tasmā sabyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānāti attho.
在每一种心生起时,它们都必定随之生起,所以是“决定”的。它们是以自身的真实形态出现在巴利圣典中的,因此不是把它们放在后面才说,而是直接以它们自身的形态出现在圣典里。因为它们只是偶尔才生起,所以是“不定”的。虽然是不定的,它们并不会同时一起生起,但在那种心中,由于它们有生起的法性,所以说为“三十六”。因此说:“即使生起时,也不是一起生起的。”巴利
Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ citte uppanne niyamena uppajjanato niyatā. Sarūpena āgatāti evaṃ piṭṭhivattake akatvā pāḷiyā sarūpeneva āgatā. Kadācideva uppajjanato na niyatāti aniyatā. Yadipi aniyatā ekajjhaṃ na uppajjanti, tasmiṃ pana citte uppajjanadhammatāya ‘‘chattiṃsā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uppajjamānāpi ca na ekato uppajjantī’’ti.
459 459.“触”是就施动者而作的说明。其中涉及的原因,前面已经讲过。或者,因为依它而触,所以叫“触”。因为相应诸法在所缘中现起时,就像是以触的特相在触碰。或者,仅仅触碰所缘就叫“触”,这三种语义构成方式都能成立。对于自性法来说,用施动者构成和工具构成来表达,是顺应那种行相而作的假说;只有用状态构成来表达,才是直说,所以说“以触为特相”。接下来“这个……”等话,是为了证明前面所说的特相等内容。如果这个法是心所,而它又是无色法,那它怎么能有触的特相、撞击的作用等呢?为了消除心中这个疑问,所以说“虽然是无色法”等。其中,“以触碰的行相而现起”这句话说明,即使是无色,这个法也有这样的自性。而这种以触碰行相现起的情况,在以下例子中可以清楚地看出来:看见别人吃酸芒果等时,旁人会流口水;看见他人遭受伤害时,有悲悯心的人身体会颤动;看见有人站在树枝顶端时,站在地上的胆小者双腿会发抖;看见鬼怪等可怕之物时,大腿会僵直,等等。巴利
459.Phusatīti kattuniddeso. Yaṃ tattha kāraṇaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Phusanti etenāti vā phasso. Sampayuttadhammā hi ārammaṇe pavattamānā taṃ phusanalakkhaṇena phassena phusantā viya honti. Ārammaṇaphusanamattaṃ vā phassoti sādhanattayampi yujjateva. Sabhāvadhammesu kattukaraṇasādhanavacanaṃ tadākārasamāropanato pariyāyakathā, bhāvasādhanavacanameva nippariyāyakathāti vuttaṃ ‘‘phusanalakkhaṇo’’ti. Ayañhītiādi yathāvuttalakkhaṇādisamatthanaṃ. Yadi ayaṃ dhammo cetasiko, svāyaṃ arūpadhammo samāno kathaṃ phusanalakkhaṇo, saṅghaṭṭanarasādiko ca hotīti antolīnaṃ codanaṃ hadaye ṭhapetvā tassa sodhanatthaṃ ‘‘arūpadhammopi samāno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘phusanākāreneva pavattatī’’ti iminā arūpassāpi tassa dhammassa ayaṃ sabhāvoti dasseti. Sā ca tassa phusanākārappavatti ambilaambapakkādiṃ khādantaṃ passantassa parassa kheḷuppatti, paraṃ vibādhiyamānaṃ disvā dayālukassa sarīrakampanaṃ, rukkhasākhagge duṭṭhitaṃ purisaṃ disvā bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitassa bhīrukapurisassa jaṅghacalanaṃ, pisācādibhāyitabbaṃ disvā ūrukhambhoti evamādīsu paribyattā hoti.
“一部分”是指像两根木棍等那样,只以自己的某一侧(接触)。“即使不黏着”是指即使不被粘合。与色、声等一起时,触的共同点只是不黏着的撞击,而不是成为所缘的状态。正如色、声对于眼、耳,虽然不黏着,却被说成“已触”等,同样,触也是对所缘的接触和撞击。而撞击,就是触使心与所缘会合的状态。因此说“撞击心与所缘”。以作用之义、以味而说为撞击味,或者由于依处与所缘的会合而成就,所以具有撞击成就的触即称为撞击味。如同“两手相击”的例子中,手与手的撞击是那特殊的色法,同样,心于所缘的撞击也应被视为那特殊的一个心所法。由于“三者和合为触”的说法,应理解为眼、色、识等以和合的方式来把握,所以说“称为三者和合的”等。作为那触之因的、与它相应的作意,称为彼相应作意。意思是:根朝向于彼,以及作意令成为所缘,即境被准备、被作成,从而令识成为以境为对象的状态。如同无皮的牛无论走到哪里,处处都只遭受痛苦,同样,当触存在时,受必定生起。而受具有苦箭等性质,所以说“然而由于是受的立足处,应被视为犹如无皮牛一般”。巴利
Ekadesenāti kaṭṭhadvayādi viya attano ekapassena. Anallīyamānopīti asaṃsiliyamānopi. Rūpasaddehi saha phassassa sāmaññaṃ anallīyamānasaṅghaṭṭanameva, na visayabhāvo. Yathā rūpasaddā cakkhusotāni anallīyamānā eva ‘‘phusita’’ntiādinā vuttā, evaṃ phassassāpi ārammaṇaphusanasaṅghaṭṭanānīti. Saṅghaṭṭanañca phassassa cittārammaṇānaṃ sannipatanabhāvo eva. Tenāha ‘‘cittamārammaṇañca saṅghaṭṭetī’’ti. Kiccaṭṭhena rasena saṅghaṭṭanarasatā vuttā, vatthārammaṇasannipātena vā sampajjatīti saṅghaṭṭanasampattiko phasso saṅghaṭṭanaraso vutto. Yathā ‘‘dve pāṇī vajjeyyu’’ntiādīsu (mi. pa. 2.3.8) pāṇissa pāṇimhi saṅghaṭṭanaṃ tabbisesabhūtā rūpadhammā, evaṃ cittassa ārammaṇe saṅghaṭṭanaṃ tabbisesabhūto eko cetasikadhammo daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’ti (ma. ni. 1.204; 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-44; 4.60) vacanato cakkhurūpaviññāṇādīnaṃ saṅgativasena gahetabbattā āha ‘‘tikasannipātasaṅkhātassā’’tiādi. Tassa phassassa kāraṇabhūto tadanurūpo samannāhāro tajjāsamannāhāro. Indriyassa tadabhimukhabhāvo, āvajjanāya ca ārammaṇakaraṇaṃ visayassa parikkhatatā abhisaṅkhatatā, viññāṇassa visayabhāvakaraṇanti attho. Yathā niccammā gāvī yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatā, tattha tattha dukkhameva pāpuṇāti, evaṃ phasse sati vedanā uppajjateva. Vedanā ca dukkhasallādisabhāvāti vuttaṃ ‘‘vedanādhiṭṭhānabhāvato pana niccammagāvī viya daṭṭhabbo’’ti.
460 它连接、系缚、令转起。思的状态就是活动的状态。策励、思、发动、安排、审察。当具有策励之味的思正在转起时,一切相应法也都各自承担起自己的作用,因此它被称为能成就自作用与他作用。就像最年长的学僧督促其他学僧背诵时,自己也背诵;又像大木匠开始做木匠活时,其他人也跟着做。以殷重的状态,就是以热忱的状态,因为它自身就是殷重,也让相应法殷重。这里的策励应当从策励的方式来看,而不是从精进策励的方式来看。巴利
460.Abhisandahati pabandhati pavatteti. Cetanābhāvo byāpārabhāvo. Āyūhanaṃ cetayanaṃ īriyanaṃ. Saṃvidahanaṃ vicāraṇaṃ. Āyūhanarasāya cetanāya pavattamānāya sabbepi sampayuttadhammā yathāsakaṃ kiccappasutā hontīti sā sakiccaparakiccasādhikā vuttā. Jeṭṭhasisso pare sajjhāyane uyyojento sayampi sajjhāyati. Mahāvaḍḍhakimhi vaḍḍhakikammaṃ kātumāraddhe itarepi karontiyeva. Ussāhanabhāvenāti ādarakaraṇabhāvena. Sā hi sayaṃ ādarabhūtā sampayuttadhamme ādarayatīti. Āyūhanavasena ussāhanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na vīriyussāhavasena.
461 “英雄的状态”是指:因为有了它,才成为英雄,那个法就是这里的意思。或者,按照方法应当发起、应当持续进行的,就是精进,也就是努力、着手做各种应做的事,或者勇猛。支持,就是不让相应法堕入懈怠那一方,而是持守它们、给它们力量,或者激励它们。不沉没,是沉没的对治法,并不只是“没有沉没”这件事本身;因为它是作为不沉没的状态而现起的,所以说“以不沉没的状态为现起”。“以悚惧为近因”是指:以八种悚惧事为先导的善行,其精进发起的依据和近因。所谓“有路可行,路已走过;有事应做,事已做过;轻微的病生起了,已从病中痊愈;病愈不久;为了乞食而游走于村庄或城镇时,没有得到粗劣或精美食物的足够满足,或者已经得到满足”——这些就是所说的八种精进发起的依据,它们与适当的审察相伴,或者是以这些为依据的审察。巴利
461.Vīrabhāvoti yena vīro nāma hoti, so dhammoti attho. Vidhinā īretabbaṃ pavattetabbanti vā vīriyaṃ, ussāho, taṃtaṃkiccasamārambho, parakkamo vā. Upatthambhanaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā dhāraṇaṃ anubalappadānaṃ, sampaggaṇhanaṃ vā. Saṃsīdanapaṭipakkho dhammo asaṃsīdanaṃ, na saṃsīdanābhāvamattanti asaṃsīdanabhāvena paccupatiṭṭhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘asaṃsīdanabhāvapaccupaṭṭhāna’’nti. Saṃvegapadaṭṭhānanti aṭṭhasaṃvegapubbikāya (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.418) kusalakiriyāya vīriyārambhavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Maggo gantabbo hoti, maggo gato, kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, kammaṃ kataṃ, appamattako ābādho uppanno, gilānā vuṭṭhito hoti, aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya vicaranto na labhati lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, labhati…pe… pāripūri’’nti evaṃ vuttāni etāni anurūpapaccavekkhaṇāsahitāni aṭṭha vīriyārambhavatthūni, taṃmūlakāni vā paccavekkhaṇāni.
462 对那些应由自己保护的俱生法的保护,就是命的运作;同时,这也是那些俱生法的活命。因此,把这一点作为它们活命的原因来强调,才说“它们靠这个而活”。而且,从意义上说,那也只是活命本身,所以说“或者,那仅仅是活命本身”。巴利
462. Attanā anupāletabbānaṃ sahajātadhammānaṃ anupālanaṃ jīvitassa byāpāro, tañca nesaṃ jīvananti taṃ tassa kāraṇabhāvaṃ purakkhatvā vuttaṃ ‘‘jīvanti tenā’’ti. Tampi cassa atthato jīvanamevāti āha ‘‘jīvanamattameva vā ta’’nti.
463 “Adhiyati”的意思是安放、确立。不散乱,就是它自身本来就不散失的性质。不散乱,就是与它相应的诸法处于不散乱的状态。让相应诸法不散乱的那个法,就叫作“不散乱”。由于它直接对治以不寂静为特征的散乱,所以以让心安寂的方式呈现,因此说它“以寂静为现起”。“Visesato”的意思是通常、多数情况下。因为即使没有快乐,也仍然可以有定。通过灯焰的比喻,可以说明定持续安住的状态。巴利
463.Ādhiyatīti ṭhapeti. Avisāro attano eva avisaraṇasabhāvo. Avikkhepo sampayuttānaṃ dhammānaṃ avikkhittatā. Yena sampayuttā avikkhittā honti, so dhammo avikkhepoti. Avūpasamalakkhaṇassa vikkhepassa paṭipakkhatāya cittassa upasamanākārena paccupatiṭṭhatīti upasamapaccupaṭṭhāno. Visesatoti yebhuyyena. Sukhavirahitopi hi atthi samādhīti. Dīpaccinidassanena santānaṭhitibhāvaṃ samādhissa dasseti.
464 信以“相信”这一作用而现起,对那些法以增上缘的方式,显示出信是它们的缘。因为当那些法有这样的缘时,人们就会说“这个人相信”。信,是对值得相信之事的归投;这是它的特相,所以信以归投为特相。以“信解”为特相,是指进入之后认可“就是这样”,所以以信解为特相。清除污浊与垢染,使相应法或人本身变得清净、没有污浊,这是它的作用,所以以清净为作用。信入,是以决意的方式进入所缘。没有污浊的状态,就是无浊性,也就是没有污浊的意思。在应当生起净信的地方,与净信相反的不善法是无信和邪胜解;与它们正相反的、以事理为基础的确定胜解,才是具有净信性质的胜解,而不是掉举之类的胜解。三宝、业和业果,是值得相信的事。亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、法随法行,是入流支。应当这样看待信:在执取善法时,它像手;在成就一切圆满时,它像财富;在结出不死寂静之果时,它像种子。巴利
464.Saddahantietāyāti saddahanakiriyāya pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ tattha ādhipaccabhāvena saddhāya paccayataṃ dasseti. Tassā hi dhammānaṃ tathāpaccayabhāve sati puggalo saddahatīti vohāro hoti. Saddahanaṃ saddheyyavatthuno pattiyāyanaṃ, taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti saddahanalakkhaṇā. Okappanalakkhaṇāti anupavisitvā evametanti kappanalakkhaṇā. Kālussiyamalaṃ vidhametvā sampayuttānaṃ, puggalasseva vā pasādanaṃ anāvilabhāvakaraṇaṃ raso etissāti pasādanarasā. Pakkhandanaṃ adhimuccanavasena ārammaṇassa anupavisanaṃ. Akālusabhāvo akālussiyaṃ, anāvilabhāvoti attho. Pasādanīyaṭṭhānesu pasādaviparītaṃ akusalaṃ assaddhiyaṃ, micchādhimutti ca, tappaccanīkova pasādabhūto vatthugato nicchayo adhimutti, na yevāpanakādhimokkho. Ratanattayaṃ, kammaṃ, kammaphalañca saddheyyavatthu. Sappurisasaṃsevanasaddhammasavanayonisomanasikāradhammānudhammappaṭipattiyo sotāpattiyaṅgāni. Kusaladhammānaṃ ādāne hatthaṃ viya, sabbasampattisampadāne vittaṃ viya, amatakasiphalaphalane bījaṃ viya daṭṭhabbā.
465 他们依此而忆念:这是说,对于那些以忆念活动而现起的诸法,正念以增上缘的方式显示自己作为它们的缘。因为当诸法有那样的缘时,具足该法的人就被称为“忆念者”。忆念就像不让葫芦在水上漂浮,而像石头一样安住不动,把所缘固定下来,令不忘失、不漂散。它的作用是不忘失,也就是与忘失相反的作用,而不只是“没有忘失”而已。从“以正念守护的心”这句话来看,它的现起是守护。从别处而来、面向心的境域,这叫“面对所缘”,这就是正念。作为正念所依的身等,即是身等念处;或者,前一个正念就是后一个正念的近因。巴利
465.Saranti tāyāti saraṇakiriyāya pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ tattha ādhipaccabhāvena satiyā paccayataṃ dasseti. Tassā hi dhammānaṃ tathāpaccayabhāve sati taṃsamaṅgipuggalo saratīti vohāro hoti. Udake alābu viya pilavitvā gantuṃ adatvā pāsāṇassa viya niccalassa ārammaṇassa ṭhapanaṃ saraṇaṃ asammuṭṭhatākaraṇaṃ apilāpanaṃ. Sammosapaccanīkaṃ kiccaṃ asammoso, na sammosābhāvamattaṃ. ‘‘Satārakkhena cetasā’’ti (a. ni. 10.20) vacanato ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā. Aññato āgantvā cittavisaye abhimukho bhavati etāyāti visayābhimukhabhāvo, sati. Satiyā vatthubhūtā kāyādayova kāyādisatipaṭṭhānāni, sati eva vā purimā pacchimāya padaṭṭhānaṃ.
466 “由身恶行等”这句话里,用的是表示原因的具格。惭,就是以羞耻的方式厌恶恶行。所谓“正是由那些”,就是指由那些身恶行等本身。愧,就是感到恐惧不安。惭把恶法看成粪便一样而厌恶,所以说“惭以厌恶恶行为特相”。愧把那些恶法看成炽热之物一样而害怕,因此说“愧以怖畏为特相”。所谓“以所说的方式”,就是指以羞耻的方式和以怖畏的方式。惭以尊重自己为依托,因为它是从内部生起,以自己为主导。愧以尊重他人为依托,因为它是从外部生起,以世间为主导。为了让这个意思更加清楚,所以说了“以自己……”等话。惭和愧从内部生起等特征,在各处都已经明确说过,但这并不是说它们有时会彼此分离。因为不存在没有怖畏的羞耻,也不存在对恶行没有羞耻的怖畏。关于“世间守护者”,这里应当引用经文“诸比丘,有两种白法守护世间”,以及关于以自己为主导、以世间为主导的经文:“他以自己为主导之后……他以世间为主导之后……”来说明。巴利
466.Kāyaduccaritādīhīti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ. Hiriyatīti lajjākārena jigucchati. Tehiyevāti kāyaduccaritādīhiyeva. Ottappatīti ubbijjati. Hirī pāpadhamme gūthaṃ viya passantī jigucchatīti āha ‘‘pāpato jigucchanalakkhaṇā hirī’’ti. Ottappaṃ te uṇhaṃ viya passantaṃ tato uttasatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘uttāsalakkhaṇaṃ ottappa’’nti. Vuttappakārenāti lajjākārena, uttāsākārena ca. Attagāravapadaṭṭhānā hirī ajjhattasamuṭṭhānatāya, attādhipatitāya ca. Paragāravapadaṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānatāya, lokādhipatitāya ca. Tamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘attānaṃhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ajjhattasamuṭṭhānāditā ca hiriottappānaṃ tattha tattha pākaṭabhāvena vuttā, na panetesaṃ kadāci aññamaññavippayogā. Na hi lajjanaṃ nibbhayaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ atthīti. Lokapālakāti ettha ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, sukkā dhammā lokaṃ pālentī’’ti (a. ni. 2.9; itivu. 42) suttapadaṃ attādhipati, lokādhipatibhāve ca ‘‘so attānaṃyeva adhipatiṃ karitvā, so lokaṃyeva adhipatiṃ karitvā’’ti (a. ni. 3.40) ca suttapadāni āharitvā vattabbāni.
467 因为无贪是贪的对立面,凡是与它相应的法,或者具足无贪的有情,都不会因它而贪;无贪本身在任何时候也都不贪,或者从意义上说,它本身就是不贪的状态,所以说“不贪”等。同样的道理,以“他们不嗔恚”等说法,指出了三种行为者的关联方式。无贪,就是不渴望、不希求。无粘着,就是不执取。无执持,就是对任何事物都不以“我的”心态去执取。不亲近的状态就是它的意趣,所以叫不亲近的状态。这样,譬喻才能对应得上。巴利
467. Yasmā lobhapaṭipakkho alobhoti ye dhammā tena sampayuttā, taṃsamaṅgino vā sattā tena na lubbhanti, sayaṃ kadācipi na lubbhateva, atthato vā alubbhanākāro eva ca hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘na lubbhantī’’tiādi. Eseva nayoti ‘‘na dussanti tenā’’tiādinā kārakattayayojanaṃ atidisati. Agedho agijjhanaṃ anabhikaṅkhanaṃ. Alaggabhāvo anāsattatā. Apariggaho kassaci vatthuno mamattavasena asaṅgaho. Anallīno bhāvo adhippāyo etassāti anallīnabhāvo. Evañhi upamāya sameti.
468 468. 凶暴者的状态就是凶暴,也就是愤怒。与它相对的是不凶暴,也就是没有嗔恨。没有对立,没有争斗。随顺的朋友,就是随顺跟随的人。律的滋味,就是调伏的滋味。柔和的状态,是以像醍醐一样令人欢喜为本质。巴利
468. Caṇḍikassa bhāvo caṇḍikkaṃ, kopo. Tappaṭipakkho acaṇḍikkaṃ, abyāpādo. Avirodho aviggaho. Anukūlamitto anuvattako. Vinayarasoti vinayanaraso. Sommabhāvo mejjanavasena hilādanīyatā.
469 诸法各自的自性,如其自性而通达,就是如实通达。没有错失、没有偏离地通达,就是无错失通达。照亮所缘,就是破除遮蔽所缘的愚痴黑暗,这就是照亮所缘。在任何所缘上都以不迷惑的方式现起,或者以与愚痴对立而使愚痴不存在的方式现起,所以说“无痴为现起”。作为一切善法的根本,是说通过使一切四地善法稳固安住而成为它们的基础,并不是通过成就那些法的善性。因为如果善法的善性系属于善根,那么于由它们所生的色法中就不会有因缘性。事实上,它们并不成就那些法的善性等,但也并非不是缘。正如所说:“因对因相应诸法以及由它们所生的色法,以因缘为缘。”就像善性一样,无记性也会系属于无记根。如果这样,无因心的无记性就不会存在;在不善法中,如果只有一根,它的不善性也不会存在。然而两者确实都存在。因此,善性等并非系属于根,而是系属于如理作意等。但应当知道,根是使它们稳固安住的成就者。巴利
469. Dhammānaṃ yo yo sabhāvo yathāsabhāvo, tassa tassa paṭivijjhanaṃ yathāsabhāvapaṭivedho. Akkhalitaṃ avirajjhitvā paṭivedho akkhalitapaṭivedho. Visayassa obhāsanaṃ tappaṭicchādakasammohandhakāravidhamanaṃ visayobhāsanaṃ. Katthacipi visaye asammuyhanākāreneva paccupatiṭṭhati, sammohapaṭipakkhatāya vā tadabhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti asammohapaccupaṭṭhāno. Sabbakusalānaṃ mūlabhūtāti sabbesaṃ catubhūmakakusaladhammānaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanena patiṭṭhābhūtā, na tesaṃ kusalabhāvasādhanena. Yadi hi tesaṃ kusalabhāvo kusalamūlapaṭibaddho siyā, evaṃ sati taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpesu hetupaccayatā na siyā. Na hi te tesaṃ kusalādibhāvaṃ sādhenti, na ca paccayā na honti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘hetū hetusampayuttakānaṃ dhammānaṃ taṃsamuṭṭhānānañca rūpānaṃ hetupaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.1). Yathā ca kusalabhāvo, evaṃ abyākatabhāvopi abyākatamūlappaṭibaddho siyā. Tathā sati ahetukacittānaṃ abyākatabhāvo eva na siyā, akusalesu ca yattha ekaṃyeva mūlaṃ, tassa akusalabhāvo na siyā, ubhayampi hotiyeva. Tasmā na mūlappaṭibaddho kusalādibhāvo, atha kho yonisomanasikārādipaṭibaddho. Tesaṃ pana suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanāni mūlānīti gahetabbaṃ.
470 轻安,就是躁动的平息。“身”这个词是集合名词,这里指的是受等三蕴,所以说“这里说的‘身’就是受等三蕴”。因此又说:“其中,那时什么是身轻安?就是那时受蕴的……”等等(《法集论》40)。躁动,就是激动,这是指以忧受为缘、以掉举为主的烦恼,或者是指这样生起的四蕴。通过消除躁动,远离热恼和颤动,就是清凉的状态——没有颤动的清凉。以掉举为首的烦恼,就是掉举等烦恼;或者是以掉举为开头,统摄一切烦恼。其余各项也是同样的道理。巴利
470.Passambhanaṃ darathavūpasamo. Kāyasaddo samūhavācī, so ca kho vedanādikkhandhattayavasenāti āha ‘‘kāyoti cettha vedanādayo tayo khandhā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘tattha katamā tasmiṃ samaye kāyapassaddhi hoti? Yā tasmiṃ samaye vedanākkhandhassā’’tiādi (dha. sa. 40). Daratho sārambho, domanassapaccayānaṃ uddhaccādhikānaṃ kilesānaṃ, tathāpavattānaṃ vā catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Darathanimmaddanena pariḷāhaparipphandavirahito sītibhāvo aparipphandasītibhāvo. Uddhaccappadhānā kilesā uddhaccādikilesā, uddhaccaṃ vā ādiṃ katvā sabbakilese saṅgaṇhāti. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
沉重性就是迟钝,这是对以昏沉和睡眠为主的烦恼,或对这样现起的四蕴的称呼。与迟钝相对的是不迟钝,而不只是迟钝的不存在。巴利
Garubhāvo dandhatā, thinamiddhādhikānaṃ, tathāpavattānaṃ vā catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Dandhatāya paṭipakkho adandhatā, na dandhatāya abhāvamattaṃ.
僵硬的状态就是“僵硬”,这是以见和慢为增上者、或以它们为主要者之四蕴的称呼。正因为消除了僵硬的状态,它们在任何所缘上都能以无障碍的方式现起;或者为相应法在那里呈现无障碍,所以说“以无障碍为现起”。巴利
Thaddhabhāvo thambho, diṭṭhimānādhikānaṃ, tappadhānānaṃ vā catunnaṃ khandhānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Thaddhabhāvanimmaddanato eva katthaci ārammaṇe appaṭihatākārena paccupatiṭṭhanti, sampayuttānaṃ vā tattha appaṭighātaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpentīti appaṭighātapaccupaṭṭhānā.
业的善巧状态就是堪能性,不堪能的状态就是不堪能性,也就是对布施、持戒等福德行为没有能力。从含义上说,这就是欲贪等杂染法,或者以它们为主的四种不善蕴。以堪能性本身圆满地执取所缘,就是所缘成就。前面说过的其余部分,即欲贪等,以及与它们同类的杂染法,也就是其余诸盖等。由于摧毁了系缚,成为乐生起的原因,所以在能生净信的事物上带来净信。就像黄金的纯净一样,如同离垢的黄金能够用于各种庄严装饰,这颗心也因杂染的离去而能够用于利益之行。巴利
Kammani sādhu kammaññaṃ, na kammaññaṃ akammaññaṃ, tassa bhāvo akammaññabhāvo, dānasīlādipuññakiriyāyaṃ ayogyatā. Atthato kāmacchandādisaṃkilesadhammā, tappadhānā vā cattāro akusalakkhandhā. Kammaññabhāveneva sampannākārena ārammaṇassa gahaṇaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇasampatti. Vuttāvasesā kāmacchandādayo, tadekaṭṭhā ca saṃkilesadhammā avasesanīvaraṇādayo. Vinibandhanimmaddanena sukhappavattihetutāya pasādanīyavatthūsu pasādāvahā. Suvaṇṇavisuddhi viyāti yathā suvaṇṇavisuddhi apagatakāḷakā alaṅkāravikativiniyogakkhamā, evamayampi saṃkilesavigamena hitakiriyāviniyogakkhamā.
身与心的病态,就是不信等,以及与它们同俱的恶法。与病态相反的是无病,这些法具有无病的状态作为特相,所以说是以无病状态为特相。正因为摧破了前面所说的病态,这些法就没有过患和过失;或者说,这些法不会以贫乏、不幸的方式生起,所以是无过患。它们以那种方式现起,或者使与它们相应的心所现起为无过患,所以说是以无过患为现起。巴利
Kāyacittānaṃ gelaññaṃ, assaddhiyādi, tadekaṭṭhā ca pāpadhammā. Gelaññapaṭipakkho agelaññaṃ , tabbhāvo lakkhaṇaṃ etāsanti agelaññabhāvalakkhaṇā. Yathāvuttagelaññanimmaddaneneva natthi etāsaṃ ādīnavo doso, na vā etā ādīnaṃ kapaṇaṃ vanti pavattantīti nirādīnavā, tenākārena paccupatiṭṭhanti, taṃ vā sampayuttesu paccupaṭṭhapentīti nirādīnavapaccupaṭṭhānā.
应当理解为与身和心都相关的正直状态,所以它以身心正直为特相。由于它彻底压伏了所谓犁头弯、月牙尖弯、牛尿弯这类身心的歪曲状态,所以它以压伏身心歪曲状态为作用。正因如此,它完全以不歪曲的方式现起,或者让相应法现起为不歪曲,所以它以不歪曲为现起。所谓“以覆藏过失为特相的是诳,以假装本无的功德为特相的是谄”,像这样以那种方式生起的不善蕴,以及与它们同属一类的杂染法,就是诳、谄等。在这里,依靠心轻安等,只有心变得轻安、轻快、柔软、适业、熟练、正直;而依靠身轻安等,色身也会变得如此。正因为这样,世尊在这里说诸法有两种分类,并不是在所有地方都这样说。巴利
Kāyasambandhī, cittasambandhī ca ujubhāvoti lakkhitabbatāya kāyacittaajjavalakkhaṇā. Kāyacittānaṃ naṅgalasīsacandakoṭigomuttavaṅkatāsaṅkhātānaṃ kuṭilabhāvānaṃ nimmaddanato kāyacittakuṭilabhāvanimmaddanarasā. Tato eva sabbathāpi ajimhabhāvena paccupatiṭṭhanti, sampayuttānaṃ vā ajimhataṃ paccupaṭṭhapentīti ajimhatāpaccupaṭṭhānā. ‘‘Santadosapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā māyā, asantaguṇasambhāvanalakkhaṇaṃ sāṭheyya’’nti evaṃ vuttā tadākārappavattā akusalā khandhā, tadekaṭṭhā ca saṃkilesadhammā māyāsāṭheyyādikā. Ettha ca cittapassaddhiādīhi cittameva passaddhaṃ, lahu, mudu, kammaññaṃ, paguṇaṃ, uju ca hoti. Kāyapassaddhiādīhi pana rūpakāyopi. Tenevettha bhagavatā dhammānaṃ duvidhatā vuttā, na sabbattha.
471 471. 欲即是欲求,就是由于所缘而有的需求。然而在“欲即是贪”等(《分别论》564)的说法中,渴爱也被称为欲;在“生起欲、努力”等(《分别论》432)的说法中,精进也被称为欲。为了排除这些含义,所以说“这是想要造作之状态的同义词”。想要造作之状态,就是指想要去做的意愿。又因为心所法必定有所缘,所谓想要去做的意愿,正是以想要执取所缘这种方式而存在。因此,欲以“对所缘想要去做的欲”为特相,也就是以想要造作之状态为特相。所以这样说:“以寻求所缘为作用,以对所缘的需求为现起。”然而,从这欲以寻求自己的所缘为作用这一点来说,对于与它相应的诸法,由于所缘同一,也就同样具有这个作用。因此说:“这欲在执取所缘时,应当看作犹如心的伸手。”这欲若在善法中生起,就称为善欲,因为它是从如理作意生起的。巴利
471. Chandanaṃ chando, ārammaṇena atthikatā. ‘‘Chando kāmo’’tiādīsu (vibha. 564) pana taṇhāpi vuccati, ‘‘chandaṃ janeti vāyamatī’’tiādīsu (vibha. 432) vīriyampīti tato nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘kattukāmatāyetaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Kattukāmatā vuccati karaṇicchā. Cetasikassa ca dhammassa sārammaṇattā karaṇicchā nāma ālambanassa ālambitukāmatāmukheneva hotīti ārammaṇakaraṇicchālakkhaṇo chando kattukāmatālakkhaṇo vutto. Tenevāha ‘‘ārammaṇapariyesanaraso, ārammaṇena atthikatāpaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti ca. Yadaggena panāyaṃ attano ārammaṇapariyesanaraso, tadaggena sampayuttānampi hotiyeva ekārammaṇatāya tena tesaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘ārammaṇaggahaṇe cāyaṃ cetaso hatthappasāraṇaṃ viya daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Svāyaṃ kusalesu uppanno kusalacchandoti vuccati yonisomanasikārasamuṭṭhānattā.
472 胜解应该从它对所缘作出决定这一面来理解,而不是从净信这一面来理解。因为,不管怎样,对所缘的确定就是胜解;如果没有胜解,杀生等恶行或布施等善行就不会发生。而信则是对值得净信之事生起的净信与胜解,这就是它们之间的区别。至于决意,它先以决定的方式对所考察的义理起作用,然后成为后续同类心念生起的条件。如果是这样,那么在疑相应心里又怎么说呢?那些心里也应看作是以单一方式摇摆不定的状态为条件。就像小孩从这边爬到那边,想着“做还是不做”,没有决定;与它相反的就是不摇摆。在那些生起这种以决定为特相的胜解的心念中,它们的所缘法就是应当被决定之法。巴利
472.Adhimuccanaṃ ārammaṇe sanniṭṭhānavasena veditabbaṃ, na pasādanavasena. Yathā tathā vā hi ārammaṇe nicchayanaṃ adhimuccanaṃ anadhimuccantassa pāṇātipātādīsu, dānādīsu vā pavattiyā abhāvā, saddhā pana pasādanīyesu pasādādhimokkhāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Voṭṭhabbanaṃ pana yathā santīrite atthe nicchayanākārena pavattitvā parato ttamānānaṃ tathā pavattiyā paccayo hoti. Yadi evaṃ, vicikicchāsampayuttesu kathanti? Tesampi ekaṃseneva saṃsappanākārassa paccayatāya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dārakassa viya ito cito ca saṃsappanassa ‘‘karissāmi na karissāmī’’ti anicchayassa paṭipakkhakiriyā asaṃsappanaṃ, yesu cittuppādesu ayaṃ sanniṭṭhānalakkhaṇo adhimokkho, tesaṃ ārammaṇadhammo eva sanniṭṭheyyadhammo.
473 “行为之作”这句话,是在说明 kāra 一词的派生方式为“表示行为本身”。所谓“在意中的作”,就是在意中对所缘的作。意经由它而被导向所缘;正因意与所缘相结合,所缘因此也在意中被作。“前意”指的是有分意。“不同于彼之意”,是说路心、速行心作意。这里以“作意”这个通名,来显示能引生路心、速行心者。巴利
473.Kiriyākāroti kārasaddassa bhāvasādhanatamāha. Manamhi kāroti manasi ārammaṇassa karaṇaṃ. Yena hi mano ārammaṇe karīyati ārammaṇenassa saṃyojanato, tato eva tena ārammaṇampi manasi karīyatīti. Purimamanatoti bhavaṅgamanato. Visadisamananti vīthijavanaṃ manaṃ karotīti manasikārasāmaññena vīthijavanapaṭipādake dasseti.
作意驱使相应法朝向所缘,就像在推动它们一样,所以被称为以驱策为特相。念是以不忘失的方式,呈现为面向所缘的状态;而作意则是以联结的方式,呈现为面向所缘的状态,这就是它们之间的差别。说“令所缘生起者”属于行蕴,这句话是为了表明其他作意只属于其他蕴;这样开示之后,为了把它归入识蕴来显示,所以说了“令路心生起者”等话。巴利
Sampayuttadhamme ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ sārento viya hotīti manasikāro sāraṇalakkhaṇo vutto. Satiyā asammussanavasena visayābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānatā, manasikārassa pana saṃyojanavasena ārammaṇābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānatāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Ārammaṇapaṭipādakassa saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannatāvacanaṃ itaramanasikārānaṃ tadaññakkhandhapariyāpannatāmattaṃ jotetīti tathājotitaṃ taṃ viññāṇakkhandhe otāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘vīthipaṭipādako’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
474 关于“这些法”,是指那些自己生起的法,也就是与自身相应的心法和心所法。即使它们没有所缘,当它们平等地一起运作时,因为处于不偏不倚的状态,所以称为“中舍性”。所谓“等持运载的特相”,是指平等而不偏斜地让它们各自按照自己的作用运作的特相。因为它虽然以不偏不倚的状态运作,却能令相应法各自按照自己的作用运作,就像国王虽然默然安坐,却能令负责裁决的官员们各自在自己的职责上不放逸地行事。它是成就“不昏沉、不掉举”运作的因缘,作用是遮止不足与过度,这是就作用来说的。如果这样,那么俱生增上缘又怎么说呢?那也是它的作用。所谓“对俱生法具有增上”,也只是指它这样运作而已,所以没有过失。意思是:它好像以偏袒的方式运作,即所谓“让这个作用低劣,让那个作用更殊胜”,而它本身又仿佛在切断这种偏袒。巴利
474.Tesu dhammesūti yesu dhammesu sayaṃ uppannā, tesu attanā sampayuttesu cittacetasikadhammesu. Anārammaṇattepi hi tesu samappavattesu udāsinabhāvato ‘‘tatramajjhattatā’’ti vuccati. Samavāhitalakkhaṇāti samaṃ avisamaṃ yathāsakakiccesu pavattanalakkhaṇā. Udāsinabhāvena pavattamānāpi hesā sampayuttadhamme yathāsakakiccesu pavatteti, yathā rājā tuṇhī nisinnopi atthakaraṇe dhammaṭṭhe yathāsakakiccesu appamatte pavatteti. Alīnānuddhatapavattipaccayatā ūnādhikatānivāraṇarasā, kiccavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ, sahajātādhipatino kathanti? Tampi tassā kiccameva. Yaṃ sahajātadhammānaṃ adhipatibhāvoti, tassāpi tathāpavattanamevāti nāyaṃ doso. ‘‘Idaṃ nihīnakiccaṃ hotu, idaṃ atirekatarakicca’’nti evaṃ pakkhapātavasena viya pavatti pakkhapāto, taṃ upacchindantī viya hotīti adhippāyo.
“对不定者起欲求”这句话,是用心所之间的差别来说明“起欲求”。无嗔本身就是慈。正如它被以“慈、慈爱”等方式(《法集论》1062)明确说明的那样。所谓舍,是指人们与慈一起构想的那种舍,那其实就是处中舍。巴利
‘‘Aniyatesu icchantī’’ti iminā cetasikantarabhāvena icchantīti dasseti. Adosoyeva mettā. Tathā hi soyeva ‘‘mettā mettāyanā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1062) niddiṭṭho. Upekkhāti yaṃ upekkhaṃ mettāya saddhiṃ parikappenti, sā tatramajjhattupekkhāyeva.
475 “身恶行等事”,指的是对其他有情、其他财物、其他妇女等。不摧破,就是摧破的对立面。应当知道,这是借由从身恶行等事中退缩的行为来命名,说的就是从身恶行等本身退缩的行为。因为诸离并不适合以对恶行之事的不作为为现起,而应是以对恶行本身的不作为为现起。然而,诸离是以自制的方式而退缩,诸不作为的惭与愧则是以厌恶等方式而退缩,这就是它们之间的差别。巴利
475.Kāyaduccaritādivatthūnanti parapāṇaparadhanaparaitthiādīnaṃ. Amaddanaṃ maddanapaṭipakkhabhāvo. Kāyaduccaritādivatthuto saṅkocanakiriyāpadesena kāyaduccaritādito eva saṅkocanakiriyā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi viratiyo duccaritavatthuno akiriyapaccupaṭṭhānā yujjanti, atha kho duccaritassa, viratīnañca soraccavasena saṅkocanaṃ, akiriyānañca hirottappānaṃ jigucchanādivasenāti ayametesaṃ viseso.
476 “诸行”是指行蕴的法而说的。因为这些法正是这里所指的,否则就该说成三十八法了。正如心一样,与它相应的法在第二禅里也同样只是“有行”,所以说“这里唯一的差别就是‘有行’这一点”。其余的就是初禅里已经说过的那些法。巴利
476.Saṅkhārāti saṅkhārakkhandhadhamme sandhāyāha. Te hi idhādhippetā, aññathā aṭṭhatiṃsāti vattabbaṃ siyā. Yathā cittaṃ, evaṃ taṃsampayuttadhammāpi dutiye sasaṅkhārā evāti āha ‘‘sasaṅkhārabhāvamattameva hettha viseso’’ti. Avasesā paṭhame vuttadhammā.
其余的与第五禅相应,这里说的是:悲和喜怎么能与舍俱生呢?因为在前分阶段就可以。因为老师们说:只有已经达到安止的悲和喜,才不与舍俱生;但在其他情况下,它们也可以与舍俱生。巴利
Avasesā pañcamena sampayogaṃ gacchantīti ettha kathaṃ karuṇāmuditāupekkhāsahagate sambhavantīti? Pubbabhāgabhāvato. Appanāppattā eva hi karuṇāmuditā upekkhāsahagatā na honti, tato aññattha pana upekkhāsahagatāpi hontīti ācariyā.
对于极清净的身业等,以心定之力生起的色界、无色界善,并不是通过净化身业等而生起,也不是通过断除和止息恶行、邪命而生起。因此,在广大心中,三离根本不可能存在,所以说“除去三离”。其中的“从……”,是指从色界初禅所说的心所来说。那些“正是”,就是指色界第五禅所说的心所。如果问:那么与色界有什么差别呢?回答说:这里唯一的差别就是无色界的状态。巴利
Suvisuddhassa kāyakammādikassa cittasamādhānavasena rūpārūpāvacarakusalappavatti, na kāyakammādīnaṃ sodhanavasena, nāpi duccaritadurājīvānaṃ samucchindanapaṭippassambhanavasenāti mahaggatacittuppādesu viratīnaṃ asambhavoyevāti āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā viratittaya’’nti. Tatoti rūpāvacarapaṭhame vuttacetasikato. Teyevāti rūpāvacarapañcame vuttacetasikā eva. Yadi eva rūpāvacarato ko visesoti āha ‘‘arūpāvacarabhāvoyeva hi ettha viseso’’ti.
“初禅的”是指具有初禅。“道识”者,四种道识也应当依照所说的方式来了知,这是(前后文的)关联。在“第二禅等各类道识”中,用“等”字包含了第三、第四、第五禅的道识。有人质问:“依照所说的方式”,是不是没有区别?为了说明其确有区别,就说了“悲、喜”等。其中,因为道识以涅槃为所缘,而悲和喜以有情为所缘,所以它们在那里不存在。在道法中,依照基础等的规定,有时可以没有正思惟,但不会没有离,因为圣道正是以断除身恶行等的方式生起的,所以决定有离。巴利
Paṭhamajjhāniketi paṭhamajjhānavati. Maggaviññāṇeti catubbidhepi maggaviññāṇe vuttanayeneva veditabbāti sambandho. Dutiyajjhānikādibhede maggaviññāṇeti ettha ādi-saddena tatiyacatutthapañcamajjhānikāni saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Vuttanayenā’’ti vuttaṃ kiṃ avisesenāti codanāyane taṃ dassento ‘‘karuṇāmuditāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha maggaviññāṇānaṃ nibbānārammaṇattā, karuṇāmuditānañca sattārammaṇattā na tāsaṃ tattha sambhavo. Maggadhammesu ca pādakādiniyamena kadāci sammāsaṅkappaviraho siyā , na pana virativiraho kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ samucchindanavaseneva ariyamaggassa pavattanatoti niyataviratitā.
478 不感到羞耻、不觉得丢脸,这就是“无惭”。它指的是人、心,或者与心相应的一堆法。本来应该说“ahirikka”,但省掉了一个k音,就说成“ahirika”。说“无愧”,是指与愧相反的那种法。不厌恶、不嫌弃,就是无惭;不羞耻、不退缩,就是无愧。它们就是从身恶行等当中产生的。无愧,就是没有畏惧、没有恐怖,没有恐惧、没有惊慌。按相反的意思来说:无惭的作用是以不羞耻的方式去做恶,无愧的作用是以不畏惧的方式去做恶;它们表现为对恶不退缩,直接原因是既不尊重自己也不尊重他人。应当知道:就像村里的猪对不净物不厌恶一样,无惭的人对烦恼的不净也不厌恶;就像飞蛾扑火不怕一样,无愧的人对恶也不害怕。按相反的意思,应当这样详细理解。巴利
478.Na hiriyati na lajjatīti ahiriko, puggalo, cittaṃ, taṃsampayuttadhammasamudāyo vā. ‘‘Ahirikka’’nti vattabbe ekassa kakārassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘ahirika’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na ottappa’’nti ottappassa paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ dhammamāha. Ajigucchanaṃ ahīḷanaṃ. Alajjā aviriḷā. Tehevāti kāyaduccaritādīhi eva. Asārajjaṃ nibbhayatā. Anuttāso asambhamo. Vuttapaṭipakkhavasenāti alajjanākārena pāpānaṃ karaṇarasaṃ ahirikaṃ, anuttāsākārena anottappaṃ, vuttappakāreneva pāpato asaṅkocanapaccupaṭṭhānāni attani, paresu ca agāravapadaṭṭhānāni. Gāmasūkarassa viya asucito kilesāsucito ajigucchanaṃ ahirikena hoti, salabhassa viya aggito pāpato anuttāso anottappena hotīti evaṃ vuttappaṭipakkhavasena vitthāro veditabbo.
479 对于“以此而贪”等应当说明的内容,要依照前面所说的方式来了知。“贪”就是极度贪求。“痴”就是不了知。执取所缘,是以“这是我的”这种渴爱执著的力量,顽固地执取所缘、不肯放下,并不只是把所缘当作对象而已。贪著,是以面向所缘的方式黏着。不舍弃,就是不放弃,或者说是难以解脱。味著见,就是对味著的见解。因为经中确实说过:“随观味著的人,渴爱就会增长。”巴利
479.Lubbhanti tenātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ. Lubbhantīti abhigijjhanti. Muyhantīti na bujjhanti. Ārammaṇaggahaṇaṃ ‘‘mama ida’’nti taṇhābhinivesavasena abhinivissa ārammaṇassa avissajjanaṃ, na ārammaṇakaraṇamattaṃ. Abhisaṅgo abhimukhabhāvena āsatti. Apariccāgo avijahanaṃ, dummocanīyatā vā. Assādadassanaṃ assādadiṭṭhi. ‘‘Assādānupassino ca taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.52, 54, 57) hi vuttaṃ.
480 480. 不能如实看见法的自性,就是心的盲目状态。无知,是智慧的对立面。无力通达,就是不能通达。就像智不得穿透所缘的自性一样,痴的运作方式也是如此,会遮蔽所缘的自性。它使邪行现前;或者,因为与正行相对立而被把握,所以称为邪行现前。对于生起它的人来说,它造成黑暗,就是黑暗;因为它这样现前,所以称为黑暗现前。巴利
480. Dhammasabhāvassa yāthāvato adassanaṃ cittassa andhabhāvo. Aññāṇaṃ ñāṇapaṭipakkho. Sampaṭivijjhituṃ asamatthatā asampaṭivedho. Yathā ñāṇaṃ ārammaṇasabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na labbhati, mohassa tathā pavatti ārammaṇasabhāvacchādanaṃ. Asammāpaṭipattiṃ paccupaṭṭhapeti, sammāpaṭipattiyā paṭipakkhabhāvena gayhatīti vā asammāpaṭipattipaccupaṭṭhāno. Yassa uppajjati, tassa andhakaraṇaṃ andhakāro, tathā paccupatiṭṭhatīti andhakārapaccupaṭṭhāno.
481 “邪”是指与法的自性完全相反,也就是常等颠倒。以不恰当的方式固执己见,就是不善巧的执取、邪道的执取。越过法的自性而向外抓取,就是执取。以颠倒执取的方式,固执地认为“只有这个才是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”,这就是邪执取。巴利
481.Micchāti dhammasabhāvassa viparītaṃ, niccāditoti attho. Ayoniso abhiniveso anupāyābhiniveso uppathābhiniveso. Dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanaṃ parāmāso. Viparītaggāhavasena ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 202, 203; 3.27-29) abhinivisanaṃ micchābhiniveso.
482 482. 以哪种法的作用使心掉举,与它相应的诸法,或者那个法本身,就是掉举。“不寂静”说的是心没有平息、不清净的状态。“不安住”的作用,就是动摇的作用。“如疯狂一般”指的是旋转不停的样子。在“心的不寂静”这句话里,是指应当完成的事情上的处格,或者指作为不寂静之因的所缘,所以说为“不寂静”。因为不善法一向低劣,所以说“以不善性而卑劣”。巴利
482. Yassa dhammassa vasena uddhataṃ hoti cittaṃ, taṃsampayuttadhammā vā, so dhammo uddhaccaṃ. Avūpasamoti asannisinnaappasannabhāvamāha. Anavaṭṭhānarasanti calanakiccaṃ. Bhantattanti paribbhamanākāraṃ. Cetaso avūpasameti nipphādetabbe payojane bhummaṃ, avūpasamapaccayabhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ vā ‘‘avūpasamo’’ti vuttaṃ. Akusaladhammānaṃ ekantanihīnatāya ‘‘akusalabhāvena ca lāmakatta’’nti vuttaṃ.
483 在这里,昏沉与睡眠是不定心所,而不是慢等。所以,昏沉与睡眠的不定性,就是此处第二不善心与第一不善心之间的差别。巴利
483. Thinamiddhamettha aniyataṃ, na mānādīti thinamiddhassa aniyatatā ca ettha dutiyacitte paṭhamākusalato viseso.
由于不精进、往下沉,这种萎缩的状态就是昏沉;因为和它相应,心就变得昏沉,这种状态就叫昏沉性。由于没有能力、构成障碍,这种不堪任的状态就是睡眠。正因为如此,与它相应的诸法变得迟钝、丧失能力,所以说睡眠性就是睡眠。不精进的特征,就是与精进相反的特征。对精进的摧破、丢弃,就是精进的摧破。它以让相应诸法沉没的方式呈现,或者说它让那些法沉没而呈现,所以它的现起是沉没。关于不堪任性的特征:在这里,昏沉本身确实也是不堪任的性质,但它是心的不堪任,而睡眠是受等三蕴的不堪任,这是这里的区别。正如圣典中说:其中,什么是昏沉?就是心的不适业、不堪任。其中,什么是睡眠?就是身的不适业、不堪任。如此等等,就是对它们的定义说明。覆盖,就是对识门的关闭。懈怠,是懈怠的状态,即在执取所缘时萎缩。因为昏沉只是心的萎缩,而睡眠则像受等三蕴的萎缩一样,也像色身的萎缩一样,所以它让点头打瞌睡的状态出现,因此说它的现起是点头睡眠。不乐,就是对边远的坐卧处以及殊胜善法不感兴趣。伸懒腰,就是名为伸懒腰的身粗重之因的杂染生起。在不乐、伸懒腰等中,等字包含了疲倦等。对于应当完成的事,这里是依处格的用法。巴利
Anussāhanāvasīdanabhāvena saṃhatabhāvo thinaṃ, tena yogato cittaṃ thinaṃ, tassa bhāvoti thinatā. Asamatthatāvighātavasena akammaññatā middhaṃ. Yasmā tato eva tena sampayuttadhammā medhitā vihatasāmatthiyā honti, tasmā ‘‘middhanatā middha’’nti vuttaṃ. Anussāhalakkhaṇanti ussāhapaṭipakkhalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyassa avanodanaṃ khipanaṃ vīriyāvanodanaṃ. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ saṃsīdanākārena paccupatiṭṭhati, tesaṃ vā saṃsīdanaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti saṃsīdanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Akammaññatālakkhaṇanti ettha kāmaṃ thinampi akammaññasabhāvameva, taṃ pana cittassa, middhaṃ vedanādikkhandhattayassāti ayamettha viseso. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘tattha katamaṃ thinaṃ? Yā cittassa akallatā akammaññatā. Tattha katamaṃ middhaṃ? Yā kāyassa akallatā akammaññatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1162-1163) ca ādinā imesaṃ niddeso pavatto. Onahanaṃ viññāṇadvārānaṃ pidahanaṃ. Līnatā līnākāro ārammaṇaggahaṇe saṅkoco. Yasmā thinena cittasseva saṃhananaṃ hoti, middhena pana vedanādikkhandhattayassa viya rūpakāyassāpi, tasmā taṃ pacalāyikāniddaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti pacalāyikāniddāpaccupaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Arati pantasenāsanesu, adhikusaladhammesu ca arocanā. Vijambhikā vijambhanasaṅkhātassa kāyaduṭṭhullassa kāraṇabhūtā saṃkilesappavatti. Arativijambhikādīsūti ca ādi-saddena tandiādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Nipphādetabbe payojane cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ.
其余十六种。不过,慢在这里是不确定的,所以和它合在一起正好是十七种。因为在《发趣论》里说“缘结法,结法以因缘生起”的地方,通过四次依欲贪、三次依嗔恚,以及慢、疑、有贪这三种,展示了一来所断结与结之间的十种关联方式。依这十种关联方式,说了“以欲贪结为缘,生起慢结、无明结”,又说“以欲贪结为缘,生起无明结”;同样说了“以慢结为缘,生起有贪结、无明结”,又说“以有贪结为缘,生起无明结”。正是通过这样来的关联方式,显示了慢的不确定性。如果慢是确定的,那么欲贪就不会有不带慢的生起,有贪也不会。若真是那样,在《发趣论》中就不会有四次依欲贪的关联,只会是三次;也不会有以有贪为根本的关联。这样一来,结与结之间的关联方式就会是八种,而不是十种。但实际展示的确实是十种。以“我胜”等方式向上抬举,就是高举。它正是以高举的方式发挥执取的作用,不像精进那样以努力成办各种事务的方式。即使是对自卑的人,以看轻自己而执取,也应看作是以执取的方式。幢,是指高高竖起的旗帜,但这里说“如幢一样”,所以叫幢,意思是极为殊胜等状态。渴求那称为幢性的幢,就是“慢欲”,指心。依哪种法而有慢欲,那就是“慢欲性”。由于以“我”的方式生起,慢的生起方式和见相似,所以它不与见在同一心识刹那中生起,而且以自爱为近依处;因此说它“以离见相应贪为近因”。巴利
Avasesā soḷasa. Māno panettha aniyato hoti, tena saddhiṃ sattaraseva honti. Paṭṭhāne hi ‘‘saṃyojanaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca saṃyojano dhammo uppajjati hetupaccayā’’ti ettha catukkhattuṃ kāmarāgena, tikkhattuṃ paṭighena ca māno vicikicchā bhavarāgoti tayopete sakadāgāmino saṃyojanānaṃ saṃyojanehi dasavidhā yojanāti dassitāya dasavidhāya yojanāya ‘‘kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca mānasaṃyojanaṃ avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti (paṭṭhā. 3.4.1) vatvā ‘‘kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti (paṭṭhā. 3.4.1) tathā ‘‘mānasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti (paṭṭhā 3.4.1) vatvā ‘‘bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti (paṭṭhā. 3.4.1) ca evamāgatāhi yojanāhi mānassa aniyatabhāvo pakāsito. Yadi hi māno niyato siyā, kāmarāgassa mānarahitā pavatti na siyā, tathā bhavarāgassa. Evaṃ sati paṭṭhāne catukkhattuṃ kāmarāgena yojanā na siyā, tikkhattuṃyeva siyā. Bhavarāgamūlikā ca na siyā. Evañca saṃyojanānaṃ saṃyojanehi aṭṭhavidhena yojanā siyā, na dasavidhena. Dasavidhāva ca dassitāti. Seyyādivasena uccato namanaṃ unnati. Unnamanavaseneva saṃpaggaharaso. Na vīriyaṃ viya taṃtaṃkiccasādhane abbhussahanavasena. Omānassāpi attānaṃ avaṃ katvā gahaṇampi sampaggahaṇavasenevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ketu vuccati accuggatadhajo, idha pana ketu viyāti ketu, uḷāratamādibhāvo. Taṃ ketubhāvasaṅkhātaṃ ketuṃ kāmetīti ketukamyaṃ, cittaṃ. Yassa dhammassa vasena ketukamyaṃ, sā ketukamyatā. ‘‘Aha’’nti pavattanato mānassa diṭṭhisadisī pavattīti so diṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ ekacittuppāde na pavattati, attasinehasannissayo cāti āha ‘‘diṭṭhivippayuttalobhapadaṭṭhāno’’ti.
在这里,“也”这个字同样把昏沉睡眠也拉了进来。巴利
Etthāpi cāti ca-saddena thinamiddhaṃ ākaḍḍhati.
485 损害就是恼害。粗暴就是愤怒。它依自身生起的方式,以及能令丑陋、蠕动、不可爱的色法生起的方式,而有扩散的作用。由于能让身体产生被刺穿的状态,所以有烧毁自身所依的作用。这种损害,在自己和他人受用果报的时候,因为不可爱,应当看作像掺了毒的腐尿一样,由此显示它完全不应被执取。巴利
485.Dussantīti byāpajjanti. Caṇḍikkaṃ kujjhanaṃ. Attano pavattiākāravasena, virūpasaṃsappanakaaniṭṭharūpasamuṭṭhāpanavasena ca visappanaraso. Kāyassa vijjhattabhāvāpādanato attano nissayadahanaraso. Dussanaṃ attano, parassa ca upabhogaphalakālesu aniṭṭhattā visasaṃsaṭṭhapūtimuttaṃ viya daṭṭhabboti sabbena sabbaṃ aggahetabbataṃ dasseti.
486 为了说明“对他人的成就生起嫉妒,这就是嫉”,而说“嫉妒即是嫉”。嫉妒就是不能忍受。“就在那里”指唯独针对他人的成就。与喜悦相对立,是嫉的作用,并非仅是喜悦的缺失,因此说“以不喜悦为作用”。巴利
486. Yaṃ parasampattīsu issākaraṇaṃ, sā issāti dassento āha ‘‘issāyanā issā’’ti . Usūyanaṃ asahanaṃ. Tatthevāti parasampattīsu eva. Abhiratipaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ issāya kiccaṃ, na abhiratiyā abhāvamattanti āha ‘‘anabhiratirasā’’ti.
487 487. 抓住“悭吝者”这个依悭吝之关联而转起的词,他说“悭吝的状态就是悭”。不过,按词源学的解释,古师们说:愿这个不要成为别人的稀奇之物,唯愿它只属于我——这就是悭。这个悭,总摄了所说的那些相状等而安立。以收缩为现起:由于使自己的所有成为他人不能共享的,所以以收缩为现起。行相艰涩即心性刻薄。自己的所有,指住处等。巴利
487. Maccharayogena ‘‘maccharī’’ti pavattamānaṃ maccharisaddaṃ gahetvā āha ‘‘maccharabhāvo macchariya’’nti. Niruttinayena pana mā idaṃ acchariyaṃ aññesaṃ hotu, mayhameva hotūti macchariyanti porāṇā. Taṃ macchariyaṃ vuccamānāni lakkhaṇādīni pariyādāya tiṭṭhati. Saṅkocanapaccupaṭṭhānanti attasampattīnaṃ parehi asādhāraṇabhāvakaraṇena saṅkocanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Kaṭukākāragati kaṭukañcukatā. Attasampatti āvāsādi.
488 在这里,“恶作”指的是:即使没做过的事,也成了恶作。因为人们会这样说:“我没做过的事,就是恶作。”后面也会说到:“以追悔已做和未做的事为作用。”这样,已做和未做的恶行与善行都成了恶作;而针对这些生起的追悔之心,因为与它同时存在的缘故,在这里就被取名为“恶作”,应当理解为“它的状态就是恶作”。事后的懊悔、逼迫,叫后追悔。恶行与善行既然已经生起,又带有“已做、未做”这样的特征,若以懊悔的方式去颠倒地执取,那就是追悔。因为受他人支配之故,应当看作如同奴役。就像有奴役时,奴仆就受他人支配;同样,有恶作时,具有恶作的人也是如此。他确实不能靠自己的本性在善法中运转。或者也可以说:对已做、未做的善与不善起追悔时,人是被支配的;具有恶作的人受这两者所控制,所以他就如同被奴役一样。巴利
488.Kukatanti ettha akatampi kukatameva. Evañhi vattāro honti ‘‘yaṃ mayā na kataṃ, taṃ kukata’’nti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘katākatānusocanarasa’’nti. Evaṃ katākataṃ duccaritaṃ, sucaritañca kukataṃ, taṃ ārabbha vippaṭisāravasena pavattaṃ pana cittaṃ taṃsahacaritatāya idha ‘‘kukata’’nti gahetvā ‘‘tassa bhāvo kukkucca’’nti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pacchā anutāpanaṃ vibādhanaṃ pacchānutāpo. Yathāpavattassa katākatākāravisiṭṭhassa duccaritasucaritassa anusocanavasena virūpaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ vippaṭisāro. Parāyattatāhetutāya dāsabyamiva daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā hi dāsabye sati dāso parāyatto hoti, evaṃ kukkucce sati taṃsamaṅgī. Na hi so attano dhammatāya kusale pavattituṃ sakkoti. Atha vā katākatākusalakusalānusocane āyattatāya tadubhayavasena kukkuccena taṃsamaṅgī hotīti taṃ dāsabyaṃ viya hotīti.
应当把“ca”这个词引过来,和“于不定法中的嫉妒等(法)中,唯昏沉睡眠之生起”这一句连接起来理解。巴利
Aniyatesu issādīsu thinamiddhasambhavova cāti ca-saddaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
490 只是以生起而停留,意思是只以刹那而停留。因为“就像无风处灯焰的停留”那样所说的心的停留,并不能成为相续停留的缘,由于没有决定而无法稳定,仅仅作为心转起之缘,所以称为只是以生起而停留。因此说“定微弱”。“无治疗”是因为难以治疗而说的,并不是说一切疑都完全没有对治,这只是显示该义而已。“是这样吗?不是这样吗?”这样以爬行的方式停留,所以是疑。以摇动为作用,就是心在种种所缘上摇动的作用。掉举只安住在自己所执取的行相上旋转,所以只在一个所缘上以翻腾的方式生起。而疑虽然只在色等一个所缘上生起,但仍然以“是这样吗?不是这样吗?是这个吗?是那个吗?”期待另一个应当执取的行相,所以在种种所缘上有摇动。它使不决定、二歧的状态现起,所以是以不决定为现起。由于以执取非一向、种种自性的行相而现起,所以是以执取非一向为现起。巴利
490.Pavattiṭṭhitimattoti khaṇaṭṭhitimatto. ‘‘Nivāte dīpaccīnaṃ ṭhiti viyā’’ti hi evaṃ vuttacittaṭṭhiti viya santānaṭṭhitiyā paccayo bhavituṃ asamattho nicchayābhāvena asaṇṭhahanato cetaso pavattipaccayamattatāya pavattiṭṭhitimatto. Tenāha ‘‘dubbalo samādhī’’ti. Vigatā cikicchāti cikicchituṃ dukkaratāya vuttaṃ, na sabbathā vicikicchāya cikicchābhāvatoti tadatthamattaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Evaṃ nu kho, nanu kho’’tiādinā saṃsappanavasena setīti saṃsayo. Kampanarasāti nānārammaṇe cittassa kampanakiccā. Uddhaccañhi attanā gahitākāre eva ṭhatvā bhamatīti ekārammaṇasmiṃyeva vipphandanavasena pavattati. Vicikicchā pana yadipi rūpādīsu ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe uppajjati, tathāpi ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, nanu kho, idaṃ nu kho, aññaṃ nu kho’’ti aññaṃ gahetabbākāraṃ apekkhatīti nānārammaṇe kampanaṃ hotīti. Anicchayaṃ dveḷhakaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti anicchayapaccupaṭṭhānā. Anekaṃsassa ārammaṇe nānāsabhāvassa gahaṇākārena paccupatiṭṭhatīti anekaṃsagāhapaccupaṭṭhānā.
491 以有情为所缘,就是以有情的概念为所缘。有人问难说:难道以概念为所缘的果报心就没有吗?针对这个问难,所以说欲界的果报心只以有限的所缘为所缘。对于离在果报心中也不存在这一点,这里也想到有人会问难说:难道在某些果报心中不也有离吗?于是说因为五学处只是善的,这是前面已经说过的。由此表明,在世间果报心中没有离。巴利
491.Sattārammaṇattāti sattapaññattiārammaṇattā. Nanu ca paññattiārammaṇāpi vipākā hontīti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ekantaparittārammaṇā hi kāmāvacaravipākā’’ti. Viratiyopi vipākesu na santīti etthāpi nanu kesuci vipākesu viratiyopi santīti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘pañca sikkhāpadā kusalāyevāti hi vutta’’nti, tena lokiyavipākesu viratiyo na santīti dasseti.
所谓“他们”,指的是色界等地的异熟识。因为在应生与能生的关系中,这里用的是属格。巴利
Tesanti rūpāvacarādivipākaviññāṇānaṃ. Janetabbajanakasambandhe hi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ.
492 “他们”是指无因的唯作诸行。其中,无因唯作意界相应者,与善异熟意界相应者相同;笑生相应者,与喜俱推度相应者相同;确定相应者,与舍俱推度相应者相同。为了说明这个意思,先说了“善……相应”,接着为了显示由此得出的差别,又说“然而在两种意识界中”等等。因为精进存在,达到力的定,即是依“精进为力”这样来理解的。巴利
492.Teti te ahetukakiriyasaṅkhārā. Tattha kusalavipākamanodhātusampayuttehi samānā ahetukakiriyamanodhātusampayuttā, somanassasahagatasantīraṇasampayuttehi samānā hasituppādasampayuttā, upekkhāsahagatasantīraṇasampayuttehi samānā voṭṭhabbanasampayuttāti imamatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘kusala…pe… samānā’’ti vatvā tato labbhamānaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘manoviññāṇadhātudvaye panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vīriyasabbhāvato balappatto samādhi hoti ‘‘vīriyantaṃ bala’’nti katvā.
阿拉汉们因为正断离本身,远离的作用已经完成,所以在唯作心里没有离。因此说“除了离之外”。欲界有因唯作诸行和欲界善法,在离这方面是有差别的;但在广大心里,连那样的差别也没有。所以说“以一切行相”,意思是:从法、所缘、转起的行相来说,以一切方式。巴利
Samucchedaviratīhi eva arahantānaṃ viramanakiccassa niṭṭhitattā kiriyacittesu viratiyo na santīti āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā viratiyo’’ti. Kāmāvacarasahetukakiriyasaṅkhārānaṃ kāmāvacarakusalehi viratikato viseso atthi, mahaggatesu pana tādisopi natthīti āha ‘‘sabbākārenapī’’ti, dhammato, ārammaṇato, pavattiākāratoti sabbapakārenapīti attho.
过去等分别的注释巴利
Atītādivibhāgakathāvaṇṇanā
即便包含于阿毗达摩之中,经分别也只是经的方法;而纯粹属于阿毗达摩的方法,则是阿毗达摩分别,所以说“依阿毗达摩中句分别的方法”。巴利
Abhidhammantogadhampi suttantabhājanīyaṃ suttantanayo eva, ekantaabhidhammanayo pana abhidhammabhājanīyanti āha ‘‘abhidhamme padabhājanīyanayenā’’ti.
493 493. 不过,世尊已经这样详细说明了诸蕴,这是上下文之间的关联。因此,我也依照这部圣典来注释诸蕴,这就是本意。在“何”这个词里,是以笼统的方式显示不确定;在“任何”这个词里,则是触及种类的差别而显示不确定。通过这两者,无论是过去……或者近处,无论少或多,无论这样或那样,凡是适合用中性词来表述的,全都涵盖包摄进去,所以说“无余遍取”。这样,看到在其他适合用中性词来表述的地方也有过度适用的情况,为了在那方面限定过度的延伸,因为超出彼处所欲之义而转起,才说“色”来限定过度的延伸,因此说“色,是为了限定过度延伸”。再者,取“何”这个词为一个词,连同助词构成的“任何”为一个词,因为显示不确定的同一含义,所以说“以两个词”。这里的“其”,就是指色的。以过去等来加以区分,就是所谓过去、未来、现在等等。巴利
493. Bhagavatā pana evaṃ khandhā vitthāritāti sambandho. Tasmā imāyapi pāḷiyā vasena khandhānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karissāmāti adhippāyo. Yaṃ kiñcīti ettha yanti sāmaññena aniyamadassanaṃ. Kiñcīti pakārabhedaṃ āmasitvā aniyamadassanaṃ. Ubhayenāpi atītaṃ vā…pe… santike vā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā yādisaṃ vā tādisaṃ vā napuṃsakaniddesārahaṃ sabbaṃ byāpetvā gaṇhātīti āha ‘‘anavasesapariyādāna’’nti. Evaṃ pana aññesupi napuṃsakaniddesārahesu pasaṅgaṃ disvā tattha adhippetatthaṃ aticca pavattanato atippasaṅgassa niyamanatthaṃ rūpanti vuttanti dassento ‘‘rūpanti atippasaṅganiyamana’’nti āha. Yaṃ kiñcīti ca yaṃ-saddaṃ ekaṃ padaṃ, sanipātaṃ kiṃ-saddañca ekaṃ padanti gahetvā aniyamekatthadīpanato ‘‘padadvayenāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Assāti rūpassa. Atītādinā vibhāgaṃ ārabhati atītānāgatapaccuppannantiādinā.
494 这里说“依长时、相续、时节、刹那”,其中“长时”这个词,是用在以死亡和投生为界限的时间上,这从“我曾经在过去的长时中存在吗”等经文可以知道。同样,在《一夜贤者经》里,“不应追念过去”等说法,也是依长时来说过去等状态的。但“诸比丘,有三种时。哪三种?过去时、未来时、现在时”则是从究竟义上限定时,依《语义经》说为刹那所限定。因为那里说“诸比丘,已生起的色……已显现,‘有’是它的称法”,这是在说存在者的现在性,在此之前和之后,则说为过去性和未来性。而在其他诸经中,大多是以死亡和投生为界限的过去等时被宣说,所以这里也依那个意义,说为“依长时”。巴利
494.Addhāsantatisamayakhaṇavasenāti ettha cutipaṭisandhiparicchinne kāle addhā-saddo vattatīti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’’ntiādisuttavasena (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) viññāyati. Tathā hi bhaddekarattasuttepi ‘‘atītaṃ nānvāgameyyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.272, 275, 276, 277) addhāvaseneva atītādibhāvo vutto. ‘‘Tayome, bhikkhave, addhā, katame tayo? Atīto addhā anāgato addhā paccuppanno addhā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 63) pana paramatthato paricchijjamāno addhā niruttipathasuttavasena khaṇaparicchinno vutto. Tattha hi ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ jātaṃ…pe… pātubhūtaṃ. Atthīti tassa saṅkhā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.62) vijjamānassa paccuppannatā, tato pubbe, pacchā ca atītānāgatatā vuttā. Tadaññasuttesu pana yebhuyyena cutipaṭisandhiparicchinno atītādiko addhā vuttoti so eva idhāpi ‘‘addhāvasenā’’ti vutto.
冷与冷是同一类,热与热也一样。不过,当冷或热在身体里聚集起来,以相续的方式持续运转,不缺少也不多出,保持同一种形态,这就叫做一种时节。因为同类的时节有很多种,所以用“一”来统称,饮食方面也是这样。“同一路、同一速行所生”是就五门和六门来说的。关于相续和时间的讨论,是注释书里为了帮助观修者才说的。能产生的是因,能支持的是缘,产生和支持就是它们的作用。就像种子能生出芽,地等能支持芽;业能产生业生色的异熟,食等能支持它。同样,对每一个色聚和每一个心识的生起,应当根据具体情况,把能产生它们的业、无间等缘的作用,以及能支持它们的俱生、前生、后生缘的作用,一一对应起来。由于时节等有同类和不同类的情况,所以根据相续来说它们所生色的过去等分别。但业能产生同一有,不存在同类和不同类的区别,所以不说业所生色依相续有过去等分别,只从支持作用的角度来说。然而,当性别发生转变时,强大的不善使男性特征消失,微弱的不善使女性特征消失,微弱的善使女性特征出现,强大的善使男性特征出现。可见业生色也有不同类的情况,因此它们依相续的过去等分别也是可能的,但并非任何时候都如此,所以不予采纳。巴利
Sītaṃ sītassa sabhāgo, tathā uṇhaṃ uṇhassa. Yaṃ pana sītaṃ, uṇhaṃ vā sarīre sannipatitaṃ santānavasena pavattamānaṃ anūnaṃ anadhikaṃ ekākāraṃ, taṃ eko utūti vuccatīti sabhāgautuno anekattā eka-ggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, evaṃ āhārepi. Ekavīthiekajavanasamuṭṭhānanti pañcachaṭṭhadvāravasena vuttaṃ. Santatisamayakathā vipassakānaṃ upakāratthāya aṭṭhakathāsu kathitā. Janako hetu, upathambhako paccayo, tesaṃ uppādanaṃ, upatthambhanañca kiccaṃ. Yathā bījassa aṅkuruppādanaṃ, pathavīādīnañca tadupatthambhanaṃ, kammassa kaṭattārūpavipākuppādanaṃ, āhārādīnaṃ tadupatthambhanaṃ, evaṃ ekekassa kalāpassa, cittuppādassa ca janakānaṃ kammānantarādipaccayabhūtānaṃ, upatthambhakānañca sahajātapurejātapacchājātānaṃ kiccaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ utuādīnaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgatāsambhavato taṃsamuṭṭhānānaṃ rūpānaṃ santativasena atītādivibhāgo vutto, kammassa pana ekabhavanibbattakassa sabhāgavisabhāgatā natthīti taṃsamuṭṭhānānaṃ rūpānaṃ santativasena atītādivibhāgaṃ avatvā upatthambhakavaseneva vutto. Yadā pana liṅgaparivattanaṃ hoti, tadā balavatā akusalena purisaliṅgaṃ antaradhāyati, dubbalena kusalena itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhavati. Dubbalena ca akusalena itthiliṅgaṃ antaradhāyati, balavatā kusalena purisaliṅgaṃ pātubhavatīti kammasamuṭṭhānarūpānampi attheva visabhāgatāti tesampi santativasena atītādivibhāgo sambhavati, so pana na sabbakālikoti na gahito.
所谓“各个时刻”,是说从一须臾等起的各别时间皆属于此色;换言之,此色具有各个时刻。巴利
Taṃtaṃsamayanti ekamuhuttādiko so so samayo etassāti taṃtaṃsamayaṃ, rūpaṃ, taṃtaṃsamayavantanti attho.
“从那时之前”是指从这三刹那所包含的时间之前。因为还没有生起,所以是未来。“之后”是指从那之后。因为已经越过了三刹那,所以是过去。应当知道:在生起的刹那,因的作用已经完成,因为果已经产生了;而凡是因的作用和缘的作用都已经完成、已经越过的,那就是过去。在三个刹那中,缘的作用都存在。地等有持等作用,触等有触等作用,这些自己的作用就是“自作用”;实行自作用的刹那就是“自作用刹那”;或者与作用同时存在的就是“自作用”;在某个刹那,无论色法还是非色法,只要有自作用,那个刹那就是“自作用刹那”;在那个刹那,就是现在。在这里的刹那等论中,“在那之前是未来,在那之后是过去”这种说法,因为不像长时等那样有差别,所以是直接、不含糊的说法。依长时等来说,确实有些法是过去,有些法是未来,有些法是现在;但依刹那等来说,法本身没有差别,只是时间上有差别。生起之前是未来,正存在于三刹那中是现在,那之后是过去,这是直接、不含糊的说法,因为不像长时现在等那样,能以某种方式说成过去或未来。巴利
Tatopubbeti tato khaṇattayassa pariyāpattito pubbe. Anuppannattā anāgataṃ. Pacchāti tato pacchā. Khaṇattayaṃ atikkantattā atītaṃ. Yassa hetukiccaṃ, paccayakiccañca niṭṭhitattā atikkantaṃ, taṃ atītaṃ uppādakkhaṇe hetukiccaṃ, uppannaphalattā niṭṭhitañcāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tīsupi khaṇesu paccayakiccaṃ. Pathavīādīnaṃ sandhāraṇādikaṃ, phassādīnaṃ phusanādikañca attano kiccaṃ sakiccaṃ, sakiccassa karaṇakkhaṇo sakiccakkhaṇo, saha vā kiccena sakiccaṃ, yasmiṃ khaṇe sakiccaṃ rūpaṃ vā arūpaṃ vā hoti, so sakiccakkhaṇo, tasmiṃ khaṇe paccuppannaṃ. Ettha ca khaṇādikathāyaṃ ‘‘tato pubbe anāgataṃ, pacchā atīta’’nti vacanaṃ addhādīsu viya bhedābhāvato nippariyāyaṃ. Addhādivasena hi aññeva dhammā atītā aññe anāgatā aññe paccuppannā labbhanti, khaṇādivasena pana natthi dhammato bhedo, kālato eva bhedo. Uppādato pubbe anāgato , khaṇattaye vattamāno, tato paraṃ atītoti nippariyāyā, addhāpaccuppannādi viya kenaci pariyāyena atītamanāgatanti ca vattabbatābhāvato.
495 对于前面所说的内、外之分,说到“就像前面说的那样”之后,对那些还不满意的人,虽然在那里“内在的”这个词的字面意思只能理解为“内”,但“内”和“内在的”这两个词,以及“外”和“外在的”这两个词,彼此之间确实有含义上的差别。因为“内在的”这个词,可以用在自己和他人的相续中的眼等、色等上面,就像“外在的”这个词一样;而“内”这个词,则只用在各个有情自己相续中的眼、色等上面,就像“外”这个词用在其他人那里一样。因此,为了说明这个意思,才说了“复次”等话。其中,“于此”是指在这次经文的方式中。“自己的内”并不是前面所说的“内在的”本身,“他人的”也不是前面所说的“外在的”本身,这就是要表达的意思。巴利
495. Heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ajjhattikabāhirabhedaṃ sandhāya ‘‘vuttanayo evā’’ti vatvā tena aparitussamānena yadipi tattha ajjhattameva ajjhattikanti saddattho labbhati, tathāpi attheva ajjhattaajjhattikasaddānaṃ, bahiddhābāhirasaddānañca aññamaññaṃ atthabhedo. Tathā hi ajjhattikasaddo saparasantānikesu cakkhādīsu rūpādīsu bāhirasaddo viya pavattati, ajjhattasaddo pana tassa tassa sattassa sasantānikesveva cakkhurūpādīsu tato aññesu bahiddhāsaddo viya pavattati. Tasmā tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idhāti imasmiṃ suttantanaye. Niyakajjhattampi na pubbe vuttaajjhattikameva, parapuggalikampi na pubbe vuttabāhiramevāti adhippāyo.
496 劣与胜的区分,应当从间接说和直接说两方面来理解,这就是它们的关联。那正是善见天者的色。所谓“于何处”,就是指作为所缘的那个对象。以某个所缘为对象而生起不善异熟识,那个所缘就是劣的,因为它不可爱。以某个所缘为对象而生起善异熟识,那个所缘就是胜的,因为它可爱。就像不善异熟本身不可爱,就只会在不可爱的对象上生起,不会在可爱的对象上生起;同样,善异熟本身可爱,也就只会在可爱的对象上生起,不会在不可爱的对象上生起。正如注释书中这样说道:巴利
496. Hīnapaṇītabhedo pariyāyato, nippariyāyato ca veditabboti sambandho. Tadeva sudassīnaṃ rūpaṃ. Yatthāti yasmiṃ ārammaṇabhūte. Yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā akusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ hīnaṃ aniṭṭhabhāvato. Yaṃ kusalavipākaṃ, taṃ paṇītaṃ iṭṭhabhāvato. Yathā hi akusalavipāko sayaṃ aniṭṭho aniṭṭhe eva uppajjati, na iṭṭhe, evaṃ kusalavipākopi sayaṃ iṭṭho iṭṭhe eva uppajjati, na aniṭṭhe. Tathā hi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
按照不善业所生的来说,五种不可意的欲境被分别说明;但由善业所生的,就没有什么叫做不可意的,一切都是可意的。按照善业所生的来说,五种可意的欲境被分别说明;因为由善业所生的,确实没有什么叫做不可意的,一切都是可意的。巴利
‘‘Akusalakammajavasena aniṭṭhā pañca kāmaguṇā vibhattā, kusalakammajaṃ pana aniṭṭhaṃ nāma natthi, sabbaṃ iṭṭhameva. Kusalakammajavasena iṭṭhā pañca kāmaguṇā vibhattā. Kusalakammajañhi aniṭṭhaṃ nāma natthi, sabbaṃ iṭṭhamevā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 6) ca.
在这里,有些令人喜欢的东西,比如象的形象等等,是不善业所生的,但它们并不会因此就成为那些象等众生自己快乐的因。因为,只有各个众生自己所做的善业所生之物,才是他快乐的缘;不善业所生之物,则是他苦的缘。所以,业所生之物的可爱与不可爱,应该联系造业的众生来判断。在这里,说了“善业所生的不可爱,是不存在的”,但并没有说“不善业所生的可爱,是不存在的”,因此就可以承认:不善业所生的美好之物,对其他众生来说也可以是可爱的;而善业所生之物,对一切众生来说则正是可爱的。巴利
Tattha manāpānipi kānici hatthirūpādīni akusalakammanibbattāni santi, na pana tāni tesaṃyeva hatthiādīnaṃ sukhassa hetubhāvaṃ gacchanti. Tassa tasseva hi sattassa attanā katena kusalena nibbattaṃ sukhassa paccayo hoti, akusalena nibbattaṃ dukkhassa. Tasmā kammajānaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhatā kammakārakasattassa vasena yojanārahā siyā. Tattha yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘kusalakammajaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ nāma natthī’’ti, na ca vuttaṃ ‘‘akusalakammajaṃ iṭṭhaṃ nāma natthī’’ti, tena akusalakammajampi sobhanaṃ parasattānaṃ iṭṭhaṃ atthīti anuññātaṃ bhavissati, kusalakammajaṃ pana sabbesaṃ iṭṭhamevāti.
不过,有些畜生道众生看到人的形相会觉得不舒服,因为它们一看到人就逃跑;而人看到天神的形相也会害怕。对它们来说,以那种色为所缘而生起的异熟识,也仍然是善异熟;但因为缺乏与之相应的福业,它们对那种色不会感到欢喜。正如善业所生的不可意色不存在一样,不善业所生的可意色也不存在,这一点也应该说明。因为象等畜生由不善业所生的色,只是人类不善异熟的所缘;而由善业所生的色,则是在生命流转中生起的善异熟的所缘。不过,由于可意所缘混杂其中,可以理解少量的不善业所生之色不会成为大量不善异熟生起的原因;但异熟本身是不会欺诳的。因此,依据异熟来判定可意与不可意所缘,是非常合理的。至于所说的“五种欲乐是不可意的”,那是从色等的一般状态来说的,因为与欲乐相似,所以把那个名称用在相似的事物上。在经藏中,只有可意的色等才被称为“欲乐”。或者,与欲乐不相似的色等也被称为“欲乐”,就像把不吉祥说成吉祥一样;又或者,一切可意与不可意的色等,因为是渴爱的所依处,所以都可称为欲乐。正如经中所说:“世间中,色是可意之色、可爱之色……”等等。而在经中,由于色等极其可爱,所以特别将可意的色等称为欲乐。巴利
Tiracchānagatānaṃ pana kesañci manussarūpaṃ amanāpaṃ, yato te disvāva palāyanti, manussā ca devatārūpaṃ passitvā bhāyanti, tesampi vipākaviññāṇaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ ārabbha kusalavipākameva uppajjati, tādisassa pana puññassa abhāvā na tesaṃ tattha abhirati hoti. Kusalakammajassa pana aniṭṭhassa abhāvo viya akusalakammajassa ca iṭṭhassa abhāvo vattabbo. Hatthiādīnampi hi akusalakammajaṃ manussānaṃ akusalavipākasseva ārammaṇaṃ, kusalakammajaṃ pana pavatte samuṭṭhitaṃ kusalavipākassa. Iṭṭhārammaṇena pana vomissakattā appakaṃ akusalakammajaṃ bahulaṃ akusalavipākuppattiyā kāraṇaṃ na bhavissatīti sakkā viññātuṃ, vipākaṃ pana na sakkā vañcetunti vipākavasena iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇavavatthānaṃ suṭṭhu yujjati. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘aniṭṭhā pañca kāmaguṇā’’ti, taṃ rūpādibhāvasāmaññato kāmaguṇasadisatāya taṃsadisesu tabbohārena vuttaṃ. Iṭṭhāneva hi rūpādīni ‘‘kāmaguṇā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 1.164-165, 177-178, 287; 2.155, 280; 3.57, 190; saṃ. ni. 5.30) vuttāni. Kāmaguṇavisabhāgā vā rūpādayo ‘‘kāmaguṇā’’ti vuttā asive sivoti vohāro viya, sabbāni vā iṭṭhāniṭṭhāni rūpādīni taṇhāvatthubhāvato kāmaguṇā eva. Vuttañhi ‘‘rūpā loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpa’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.400; ma. ni. 1.133). Atisayena pana kamanīyattā suttesu kāmaguṇāti iṭṭharūpādīni vuttāni.
按照前面所说的方式,即通过论教的说明,从特相上显示了远和近,所以说“在这里,依处所,也要辗转地了知远和近”。其中,色从处所方面称为近,是从什么限度开始呢?称为远,又是从什么限度开始呢?按通常的说法,十二肘是听闻的范围:在这以内是近,在这以外是远。其中,微细色处在远处时,从特相和处所两方面都是远;处在近处时,则只从处所方面是近,不是从特相方面。粗色处在近处时,从特相和处所两方面都是近;处在远处时,只从处所方面是远,不是从特相方面。然而,因为说了“辗转地”,自己的色称为近,即使是在母胎中的他人的色也称为远。在母胎中的是近,在母胎外的是远。如此,依母胎、房舍、僧园、界场、村落、田地、国土、王国、大海、轮围世界等内外之别,应当了知远和近。巴利
Vuttanayamevāti abhidesena lakkhaṇato dūrasantikaṃ dassitanti āha ‘‘okāsatopettha upādāyupādāya dūrasantikatā veditabbā’’ti. Tattha kittakato paṭṭhāya rūpaṃ okāsavasena santike nāma, kittakato pana paṭṭhāya dūre nāma? Pakatikathāya kathentānaṃ dvādasa hatthā savanūpacāro nāma, tassa orato santike, parato dūre. Tattha sukhumarūpaṃ dūre hontaṃ lakkhaṇatopi okāsatopi dūre hoti, santike hontaṃ pana okāsatova santike hoti, na lakkhaṇato. Oḷārikarūpaṃ santike hontaṃ lakkhaṇatopi okāsatopi santike hoti, dūre hontaṃ okāsatova hoti, na lakkhaṇato. ‘‘Upādāyupādāyā’’ti pana vuttattā attano rūpaṃ santike nāma, antokucchigatassāpi parassa dūre. Antokucchigatassa santike, bahi ṭhitassa dūreti evaṃ antogabbhapamukhapariveṇasaṅghārāmasīmāgāmakhettajanapadarajjasamuddacakkavāḷesu tadantogatabahigatānaṃ vasena dūrasantikatā veditabbā.
497 把“那”合为一处,就是聚在一起。“积聚”就是收拢起来,或者合成一堆。“概括”就是收摄、略说。通过“一切色……已被显示”这句话,说明“色”与“蕴”二词构成同格复合词。因此论中才说:“确实,除了色之外,并没有另一个叫色蕴的东西存在。”巴利
497.Tadekajjhanti taṃ ekajjhaṃ ekato. Abhisaṃyūhitvāti saṃharitvā, samūhaṃ vā katvā. Abhisaṅkhipitvāti saṅkhipitvā saṅkhepaṃ katvā. ‘‘Sabbampi rūpaṃ…pe… dassitaṃ hotī’’ti iminā rūpakhandhasaddānaṃ samānādhikaraṇasamāsabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi rūpato añño rūpakkhandho nāma atthī’’ti.
498 通过以“聚集”的状态趋入,就被显示为受蕴等。应当把这一点引出来并连接起来理解。巴利
498. Rāsibhāvūpagamanena vedanākkhandhādayoti dassitā hontīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
“依相续而说,依刹那等而说”——这里之所以不按长时和时节来说明过去等的区分,是因为过去等的状态已经按乐等来说明了。因为并不是只有乐受才依长时和时节成为过去等,苦受、不苦不乐受也同样如此;而它们又按身体性、心理性等而有区别。所以,受的集合应依长时和时节说为过去等,因为这个集合必须由这些来界定;然而,当取受的某一部分时,则适合依相续和刹那来界定,因为应当先这样界定再加以把握。在一相续中,乐受等有种种不同的类别;其中应被界定而把握的那一类别,是作为一种显著的类别,由伴随那一类别的门与所缘而生起的界定者来界定的,它无间断地生起、与同一所缘相结合而运转,这就可以成为相续。因此,可以不涉及其他类别,只以界定者的身份来把握。或者,由于非色法迅速变转,适合以变转本身作为界定来界定,所以只依相续和刹那来说界定。与同一所缘相结合而运转,比如即使整天瞻仰佛像、听闻佛法的人,他与信等俱行的受也是现在的。“属于前际、后际、中际”——这句显示的是依因缘作用而说的方式。巴利
Santativasena, khaṇādivasena cāti ettha addhāsamayavasena atītādivibhāgassa avacanaṃ sukhādivasena bhinnāya atītādibhāvavacanato. Na hi sukhā eva addhāvasena, samayavasena ca atītādikā hoti, tathā dukkhā eva, adukkhamasukhā eva ca kāyikacetasikādibhāvena bhinnā, tena vedanāsamudāyo addhāsamayavasena atītādibhāvena vattabbataṃ arahati samudāyassa tehi paricchinditabbattā, vedanekadesā pana gayhamānā santatikhaṇehi paricchedaṃ arahanti tathā paricchinditvā gahetabbato. Ekasantatiyaṃ pana sukhādīsu anekabhedabhinnesu yo bhedo paricchinditabbabhāvena gahito, tassa ekappakārassa pākaṭassa paricchedikā taṃsahitadvārālambanappavattā, avicchedena taduppādakekavidhavisayasamāyogappavattā ca santati bhavituṃ arahatīti tassā bhedantaraṃ anāmasitvā paricchedakabhāvena gahaṇaṃ kataṃ, lahuparivattino vā arūpadhammā parivattaneneva paricchedena paricchindanaṃ arahantīti santatikhaṇavaseneva paricchedo vutto. Ekavidhavisayasamāyogappavattā divasampi buddharūpaṃ passantassa, dhammaṃ suṇantassa pavattasaddhādisahitavedanā paccuppannā. ‘‘Pubbantāparantamajjhattagatā’’ti etena hetupaccayakiccavasena vuttanayaṃ dasseti.
499 善、不善、无记三者虽然都有有恼、有勤勇、有异熟,但这并不共通;为了说明它(受)独有而不共通,才说了“以有罪过的行为为因”等话。其中,“以有罪过的行为为因”是指以杀生等应受谴责的行为为原因。“以烦恼的燃烧为状态”是指因烦恼的热恼而处于躁动不安的状态。相对于以寂静为自性的善受来说,它是粗重的。“有恼”是指带有嗔害。这样说,是在说明它生起时其果报应当如何,也就是在说它有产生果报的适合性。“有勤勇”是指带有策励,由此说明它有产生果报的能力。“有异熟”是指有果报的存在,由此说明在其余诸缘和合之下它能产生果报。这三句都是在显示果报法性。或者也可以这样理解其义:由于有身业等的造作活动存在,所以“有恼”;由于有速行的策励之力,所以“有勤勇”;由于有产生果报的能力,所以“有异熟”。唯作也像善一样有恼、有勤勇,却不产生果报,因此不取这两者,在唯作无记的部分只说“有异熟”。“有苦”是指因烦恼之苦而带有苦。“依所说相反之理”是指:以无罪过的行为为因、没有烦恼的燃烧、没有苦,而且是寂静的生起——如此与不善所说的相反。“随宜”是指随顺于理。在三因之中,哪一个因与哪一个受相应,就随顺于它,这就是它的含义。善受和不善受,相对于果报无记来说,以三种因都是粗重的。相对于唯作无记来说,则从“有异熟”方面说,或者从“有异熟”所不共的有恼、有勤勇方面说。依所说的相反方式,果报无记因为没有造作活动、没有策励、没有异熟,所以相对于那些善受和不善受来说是微细的。唯作无记则从没有异熟方面说,或者从“没有异熟”所不共的有恼、有勤勇方面说——如此与善、不善所说的相反。因为被业力所推动、成为业的影像的果报,由于没有身业等的造作活动,所以没有策励。而有策励的唯作,则是没有异熟法性的。有异熟法性确实就像怀孕一样,是粗重的。巴利
499. Sabyāpārasaussāhasavipākatā kusalādīhi tīhipi sādhāraṇāti asādhāraṇameva dassetuṃ ‘‘sāvajjakiriyahetuto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāvajjakiriyahetutoti pāṇātipātādigārayhakiriyānimittato. Kilesasantāpabhāvatoti kilesapariḷāhena sadarathabhāvato . Vūpasantasabhāvāya kusalāya vedanāya oḷārikā. Sabyāpāratoti saīhato. Tena yathā pavattamānāyassā vipākena bhavitabbaṃ, tathā pavattiṃ vadanto vipākuppādanayogyatamāha. Saussāhatoti sasattito, tena vipākuppādanasamatthataṃ. Savipākatoti vipākasabbhāvato, tena paccayantarasamavāyenassā vipākanibbattanaṃ. Tīhipi padehi vipākadhammataṃyeva dasseti. Kāyakammādibyāpārasabbhāvato vā sabyāpārato, javanussāhavasena saussāhato, vipākuppādanasamatthatāvasena savipākatoti evamettha attho veditabbo. Vipākaṃ anuppādentīpi kiriyā kusalā viya sabyāpārā, saussāhā eva ca hotīti tadubhayaṃ anāmasitvā kiriyābyākatavāre ‘‘savipākato’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Sabyābajjhatoti kilesadukkhena sadukkhato. Vuttavipariyāyatoti anavajjakiriyahetuto, kilesasantāpābhāvato, abyābajjhato ca vūpasantavuttīti evaṃ akusalāya vuttavipallāsato. Yathāyoganti yogānurūpaṃ. Tīsu kāraṇesu yaṃ yaṃ yassā yassā yujjati, tadanurūpanti attho. Kusalākusalavedanāhi vipākabyākatāya tīhipi kāraṇehi oḷārikā. Kiriyābyākatāya savipākato savipākatāvisiṭṭhasabyāpārasaussāhato vāti. Vuttapariyāyenāti vipākabyākatā abyāpārato , anussāhato, avipākato ca tāhi kusalākusalavedanāhi sukhumā. Kiriyābyākatā avipākato, avipākatāvisiṭṭhasabyāpārasaussāhato vāti evaṃ kusalākusalāya vuttavipallāsena. Kammavegakkhittā hi kammapaṭibimbabhūtā ca kāyakammādibyāpāravirahato nirussāhā vipākā. Saussāhā ca kiriyā avipākadhammā. Savipākadhammā hi sagabbhā viya oḷārikāti.
500 无味,是因为没有滋味,否定了乐。有震荡,是因为有躁动,意思是不寂静。能征服,是因为能压倒。乐中没有中舍性,舍中也没有适悦性。然而寂静性等在一切处都能在乐与舍中获得,所以说随宜。明显,是因为看到乐者、苦者就能了知,是显著的状态。那就是不苦不乐受。巴利
500.Nirassādatoti assādābhāvato sukhapaṭikkhepato. Savipphāratoti saparipphandato, anupasantatoti attho. Abhibhavanatoti ajjhottharaṇato. Sukhāya majjhattatā natthi, upekkhāya sātatā. Santatādayo pana sabbattha sukhupekkhāsu labbhantīti ‘‘yathāyoga’’nti vuttaṃ. Pākaṭatoti sukhito dukkhitoti disvāpi jānitabbattā vibhūtabhāvato. Sā adukkhamasukhā vedanā.
501 这里通过“未入等至者和已入等至者”这一取说,也应当依地而知道诸受的粗与细。另一种,是已入等至者的受。巴利
501.Asamāpannasamāpanna-ggahaṇena cettha bhūmivasenāpi vedanānaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā vuttāti veditabbā. Itarā samāpannassa vedanā.
“属暴流的”:因为要以诸暴流为所缘而超越它们。同样,“属轭的”“属系缚的”也应这样理解——这里“系缚”就是结缚,确实以所缘的方式与结缚相连,所以叫“属系缚的”。同样,“属盖的”“属取的”也应这样了知。系属于杂染,或者应受杂染,就叫“有杂染的”。它是无漏的。巴利
Oghaniyatoti oghehi ārammaṇaṃ katvā atikkamitabbato. Tathā yoganiyato, ganthaniyato cāti etthāpi ganthova ganthanaṃ, tassa hitaṃ ārammaṇabhāvena sambandhanatoti ganthaniyaṃ. Evaṃ nīvaraṇiyaṃ, upādāniyañca veditabbaṃ. Saṃkilese niyuttā, saṃkilesaṃ vā arahantīti saṃkilesikā. Sā anāsavā.
502 这里说的“于此”,是指前面所说的粗与细的状态。“混杂”就是混淆。虽然已经说过“粗的、细的”,但还要避免一个过失:不能因为生等分类的不同,又让已经说过的粗细重新变成混淆不清。应当这样来避免。为了依经显示:从生的角度说是细的受,从自性、个人、世间的角度说又是粗的,所以说了“此已说”等话。同样,乐受等也应这样理解:在这里,不善受从生的角度说是粗的,从自性的角度说是细的;与善禅那相应的乐受,从生的角度说是粗的,从个人的角度说——即作为入定者的受——是细的。应当按这类方式逐一配合。“不应执取”这句话表明:生等四种分类应当各各分开执取,互不混杂。这样就避免了混淆,而不是别的做法。就像通过无记这一门类来说明,也通过善、不善这一门类来说明;就像通过生这一门类来说明,也通过自性等门类来说明——为了这个道理,所以指出“这个理则适用于一切处”。巴利
502.Tatthāti yathāvuttāya oḷārikasukhumatāya. Sambhedoti saṅkaro. ‘‘Oḷārikā, sukhumā’’ti ca vuttānampi jātiādivasena puna sukhumoḷārikabhāvāpattidoso yathā na hoti, tathā pariharitabbo. Jātivasena sukhumāya vedanāya sabhāvapuggalalokiyavasena oḷārikataṃ pāḷivasena dassetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sukhādayopīti ettha akusalā vedanā jātivasena oḷārikā, sabhāvavasena sukhumā. Kusalajjhānasahagatā sukhā vedanā jātivasena oḷārikā, samāpannassa vedanāti katvā puggalavasena sukhumāti evamādinā yojetabbā. ‘‘Na parāmasitabbo’’ti etena jātiādayo cattāro koṭṭhāsā aññamaññaṃ avomissakā eva gahetabbā. Evaṃ sambhedassa parihāro, na aññathāti dasseti. Yathā abyākatamukhena, evaṃ kusalākusalamukhenapi, yathā ca jātimukhena, evaṃ sabhāvādimukhenapi dassetabbanti imamatthaṃ ‘‘esa nayo sabbatthā’’ti atidisati.
现在,为了在生等分类中显示不善等法彼此相对时的粗与细,开始说“再者”等话。“以所依的燃烧”这一说法,是显示与嗔相应者明显的残酷转起。“决定”是指由邪性决定而决定,成为无间业,因异熟能住劫故为住劫,就像提婆达多等人那样。“无行”因为自性锐利,所以是粗。“与见相应”因为罪过大,所以是粗。与见相应且决定的是粗,比那更粗的是住劫,比那更粗的是无行——这三种虽然依照前面所说的方式合在一起说,但应当各自分别结合。因此说“其他是细”。“无差别”是指与嗔俱、与贪俱不加区分。不善多异熟,因为嗔增盛,所以是粗;同样,善少异熟也是粗。因为过失少,不善少异熟的是细;同样,善多异熟的是细。巴利
Idāni jātiādikoṭṭhāsesupi mitho akusalādīnaṃ upādāyupādāya oḷārikasukhumataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Nissayadahanato’’ti iminā dosasahagatāya pākaṭaṃ kurūrappavattiṃ dasseti. Niyatāti micchattaniyāmena niyatā, ānantariyabhāvappattā kappatiṭṭhanakavipākatāya kappaṭṭhitikā devadattādīnaṃ viya. Asaṅkhārikā sabhāvatikhiṇatāya oḷārikā. Diṭṭhisampayuttā mahāsāvajjatāya oḷārikā. Sāpi diṭṭhisampayuttā niyatā oḷārikā, tato kappaṭṭhitikā, tato asaṅkhārikāti tividhāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayattā ekajjhaṃ vuttā visuṃ visuṃyeva yojetabbā. Tenāha ‘‘itarā sukhumā’’ti. Avisesenāti dosasahagatā, lobhasahagatāti abhedena. Akusalā bahuvipākā dosussannatāya oḷārikā. Tathā kusalā appavipākā. Mandadosattā akusalā appavipākā sukhumā. Tathā kusalā bahuvipākā.
欲界等地的粗与细,是由其依托对象的粗与细决定的;而出世间法则是纯粹细的。关于这一点,后面还会进一步分析。所谓“修习所成”也是如此:按照修习所成的分类方式,同样可以说明布施所成、持戒所成等的分类。在修习纯熟、力量强盛的阶段等情况下,有时即使以不与智相应的心也能作意,所以说“修习所成也是二因的”。在“各各地的异熟、唯作、受”这一项中,依“欲界异熟是粗的,色界异熟是细的”这样的方式,应当一直类推到阿拉汉果;依“欲界唯作是粗的,色界唯作是细的”这样的方式;以及依“以布施的行相生起的是粗的,以持戒的行相生起的是细的”这样的方式,应当一直类推到非想非非想处。正如在生类划分中有这样的分别,在自性划分等中也是如此,为了说明这一点,所以说“苦等”。巴利
Oḷārikasukhumanikantivatthubhāvato kāmāvacarādīnaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā, lokuttarā pana ekantasukhumāva. Tatthāpi ca vibhāgaṃ parato vakkhati. Bhāvanāmayāpīti bhāvanāmayāya bhedanena dānasīlamayānampi bhedanaṃ nayato dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Bhāvanāya paguṇabalavakālādīsu kadāci ñāṇavippayuttacittenapi manasikāro hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāvanāmayāpi duhetukā’’ti. Taṃtaṃbhūmivipākakiriyāvedanāsūti ettha ‘‘kāmāvacaravipākā oḷārikā, rūpāvacarā sukhumā’’tiādinā yāva arahattaphalā netabbaṃ. ‘‘Kāmāvacarakiriyā oḷārikā, rūpāvacarakiriyā sukhumā’’tiādinā kāmāvacarā ca ‘‘dānākārappavattā oḷārikā, sīlākārappavattā sukhumā’’tiādinā yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanā netabbaṃ. Yathā ca jātikoṭṭhāse ayaṃ vibhāgo, evaṃ sabhāvakoṭṭhāsādīsupīti dassetuṃ ‘‘dukkhādī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这一整类分别都是依着特征来说的,所以接着就说“也依处所之力”等等。“乐也”这里的“也”字,把不苦不乐受也一并收进来了。“于一切处”,就是在一切地中。“随其相应”,就是无论哪种受在哪个地方出现,都随它相应的情况。“依所依之力”,也是依着那让受生起的事物来说的。“所依低劣”,是指以低劣的粟米饭为所缘而吃的人,他的受因为所依低劣,所以是粗的;吃粳米肉饭的人,因为所依殊胜,所以是细的。巴利
Sabbo cāyaṃ vibhāgo lakkhaṇasannissito vuttoti katvā āha ‘‘okāsavasena cāpī’’tiādi. Sukhāpīti pi-saddena adukkhamasukhaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Sabbatthāti sabbāsu bhūmīsu. Yathānurūpanti yā yā vedanā yattha yattha labbhati, tadanurūpaṃ. Vatthuvasenāti yaṃ vatthuṃ ārabbha vedanā pavattati, tassa vasenāpi. Hīnavatthukāti hīnaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kaṅgubhattaṃ bhuñjantassa vedanā hīnavatthukatāya oḷārikā. Sālimaṃsodanaṃ bhuñjantassa paṇītavatthukatāya sukhumāti.
503 以“初”之方法,触及了一切巴利圣典的义理。依“生”等而类别不相等,就是异类性。依“苦异熟”等而作用不相似,就是不混杂性,而不是不相应。如果是那样的话,以远的相反方式而成为近,便成了混杂性和邻近性,可是受与受相应并不存在。而且在解释“近”这个词时,将会说“由同类和相似故”,所以应当按所说的方式理解其义。不相似的自性,就是不相似性。“于一切项”是指在按粗、细之分所说的一切项中。依“生”等而类别相等,就是同类性;依“苦异熟”等而自性相似,就是相似性。因此说“然而不善……近”。巴利
503.Ādinā nayenāti sabbaṃ pāḷigatiṃ āmasati. Jātiādivasena asamānakoṭṭhāsatā visabhāgatā. Dukkhavipākatādivasena asadisakiccatā asaṃsaṭṭhatā, na asampayogo. Yadi siyā, dūravipariyāyena santikaṃ hotīti saṃsaṭṭhatā santikatā āpajjati, na ca vedanāya vedanāsampayogo atthi. Santikapadavaṇṇanāya ca ‘‘sabhāgato ca sarikkhato cā’’ti vakkhatīti vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Asadisasabhāvatā asarikkhatā. Sabbavāresūti oḷārikasukhumabhede vuttanayānusārena vattabbesu sabbesu vāresu. Jātiādivasena samānakoṭṭhāsatā sabhāgatā, dukkhavipākatādivasena pana sadisasabhāvatā sarikkhatā. Tenāha ‘‘akusalā pana…pe… santike’’ti.
关于次第等抉择的解说注释巴利
Kamādivinicchayakathāvaṇṇanā
504 所谓“此”,就是指这样按过去等分类展开详细解说的入门。智的差别之义,是指种种智的区分之义。次第,是从说法的顺序来说,也就是这个说法顺序是依据什么理由而安排的,这里的意思就是指那个理由。由差别,是指从区分来说,也就是蕴和取蕴的分别之义。不增不减,是因为只有五蕴。由譬喻,是指通过譬喻来比拟。应当见,分两种方式,是指应当以两种方式用智慧来观察。见者之义成就,是指就见者而言,按照他所意乐的目标而达成。能分别者,是指有智慧的人。巴利
504.Etanti evaṃ atītādivibhāge vitthārakathāmukhaṃ. Ñāṇabhedatthanti nānappakāraṃ ñāṇappabhedatthaṃ. Kamatoti desanākkamato, yena kāraṇenāyaṃ desanākkamo kato, tatoti attho. Visesatoti bhedato, khandhupādānakkhandhavibhāgatoti attho. Anūnādhikatoti pañcabhāvato. Upamātoti upamāhi upametabbato. Daṭṭhabbato dvidhāti dvīhi ākārehi ñāṇena passitabbato. Passantassatthasiddhitoti yathā passantassa yathādhippetatthanipphattito. Vibhāvināti paññavatā.
生起次第,是指诸法随各自的缘而生起时,那个生起的先后顺序。像“应通过见来断除”等这样的说法里,先说应先断的,后说应后断的,这就是断的次第。修行戒清净之后,应当修行心清净,再往后也是如此,所以说“戒清净……修行次第”。一层层越来越殊胜的阶位,按顺序逐一安立,这就是地的次第。像“四念处”等这样的教法,因为在同一刹那也能生起念处等,所以是说法的次第。布施论等,是按逐步提升的顺序来讲的,但因为布施等没有生起等方面的安立,所以这里把它们说成是说法的次第。因为如果有生起等安立的根据,像“最初是羯罗蓝”这样的说法,虽然同样是教说,也只是依生起等的次第而说。然而,因为没有如上所说的那种安立,众多言说不可能同时生起,所以必须按某种先后来说;因此,仅仅依各自意趣而说的次第,就应当看作是说法的次第。所谓“由前后安立”,是指最初是色蕴,然后是受蕴,这样依前后安立,而不是依生起。所谓“非应断”,是说在诸蕴中,有些根本不存在应断的性质,哪里谈得上断的次第呢?如果一切都要断,那才可以按断的次第来说。所谓“非应修习”,是因为不能以正行的方式去修习。所谓“由摄于四地”,这是显示受等是不定地的。因为如果是定地,才可能有地的次第。巴利
Uppattikkamoti yathāpaccayaṃ uppajjantānaṃ uppajjanapaṭipāṭi. ‘‘Dassanenapahātabbā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. tikamātikā 8, 9) paṭhamaṃ pahātabbā paṭhamaṃ vuttā, dutiyaṃ pahātabbā dutiyaṃ vuttāti ayaṃ pahānakkamo. Sīlavisuddhiṃ paṭipajja cittavisuddhi paṭipajjitabbā, tathā tato parāpīti āha ‘‘sīlavisuddhi…pe… paṭipattikkamo’’ti, anupubbapaṇītā bhūmiyo anupubbena vavatthitāti ayaṃ bhūmikkamo. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādiko (vibha. 355) ekakkhaṇepi satipaṭṭhānādisambhavato desanākkamo ca. Dānakathādayo anupubbukkaṃsato kathitā, uppattiādivavatthānābhāvato pana dānādīnaṃ idha desanākkamavacanaṃ. Uppattiādivavatthānahetukatāya hi ‘‘paṭhamaṃ kalalaṃ hotī’’tiādikā (saṃ. ni. 1.235; kathā. 692) desanāpi samānā uppattiādikamabhāveneva vuttā. Yathāvuttavavatthānābhāvena pana anekesaṃ vacanānaṃ sahapavattiyā asambhavato yena kenaci pubbāpariyena desetabbatāya tena tena adhippāyena desanāmattasseva kamo desanākkamo daṭṭhabbo. Pubbāpariyavavatthānenāti paṭhamaṃ rūpakkhandho, tato vedanākkhandhoti evaṃ pubbāpariyavavatthānena anuppattito. Appahātabbatoti khandhesu ekaccānaṃ pahātabbatāva natthi, kuto pahānakkamo. Sati hi sabbesaṃ pahātabbatāya pahānakkamena nesaṃ desanā siyā. Appaṭipajjanīyatoti sammāpaṭipattivasena na paṭipajjitabbato. ‘‘Catubhūmipariyāpannattā’’ti iminā vedanādīnaṃ aniyatabhūmikataṃ dasseti. Niyatabhūmikānañhi bhūmikkamo sambhaveyya.
不分开,就是不对色等作区分、划分,而是整体地、总括地把握。堕入我执,就是堕入被称为我执的邪见暴流之中。以见聚合密集的分离,就是通过把非色从色中分离出来,以照见色与非色聚合中密集的区分。眼等也是境域的一部分,这是以部分来表示整体的色蕴。在这里,感受可意和不可意的色,这就是受蕴;也就是说,开示了感受可意和不可意之色的受蕴,如此衔接。一切处都依此类推。可意中舍和不可意中舍,因为它们的本质就是可意和不可意,所以仅凭把握可意和不可意,就视为已经被把握了。如是,就是依照上述的方式。在依想而把握的相状之境中,有行的转起,所以说依想而造作者。识对相应诸法的依止性很明显,受等则不是这样,所以说受等的依止。由诸法以意为前导、诸法随心而转、六门之主宰王这些说法,可知以识为增上。巴利
Abhedenāti rūpādīnaṃ bhedaṃ vibhāgaṃ akatvā ekajjhaṃ piṇḍaggahaṇena. Attagāhapatitanti attagāhasaṅkhāte diṭṭhoghe nipatitaṃ. Samūhaghanavinibbhogadassanenāti rūpato arūpaṃ vivecento rūpārūpasamūhe ghanavinibbhujjanadassanena. Cakkhuādīnampi visayabhūtanti ekadesena samudāyabhūtaṃ rūpakkhandhaṃ vadati. Yā ettha iṭṭhaṃ, aniṭṭhañca rūpaṃ saṃvedeti, ayaṃ vedanākkhandhoti iṭṭhāniṭṭharūpasaṃvedanikaṃ vedanaṃ desesīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Iṭṭhamajjhattaaniṭṭhamajjhattānampi iṭṭhāniṭṭhasabhāvattā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaggahaṇeneva gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evanti yathāvuttanayena. Saññāya gahitākāre visaye abhisaṅkhārappavattīti āha ‘‘saññāvasena abhisaṅkhārake’’ti. Yathā viññāṇassa sampayuttadhammānaṃ nissayabhāvo pākaṭo, na tathā vedanādīnanti āha ‘‘vedanādīnaṃ nissaya’’nti. ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā (dha. pa. 1-2), cittānuparivattino dhammā (dha. sa. dukamātikā 62), chadvārādhipati rājā’’ti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.181 erakapatthanāgarājavatthu) vacanato viññāṇaṃ adhipati.
505 在色蕴中说“有漏、可执取”,是为了否定色蕴具有无漏法的本质,因为无漏法是存在的;而不是为了否定无漏的色。巴利
505. Rūpakkhandhe ‘‘sāsavaṃ upādāniya’’nti vacanaṃ anāsavānaṃ dhammānaṃ sabbhāvato rūpakkhandhassa taṃsabhāvatānivattanatthaṃ, na anāsavarūpanivattanatthaṃ.
“无漏法只在诸蕴中被说”这句话里,eva 这个词是位置不当的,意思是:无漏法只在诸蕴中被说。不过在这里,也就是在《清净道论》中,所有这些既是蕴,也是取蕴。巴利
Anāsavāva khandhesu vuttāti ettha aṭṭhānappayutto eva-saddo, anāsavā khandhesveva vuttāti attho. Idha pana visuddhimagge sabbepete khandhāpi upādānakkhandhāpi.
506 一切有为法通过共同性归成一类,就是“一切有为法的共同性归为一类”。因为按共同性的本质来归类时,一切有为法就是五蕴。其中,以变坏等共同特征而具有相同类别的,应当知道就是“同类”。在这些当中,那以策励为作用、力量强大的思,以造作有为为功用,因此被称为“行蕴”。其他如触等法,虽然没有变坏等各自独特的特征,但以造作有为的共同性来看,也应当如此理解;然而,触等法的自性不能单独用“蕴”这个词来称呼,所以通达法之自性的如来没有说“触蕴”等。又依据“诸比丘,凡任何沙门或婆罗门持常住论,施设常住的自我和世间,他们全都依止这五取蕴,或依止其中某一蕴”等经文,应当知道执取我与我所有最多也就到此为止。通过这一点,以及后面将要说的经文,可以说明:仅仅依止诸蕴、以有限所缘等方式生起的见,除了蕴和涅槃之外,再没有其他具有自性的法可作为依据,所以不应说它另有依据。所谓“色”,是指具有变坏自性的法类。受等也是如此。由于有“戒蕴、定蕴”等说法,为了回应“不只是五蕴”的质疑,所以说“其他被包含在这里面”,因为确实存在其他可以称为蕴的戒蕴等。巴利
506. Sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ sabhāgena ekajjhaṃ saṅgaho sabbasaṅkhatasabhāgekasaṅgaho. Sabhāgasabhāvena hi saṅgayhamānā sabbasaṅkhatā pañcakkhandhā honti. Tattha ruppanādisāmaññena samānakoṭṭhāsā sabhāgāti veditabbā. Tesu saṅkhatābhisaṅkharaṇakiccaṃ āyūhanarasāya cetanāya balavanti sā ‘‘saṅkhārakkhandho’’ti vuttā. Aññe ca ruppanādivisesalakkhaṇarahitā phassādayo saṅkhatābhisaṅkharaṇasāmaññenāti daṭṭhabbā, phusanādayo pana sabhāvā visuṃ khandhasaddavacanīyā na hontīti dhammasabhāvaññunā tathāgatena phassakkhandhādayo na vuttāti veditabbā. ‘‘Ye hi keci, bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā sassatavādā sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti, sabbe te ime eva pañcupādānakkhandhe nissāya paṭicca, etesaṃ vā aññatara’’nti evamādisuttānañca vasena attattaniyagāhassa etapparamatā daṭṭhabbā. Etena ca vakkhamānasuttavasena ca khandhe eva nissāya parittārammaṇādivasena na vattabbā ca diṭṭhi uppajjati khandhanibbānavajjassa sabhāvadhammassa abhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Rūpanti ruppanasabhāvaṃ dhammajātamāha. Vedanantiādīsupi eseva nayo. ‘‘Sīlakkhandho samādhikkhandho’’tiādi (dī. ni. 3.355) vacanato aññesañca khandhasaddavacanīyānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ sabbhāvato na pañcevāti codanaṃ nivattetumāha ‘‘aññesaṃ tadavarodhato’’ti.
507 507. 它作为生起之处,就像居住的地方,所以说“从住处来看”。应当从苦苦、变易苦、行苦这三个角度,来看待受的恼害作用。与贪等烦恼相应而生的变易等苦,其生起因就是以执取男女等相状、以种种思惟为根本的想。就像胆汁等是疾病的近因一样,这是生起因;就像时节不调、饮食不调、不适当的护理等是根本原因一样,这是根源。心所是心的组成部分,因此识被比喻为病人。就像麻风病患者涂油会使病情加重一样,愚者以福行等来造作,就会带来受之苦,如同服用了不适宜的东西。所谓“为了受性”,就是为了受的自性,意思是“为了获得受性”。因为它是原因所在之处,又是食物的依托,所以色被比喻为牢狱、比喻为容器。由于以净想等作为受之原因的因性,又因为能覆盖受之食物,所以想被比喻为罪犯、比喻为调味品。从受之因的角度来说,行蕴被比喻为造因者、比喻为分发食物的人。因为做饭的人大多负责分发食物,所以取了“分发者”这个比喻。由于被受所恼害,又应当被资助,所以识被比喻为罪犯、比喻为食者。巴利
507. Pavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘nivāsaṭṭhānato’’ti. Dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhatāvasena vedanāya ābādhakattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Rāgādisampayuttassa vipariṇāmādidukkhassa itthipurisādiākāragāhikā taṃtaṃsaṅkappamūlabhūtā saññā samuṭṭhānaṃ. Pittādi viya rogassa āsannakāraṇaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ. Utubhojanavisamatāvisamaparihārādi viya mūlakāraṇaṃ nidānaṃ. Cittassa aṅgabhūtā cetasikāti viññāṇaṃ gilānūpamaṃ vuttaṃ. Kuṭṭharogavato siniyhanaṃ tassa bhiyyobhāvāya viya bālassa puññābhisaṅkhārādivasena pavatti vedanādukkhāvahā asappāyasevanasadisī. Vedanattāyāti vedanāsabhāvatthaṃ, vedanattalābhāyāti attho. Kāraṇaṭṭhānatāya, bhojanādhāratāya ca cārakūpamaṃ, bhājanūpamañca rūpaṃ. Subhasaññādivasena vedanākāraṇassa hetubhāvato, vedanābhojanassa chādāpanato ca aparādhūpamā, byañjanūpamā ca saññā. Vedanāhetuto kāraṇakārakūpamo, parivesakūpamo ca saṅkhārakkhandho. Bhattakāro eva yebhuyyena parivisatīti parivesakaggahaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vibādhitabbato, anuggahetabbato ca aparādhikūpamaṃ, bhuñjakūpamañca viññāṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
508 508. “比丘们,五取蕴就被称为五个杀手、敌人、拔剑者。”在《蛇喻经》(相应部 4.238)中,它们被称为杀手;在《负担经》(相应部 3.22)中说:“比丘们,五取蕴就被称为负担。”所以它们被称为负担;在《所食经》的教示(相应部 3.79)中说:“我过去也照样被色所啃食,就像现在被当下的色所啃食一样。如果我喜欢未来的色,那么未来我也会照样被色所啃食,就像……被啃食一样。”所以它们被称为啃食者;在《焰摩迦经》(相应部 3.85)中说:“他不如实了知无常的色为‘无常的色’。”如此等等,所以它们被称为无常等。虽然这里说“但在此,把这一切合在一起,意指为蕴”,但应当知道,通常应当理解为包含在其中的五取蕴。因为这是对观(毗婆舍那)行境的分别考察。巴利
508. ‘‘Pañca vadhakā paccatthikā ukkhittāsikāti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ adhivacana’’nti āsīvisūpame (saṃ. ni. 4.238) vadhakāti vuttā, ‘‘bhāroti kho, bhikkhave, pañcannetaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ adhivacana’’nti bhārasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.22) bhārāti, ‘‘atītampāhaṃ addhānaṃ evameva rūpena khajjiṃ, seyyathāpi etarahi paccuppannena rūpena khajjāmi. Ahañceva kho pana anāgataṃ rūpaṃ abhinandeyyaṃ, anāgatampāhaṃ addhānaṃ evameva rūpena khajjeyyaṃ, seyyathāpi…pe… khajjāmī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.79) khajjanīyapariyāye khādakāti, ‘‘so aniccaṃ rūpaṃ ‘aniccaṃ rūpa’nti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 3.85) yamakasutte aniccādikāti. Yadipi ‘‘idha pana sabbepete ekajjhaṃ katvā khandhāti adhippetā’’ti vuttaṃ, bāhullena pana upādānakkhandhānaṃ tadantogadhānaṃ daṭṭhabbatā veditabbā. Vipassanāya bhūmivicāro hesoti.
在“如泡沫团”等比喻里,应当这样理解色等法与泡沫团等的相似:就像泡沫团没有实质、极其脆弱、不可执取,即使执取了也办不成任何事,它满是孔洞和缝隙,由许多接合处拼凑而成,是众多小虫的住处,逐步堆积起来,在每一个阶段都会崩坏,必定会破碎;同样,色也没有常恒的实质等等,所以无实质,就像边材一样;因为容易破碎,所以脆弱;不应执取为常、恒、我或我所,即使执取了也不会成为那样。它有许多孔洞,由一百八十个骨节拼合而成,是许多虫类的巢穴,从凝滑等阶段逐步堆积起来,从凝滑时期开始,在一切阶段都会灭去,而且必定会毁坏。不过,注释书里只把“不堪碾压”说成是譬喻与所喻之间的关联。巴利
Pheṇapiṇḍoviyātiādīsu rūpādīnaṃ evaṃ pheṇapiṇḍādisadisatā daṭṭhabbā, yathā pheṇapiṇḍo nissāro paridubbalo agayhupago; gahitopi kiñci atthaṃ na sādheti, chiddāvachiddo anekasandhisaṅghaṭito bahūnaṃ pāṇakānaṃ āvāso anupubbūpacito sabbāvatthanipātī avassaṃbhedī, evaṃ rūpampi niccasārādivirahato nissāraṃ pheggu viya, sukhabhañjanīyato dubbalaṃ, niccanti vā dhuvanti vā ahanti vā mamanti vā na gahetabbaṃ, gahitampi tathā na hoti, bahuchiddaṃ asītisatasandhisaṅghaṭitaṃ anekakimikulāvāsaṃ kalalādivasena anupubbūpacitaṃ kalalakālato paṭṭhāya sabbāsupi avatthāsu vinassati, avassameva ca bhijjati. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.95; vibha. aṭṭha. 26 kamādivinicchayakathā) pana parimaddanāsahanameva upamūpameyyasambandho vutto.
就像水泡没有实质,极其脆弱,抓不住,就算抓住了也办不成任何事,不能长久存在;受也是这样。又像水泡是依靠水面、水滴、水垢和风这四种原因才生起的;受也是这样,依靠依处、所缘、烦恼垢和触的撞击这四种原因才生起。就像在水面上,水滴落下所生的风把叫做水垢的水膜聚拢起来,形成一个泡,这就叫水泡;同样,在依处上,由所缘进入视野所生的触,把没有断除的烦恼垢作为辅助条件聚拢起来,这就叫受。这里说的是由烦恼这种根本因、以及贪著所缘的烦恼所生的、属于轮回的受。或者,这是按最大范围来说四种缘,但其实缘少一些,受也照样会生起。这里说的是短暂而令人愉悦,这就是譬喻和所譬喻之间的对应关系。巴利
Yathā pubbuḷo nissāro paridubbalo agayhupago, gahitopi na kiñci atthaṃ sādheti, na ciraṭṭhitiko, tathā vedanāpi. Yathā ca pubbuḷo, udakatalaṃ, udakabinduṃ, udakajallikaṃ saṅkaḍḍhitvā puṭaṃ katvā gahaṇavātañcāti cattāri kāraṇāni paṭicca jāyati, evaṃ vedanāpi vatthuṃ, ārammaṇaṃ, kilesajallaṃ, phassasaṅghaṭṭanañcāti cattāri kāraṇāni paṭicca uppajjati. Yathā hi udakatale bindunipātajanito vāto udakajallikasaṅkhātaṃ udakalasikaṃ saṅkaḍḍhitvā puṭaṃ katvā pubbuḷaṃ nāma karoti, evaṃ vatthumhi ārammaṇāpāthagamanajanito phasso anupacchinnaṃ kilesajallaṃ sahakārīpaccayabhāvena saṅkaḍḍhitvā vedanaṃ nāma karoti. Idañca kilesehi mūlakāraṇabhūtehi, ārammaṇassādanabhūtehi ca nibbattaṃ vaṭṭagataṃ vedanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena vā cattāro paccayā vuttā, ūnehipi pana uppajjateva. Idha muhuttaramaṇīyatā upamopameyyasambandho vutto.
就像阳焰没有实质,抓不住,因为没法拿它来喝、来洗澡,也没法用它装满容器;同样,想也没有实质,抓不住。又像阳焰不断闪动,看起来好像有涌动的势头,欺骗大众;同样,想也以“青、黄、长、短”等方式在所缘上转起,仅仅停留在自性上,而成为邪执“净、乐、常”等的原因,从而欺骗世间。巴利
Yathā pana marīcikā asārā agayhupagā. Na hi taṃ gahetvā pātuṃ vā nhāyituṃ vā bhājanaṃ vā pūretuṃ sakkā, evaṃ saññāpi asārā agayhupagā. Yathā ca marīcikā vipphandamānā sañjātūmivegā viya khāyantī mahājanaṃ vippalambeti, evaṃ saññāpi ‘‘nīlaṃ pītaṃ dīghaṃ rassa’’ntiādinā ārammaṇe pavattamānā sabhāvamatte aṭṭhatvā ‘‘subhaṃ sukhaṃ nicca’’ntiādimicchāgāhassa kāraṇabhāvena lokaṃ vippalambeti.
就像芭蕉树干没有实心、没法拿来用。你没法拿它当椽子之类的材料,就算拿了也起不了那个作用,而且它是由许多层叶鞘凑在一起的。同样,行蕴也没有实心、没法执取。你没法把它当作常恒等来执取,就算执取了也不是那样,而且它是由许多法凑在一起的。因为触的特征是一回事,思等的特征又是另一回事,但把它们全部凑在一起,就叫做行蕴。巴利
Yathā kadalikkhandho asāro agayhupago. Na hi taṃ gahetvā gopānasīādīnaṃ atthāya upanetuṃ sakkā, upanītampi tathā na hoti, bahuvaṭṭisamodhāno ca hoti, evaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhopi asāro agayhupago. Na hi taṃ niccādivasena gahetuṃ sakkā, gahitampi tathā na hoti, bahudhammasamodhāno ca. Aññadeva hi phassassa lakkhaṇaṃ, aññaṃ cetanādīnaṃ, te pana sabbe samodhānetvā saṅkhārakkhandhoti vuccati.
就像幻术没有实质,也抓不住。因为没法抓住它来办成任何实际的事情,它只是短暂的、很容易就冒出来的,把不是宝石的东西显示成宝石的样子来骗大众。识也是这样,没有实质,短暂,很容易就冒出来。就是靠着同一个心,让人把它执取为好像在来、好像在去、好像在站、好像在坐,可是来的时候是一个心,去等的时候是另一个心。这样看来,识就跟幻术一样。巴利
Yathā ca māyā asārā agayhupagā. Na hi taṃ gahetvā kiñci atthaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetuṃ sakkā, ittarā lahupaccupaṭṭhānā amaṇiādimeva maṇiādirūpena dassentī mahājanaṃ vañceti, evaṃ viññāṇampi asāraṃ ittaraṃ lahupaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, teneva cittena āgacchantaṃ viya, gacchantaṃ viya, ṭhitaṃ viya, nisinnaṃ viya ca katvā gāhāpeti, aññadeva cittaṃ āgamane, aññaṃ gamanādīsūti. Evaṃ viññāṇaṃ māyāsadisaṃ.
五取蕴本身就以不净等为自性,是杂染与不净之物的所依等,因此就应观为不净等。即便如此,在某些地方,某种差别是容易把握的,所以说“特别而言”等。其中,四念处能断除四种颠倒;由于色蕴等正是四念处的所行境,所以在这些蕴当中,便说了应以不净等来观见。巴利
Pañcapi upādānakkhandhā asubhādisabhāvā eva saṃkilesāsucivatthubhāvāditoti asubhādito daṭṭhabbā eva, tathāpi katthaci koci viseso sukhaggahaṇīyo hotīti āha ‘‘visesato cā’’tiādi. Tattha cattāro satipaṭṭhānā catuvipallāsappahānakarāti tesaṃ gocarabhāvena rūpakkhandhādīsu asubhādibhāvena daṭṭhabbatā vuttā.
509 诸蕴不能恼害他,因为他已经完全了知诸蕴的自性。即使是修观的人,在诸蕴衰坏时也不会感到痛苦,至于诸漏已尽的人,那就不必说了。因为他们未来也不会被诸蕴所逼恼。巴利
509.Khandhehi na vihaññati parividitasabhāvattā. Vipassakopi tesaṃ vipattiyaṃ na dukkhamāpajjati, khīṇāsavesu pana vattabbameva natthi. Te hi āyatimpi khandhehi na bādhīyantīti.
“他遍知段食”的意思是:依据“由食的集起而有色的集起”这一说法,当他在内在色上舍断欲贪时,也就舍断了作为其生起根源的段食上的欲贪。这是断遍知。而当他把握内在色时,也把握了作为其条件的段食,这是知遍知。他观照那两者的生灭,则还应配上审察遍知。当这三种遍知这样成就时,这些颠倒等就被破除,所以说“舍断‘于不净执为净’的颠倒”等。其中,“贪欲身系”是就作为欲贪的贪欲而说的。因为通过不净随观,欲贪确实被舍断;或者,他是借欲贪这一入口来说舍断一切贪。他不执取、不抓取、不令生起。巴利
Kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ parijānātīti ‘‘āhārasamudayā rūpasamudayo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.56,57) vacanato ajjhattikarūpe chandarāgaṃ pajahanto tassa samudayabhūte kabaḷīkārāhārepi chandarāgaṃ pajahatīti attho. Ayaṃ pahānapariññā. Ajjhattikarūpaṃ pana pariggaṇhanto tassa paccayabhūtaṃ kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ pariggaṇhātīti ñātapariññā. Tassa ca udayabbayānupassī hotīti tīraṇapariññā ca yojetabbā. Evaṃ pariññattaye sijjhante ime vipallāsādayo vidhamīyanti evāti āha ‘‘asubhe subhanti vipallāsaṃ pajahatī’’tiādi. Tattha kāmarāgabhūtaṃ abhijjhaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘abhijjhākāyagantha’’nti. Asubhānupassanāya hi kāmarāgappahānaṃ hoti , kāmarāgamukhena vā sabbalobhappahānaṃ vadati. Na upādiyati na gaṇhati na uppādeti.
因为经中说“以触为缘而有受”,所以应当按照在遍知食时所说的方式,把遍知触也配合起来理解:就像“断除对受的欲贪的人,也断除了对作为受之因的触食的欲贪”等等所说的那样。通过把受看作苦,就能断除对受的“乐”的颠倒想。因为对存在的渴求本质上就是求乐,所以断除对受的渴爱时,就能渡过存在之流。也正是因此,从存在的束缚中解脱出来。又因为断除了有漏,就成为无漏者。把一切受都看作苦的人,不会去想“自己或他人新产生了未曾有过的苦,或者乐被毁坏了”,因此断除了“他对我做了不利的事”等嗔恨的理由,从而打破嗔恚身结。不执取“在乐多的善趣存在中能得到清净”,因为那些执取牛戒、狗戒等为清净的人,只是以求乐的方式在执取,所以即使断除了对受的渴爱,也不会执取戒禁取。巴利
‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.39; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; netti. 24) vuttattā ‘‘vedanāya chandarāgaṃ pajahanto tassā paccayabhūte phassāhārepi chandarāgaṃ pajahatī’’tiādinā āhāraparijānane vuttanayena phassaparijānanaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Vedanāya dukkhato dassanena tattha sukhanti vipallāsaṃ pajahati. Sukhatthameva bhavapatthanā hotīti vedanāya taṇhaṃ pajahanto bhavoghaṃ uttarati. Tato eva bhavayogena visaṃyujjati. Bhavāsavena ca anāsavo hoti, sabbavedanaṃ dukkhato passanto attano parena apubbaṃ dukkhaṃ uppāditaṃ, sukhaṃ vā vināsitaṃ na cinteti, tato ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādi (dha. sa. 1237; vibha. 909) āghātavatthuppahānato byāpādakāyaganthaṃ bhindati. ‘‘Sukhabahule sugatibhave suddhī’’ti aggahetvā gosīlagovatādīhi suddhiṃ parāmasanto sukhapatthanāvaseneva parāmasatīti vedanāya taṇhaṃ pajahantopi sīlabbatupādānaṃ na upādiyati.
意门思是行蕴,而想则与它相应。所以,当人观想与行是无我的,就会舍断对意门思的欲贪,也会进一步把握它、审察它,因此说“遍知想、行……”。为了说明观想与行是无我的人,因为我见是一切见的根源,所以就像断除我见一样,也会断除一切见,因此说“渡过见流……不执取我语取”。巴利
Manosañcetanā saṅkhārakkhandho, saññā pana taṃsampayuttāti saññāsaṅkhāre anattato passanto manosañcetanāya chandarāgaṃ pajahati, tañca pariggaṇhāti, tīreti cāti ‘‘saññaṃ saṅkhāre…pe… parijānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Saññāsaṅkhāre anattāti passanto attadiṭṭhimūlakattā sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ attadiṭṭhiṃ viya sabbadiṭṭhiyopi vidhamatīti dassento ‘‘diṭṭhoghaṃ uttarati…pe… attavādupādānaṃ na upādiyatī’’ti āha.
观识为无常的人,通过无常随观这个入口,努力修习三种随观,并以三种遍知来了知识食。这里特别要指出的是:他断除了在无常的事物上执为常的颠倒想。在这个过程里,因为执常的习气很重,无明会对识产生密集执取,所以把密集拆解开来、观它为无常的人,就能渡过无明流。正因为这样,他脱离了无明的束缚,不再有无明漏。戒禁取纯粹是因为愚痴的力量才产生的,所以断除它的人,就是在破除戒禁取身结。巴利
Viññāṇaṃ aniccato passanto aniccānupassanāmukhena tissopi anupassanā ussukkanto tīhipi pariññāhi viññāṇāhāraṃ parijānāti. Visesato panettha anicce niccanti vipallāsaṃ pajahati. Tattha niccaggāhabāhullato avijjāya viññāṇe ghanagahaṇaṃ hotīti ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā taṃ aniccato passanto avijjoghaṃ uttarati. Tato eva avijjāyogena visaṃyutto avijjāsavena anāsavo ca hoti. Mohabaleneva sīlabbataparāmasanaṃ hotīti taṃ pajahanto ‘‘sīlabbataparāmāsakāyaganthaṃ bhindati.
比丘们,这个被称为心、意、识的东西,未听闻佛法的凡夫对此无法厌离,无法离欲,无法解脱。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为未听闻佛法的凡夫长期以来对它执取、视为我所、紧紧抓住,认为“这是我的,这就是我,这是我的自我”。巴利
‘‘Yañca kho idaṃ, bhikkhave, vuccati cittaṃ itipi, mano itipi, viññāṇaṃ itipi, tatrāssutavā puthujjano nālaṃ nibbindituṃ, nālaṃ virajjituṃ, nālaṃ vimuccituṃ. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dīgharattaṃ hetaṃ, bhikkhave, assutavato puthujjanassa ajjhositaṃ mamāyitaṃ parāmaṭṭhaṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.62) –
按照这个说法,就像把识看成是常的人会执取见取一样,同样地,把它看成是无常的人就不会执取见取。巴利
Vacanato yathā viññāṇaṃ niccato passanto diṭṭhupādānaṃ upādiyati, evaṃ taṃ aniccato passanto diṭṭhupādānaṃ na upādiyatīti.
像这样有大利益:按照前面所说的方式,因为它是摧破颠倒等一切杂染的方法,所以有如此广大的果报。以杀害者等为喻:就是以举刀杀害者等为喻。见:就是以智见现前地看见。巴利
Evaṃ mahānisaṃsanti vuttappakārena vipallāsādisakalasaṃkilesavidhamanupāyabhāvato evaṃ vipuludayaṃ. Vadhakādivasenāti ukkhittāsikavadhakādivasena. Passeyyāti ñāṇadassanena paccakkhato passeyya.